Volvo XC40 2018 Owner's Manual

Add to my manuals
648 Pages

advertisement

Volvo XC40 2018 Owner's Manual | Manualzz
XC40
O W N ER' S MA N UA L
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo strives to be one of the safest cars in the world. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read
the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual.
The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and
on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other
cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or
medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER INFORMATION
YOUR VOLVO
16
Volvo ID
26
Safety
42
Owner's manual in centre display
17
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
26
Safety during pregnancy
42
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
18
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
28
Whiplash Protection System
43
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
20
IntelliSafe-driver support
31
Seatbelts
44
Volvo Cars support site
20
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
32
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
45
Reading the owner's manual
21
Software updates
35
Seatbelt tensioner
46
The owner's manual and the environment
23
Recording data
35
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner*
47
Terms & Conditions for Services
36
Door and seatbelt reminder
47
Customer Privacy Policy
36
Airbags
49
Important information on accessories
and auxiliary equipment
37
Driver airbags
49
Installation of accessories
37
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket
38
Showing the car's identification number
Driver distraction
2
SAFETY
Owner information
Passenger airbag
50
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag*
52
Side airbags
54
39
Airbags
55
39
Safety mode
55
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
56
Child safety
57
Child seats
58
Upper mounting points for child seats
58
Lower mounting points for child seats
59
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
60
Child seat positioning
60
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Child seat mounting
62
Overview table for location of child seats
63
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
64
Table for location of i-Size child seats
66
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
67
Instruments and controls in left-hand
drive car
72
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
73
Driver display
75
Driver display settings
77
Fuel gauge
77
Trip computer
78
Show trip data in the driver display
79
Resetting the trip meter
80
Show trip statistics in the centre display
80
Settings for trip statistics
81
Time and date
82
Outside temperature gauge
82
Indicator symbols in the driver display
83
Warning symbols in the driver display
85
License agreement for the driver display
86
Application menu in driver display
90
Handling the application menu in the
driver display
90
Messages in the driver display
91
Managing messages in the driver display
93
Handling a message saved from the
driver display
94
Overview of centre display
95
Managing the centre display
98
Activating and deactivating centre display 101
Navigating in the centre display's views
101
Managing tiles in centre display
105
Function view in centre display
108
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
110
Symbols in the centre display's status bar 110
Keyboard in centre display
112
Changing keyboard language in centre display
115
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre display
115
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
117
Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display
117
Changing system units
118
Changing system language
118
Opening settings in the centre display
118
Open contextual setup in the centre
display
119
Changing settings in the centre display
120
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
120
Resetting settings in the centre display
121
Setting types in the centre display
121
3
LIGHTING
122
Lighting control
134
Windows, glass and mirrors
148
Driver profiles
123
135
124
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
148
Selecting driver profile
Adjusting light functions via the centre display
Renaming a driver profile
125
Position lamps
135
Reset sequence for pinch protection
149
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
125
Daytime running lights
136
Power windows
149
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
125
Dipped beam
137
Operating power windows
150
Using main beam
137
Rearview and door mirrors
151
Active main beam
138
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
152
Managing messages in the centre display 127
Using direction indicators
139
Angling the door mirrors
153
Handling a message saved from the
centre display
128
Active bending lights*
140
Panorama roof*
154
Voice recognition
128
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
141
Operating the panorama roof*
156
Using voice recognition
129
Rear fog lamp
141
158
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
130
Brake lights
142
Automatic closing of the panoramic
roof's* sun blind
Emergency brake lights
142
Using windscreen wipers
159
Voice control of radio and media
131
Hazard warning flashers
143
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles*
160
Settings for voice recognition
131
Using home safe lighting
143
Using the rain sensor
160
Approach light duration
144
Using the rain sensor's memory function
161
Interior lighting
144
Adjusting interior lighting
146
Message in centre display
4
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Table showing centre display settings
126
Using windscreen and headlamp washers 162
Using the rear window wiper and washer
163
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
164
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
CLIMATE
Manual front seat
166
Climate
178
Power front seat*
167
Climate zones
178
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
194
Adjusting the power front seat*
167
Climate control - sensors
179
194
Perceived temperature
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated steering wheel*
Storing memory function in power
operated front seat*
168
179
Controlling climate control with voice
recognition
Activating auto climate control
180
195
195
Air quality
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
Using stored memory in a powered
front seat
169
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat*
169
181
Clean Zone*
181
Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation
196
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
170
Clean Zone Interior Package*
182
Activating and deactivating max defroster
196
Interior Air Quality System*
182
198
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
183
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
171
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
173
199
Passenger compartment filter
183
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated windscreen*
Steering wheel controls and horn
174
Air distribution
184
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
199
Steering lock
Adjusting the steering wheel
175
Changing air distribution
185
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
185
Table of air distribution options
Activating and deactivating automatic
starting of the heated rear window
and door mirrors
200
175
187
Climate controls
Regulating fan level for front seat
190
200
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
Regulating temperature for front seat
191
201
Synchronising temperature
202
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated front seat*
192
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
202
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
192
Parking climate*
203
Preconditioning*
204
Activating and deactivating ventilated
front seat*
193
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
204
Preconditioning time setting*
205
5
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
6
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning*
205
Lock confirmation
216
Lock indication setting
217
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
245
Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning*
207
Remote control key
217
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
246
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
207
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
219
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
247
Climate comfort when parking*
208
Settings for remotely controlled and
inside unlocking
220
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
Automatic locking when driving
248
208
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
221
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
248
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
210
Remote control key range
222
251
Heater*
211
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate*
222
252
Parking heater*
212
Ordering more remote control keys
Opening and closing the tailgate with
foot movement*
226
Additional heater*
213
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
Private locking
226
253
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of auxiliary heater
213
Red Key settings*
227
Activating and deactivating private
locking
253
Detachable key blade
227
Alarm*
255
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
229
Activating and deactivating alarms*
256
Immobiliser
230
Type approval for the remote control
key system
232
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
241
Keyless locking and unlocking*
242
Settings for Keyless entry*
243
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
243
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
244
Reduced alarm level*
258
Double lock*
258
Temporarily deactivating double locks*
259
Detection of unknown car component*
259
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
262
Activating and starting Cruise Control
277
Speed-dependent steering force
262
Managing speed for the Cruise Control
278
Change between Cruise Control and
Adaptive Cruise Control
292
Stability system Roll Stability Control
263
279
Electronic stability control
264
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it
in standby mode
Symbols and messages for Adaptive
Cruise Control
294
Sport mode for electronic stability control
265
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
279
Pilot Assist
296
Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
265
Deactivating Cruise Control
299
280
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control
266
Adaptive Cruise Control*
300
281
Managing speed for Pilot Assist
301
Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision
risk warning
283
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control
267
302
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
284
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist
304
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
Speed Limiter
268
306
Activating and starting the Speed Limiter
269
306
Managing speed for the Speed Limiter
269
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set
it in standby mode
Managing speed with Adaptive
Cruise Control
285
Start overtaking assistance with Pilot
Assist
286
Limitations for overtaking assistance
with Pilot Assist
306
270
Setting time interval for Adaptive
Cruise Control
287
Change the target with Pilot Assist
307
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
standby mode
271
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist
307
Deactivating the Speed Limiter
289
271
Overtaking assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control
Limitations for Speed Limiter
272
272
Starting overtaking assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control
289
Automatic Speed Limiter
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed
Limiter
274
Limitations for overtaking assistance
with Adaptive Cruise Control
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter
Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter
Cruise Control
Limitations of Pilot Assist
308
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
309
Radar unit
311
290
Limitations for radar device
312
315
275
Changing target with Adaptive
Cruise Control
290
Recommended radar device maintenance
Type approval for radar device
316
275
Automatic braking with Adaptive
Cruise Control
291
Camera unit
322
Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control
292
Limitations for camera unit
323
276
7
Recommended camera device maintenance
326
City Safety™
326
Parameters and subfunctions for City
Safety
327
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
329
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
330
City Safety in cross traffic
332
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic
333
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented
333
Limitations of City Safety
334
Messages for City Safety
337
Rear Collision Warning
338
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning
338
BLIS*
339
Activate/deactivate BLIS
348
Road Sign Information*
349
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
350
Road Sign Information and sign display
350
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
352
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
352
Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information
353
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information
354
Limitations of Road Sign Information
354
Driver Alert Control
355
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
356
357
Lane assistance symbols in the
driver display
364
Steering assistance at risk of collision
365
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision risk
365
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
366
Steering assistance level in the event
of a run-off risk
367
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of run-off risk
367
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of running off the road
368
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
369
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a risk of a
head-on collision
370
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of head-on collision
370
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance upon risk of collision
372
340
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning with Driver Alert
Control
Limitations of BLIS
341
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
357
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
341
Lane assistance
357
Park Assist*
373
343
Steering assistance with lane assistance
359
374
360
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides
360
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
375
Limitations of Parking assistance
375
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
376
Messages for BLIS
344
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
345
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
345
Select assistance option for lane
assistance
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
346
Cross Traffic Alert*
8
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert
Limitations of Lane assistance
360
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
362
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
377
Park assist camera*
378
Parking cameras' camera views
379
Park assist lines for parking camera
381
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot
for parking camera
383
Starting the park assist camera
383
Limitations for park assist camera
384
Recommended parking camera
maintenance
385
Starting the car
396
Auto braking after a collision
408
Switching off the car
397
Gearbox
409
Ignition positions
398
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
410
Selecting ignition mode
399
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
411
Gear selector inhibitor
412
Kick-down function
413
Gear shift indicator*
413
Alcohol lock*
399
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
400
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
400
Brake functions
401
All-wheel drive
413
Foot brake
401
Drive modes*
414
Brake assistance
402
Changing drive mode*
416
Braking on wet roads
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
386
402
Drive mode ECO
416
Park Assist Pilot*
387
Braking on gritted roads
403
418
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot
387
Brake system maintenance
403
Activating and deactivating drive
mode ECO with the function button
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
388
Parking brake
403
Start/Stop function
419
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
404
Driving with start/stop function
419
420
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
405
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
temporarily
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
421
Parking on a hill
406
Level control* and shock absorption
423
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
406
Low speed control*
425
Automatic braking when stationary
407
Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving* using a function button
425
Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill
407
Hill descent control*
426
Help when starting on a hill
408
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control* with the function button
427
Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
391
392
393
394
9
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
10
Economical driving
428
Trailer stability assist*
449
Sound, media and Internet
464
Preparations for a long trip
428
Checking trailer lamps
450
Audio settings
464
465
Winter driving
429
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
451
Apps
Driving in water
430
Towing
452
Downloading apps
466
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
430
Fitting and removing the towing eye
453
Updating apps
467
Filling fuel
431
Recovery
455
Deleting apps
467
Handling of fuel
432
HomeLink®*
456
Radio
468
Petrol
432
Programming HomeLink®*
456
Start radio
468
Petrol particle filter
433
Using HomeLink
458
Changing radio band and radio station
469
Diesel
434
459
Searching for radio stations
470
Empty tank and diesel engine
435
Setting radio favourites
470
Settings for radio
471
Diesel particulate filter
436
Emission control with AdBlue®
436
Handling AdBlue®
437
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
Type approval for
HomeLink®*
Compass*
459
Activating and deactivating the compass*
460
Calibrating the compass*
460
RDS radio
472
Digital radio*
473
438
Link between FM and digital radio*
474
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
440
Media player
474
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
442
Media playback
475
Overloading the starter battery
443
Controlling and changing media
476
Using jump starting with another battery
443
Searching media
477
Towbar*
444
Gracenote®
478
Specifications for towbar*
445
Video
478
Extendable and retractable towbar*
446
Driving with a trailer
448
Playing a video
Playing back
DivX®
Settings for video
479
479
479
Media via Bluetooth®
Connecting a device via
480
Bluetooth®
480
Media via USB port
480
Connecting a device via USB port
481
Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones
493
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
493
Managing phone calls
493
Managing text messages
494
Settings for text messages
495
Managing the phone book
496
Settings for phone
496
Settings for Bluetooth devices
497
TV*
481
Using the TV*
482
Settings for TV*
482
Apple® CarPlay®*
483
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
483
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
Wireless phone charger*
497
485
Using the wireless telephone charger*
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
497
485
Internet-connected car*
498
Android Auto*
486
499
Using Android Auto*
487
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Bluetooth)
Settings for Android Auto*
487
500
Tips for using Android Auto*
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Wi-Fi)
488
Phone
488
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
500
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
489
Settings for car modem
501
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
491
Sharing Internet access from the car
via a Wi-Fi hotspot
502
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
No or poor Internet connection
492
503
Remove Wi-Fi network
503
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
492
Wi-Fi technologies and security
504
User terms and conditions and data
sharing
504
Activating and deactivating data sharing
504
Compatible media formats
505
Technical specifications for USB devices
506
Storage space on hard disk
506
License agreement for audio and media
507
11
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
518
Emergency puncture repair kit
537
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Dimension designation for tyre
519
Using a puncture repair kit
538
Passenger compartment interior
544
520
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
542
Tunnel console
545
Using the cigarette lighter*
545
Dimension designation for wheel rim
Tyres' rotation direction
521
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
521
Emptying the ashtray*
546
Checking tyre pressure
522
Electrical sockets
546
522
Using electrical sockets
547
523
Using the glovebox
548
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
524
Sun visors
549
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring*
525
Cargo area
550
Recommendations for loading
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display*
550
527
Roof load and loading on load carriers
551
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
528
Bag hooks
551
Load retaining eyelets
552
When changing wheels
529
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
552
Tool kit
529
Folding up the cargo area floor
553
Jack*
529
Fitting and removing the safety net*
553
Wheel bolts
530
555
Removing a wheel
531
Removing and storing the parcel
shelf in the car
Fitting the wheels
533
First aid kit
556
Spare wheel*
534
Warning triangle
556
Taking out the spare wheel
535
Winter wheels
536
Snow chains
536
Adjusting tyre pressure
Recommended tyre pressure
12
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
560
Symbols on the batteries
583
Touching up minor paintwork damage
604
Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi
560
Fuses and central electrical units
584
Colour codes
605
Download Center
561
Replacing a fuse
585
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
606
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
561
Fuses in engine compartment
586
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
607
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
590
Wiper blades in service position
608
Cleaning the interior
593
Filling washer fluid
609
Cleaning the centre display
593
Car status
Book service and repair
562
562
Sending car information to a workshop
564
Raise the car
565
Opening and closing the bonnet
Servicing the climate control system
Engine compartment overview
567
568
569
Engine oil
570
Checking and filling with engine oil
571
Topping up coolant
572
Bulb replacement
573
Exterior lamp positions
574
Replacing the rear direction indicator
bulb
575
Changing brake light bulb
576
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
577
Bulb specifications
578
Starter battery
579
Support battery
582
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 594
Cleaning the seatbelts
595
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
595
Cleaning leather upholstery
596
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
596
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
597
Cleaning the exterior
597
Polishing and waxing
598
Handwashing
598
Automatic car wash
600
High-pressure washing
601
Cleaning the wiper blades
601
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
trim components
602
Cleaning wheel rims
603
Rustproofing
603
Car paintwork
604
13
SPECIFICATIONS
612
Dimensions
615
Weights
617
Towing capacity and towball load
618
Engine specifications
620
Engine oil — specifications
621
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
622
Coolant — specifications
623
Transmission fluid — specifications
623
Brake fluid — specifications
623
Fuel tank - volume
624
Tank capacity for
14
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations
AdBlue®
624
Air conditioning — specifications
624
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
626
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
628
Lowest permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres
629
Approved tyre pressures
630
Alphabetical Index
631
OWNER INFORMATION
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner information
The car's centre display1
Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's centre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a
supplement to the owner's manual available in
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
In the centre display, drag down
the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual navigation with exterior and interior
images of the car. The information is searchable and is also
divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car. Available in the app are
video tutorials and options for
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets.
1A
16
complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to
order.
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the printed information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
OWNER INFORMATION
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display
may mean that some owner information is not
compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is
difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back in the structure on
screen.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 20)
Owner's manual in centre display
A digital2 version of the owner's manual is available in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual can be accessed from
the top view, and in some cases the contextual
owner's manual can also be accessed from the
top view.
The information in the owner's manual can be
accessed directly via the owner's manual homepage or its top menu.
Contextual owner's manual
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Owner's manual
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
The contextual owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
When the contextual owner's manual is available,
it is shown to the right of Owner's manual in
the top view.
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the top
view in the centre display and tap on Owner's
manual.
2
Applies for most markets.
Pressing the contextual owner's manual opens
an article in the owner's manual that is related to
the content that is shown on the screen. E.g.
press Navigation Manual - an article that is
related to navigation opens.
This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
possible, for example, to access app-specific articles.
}}
17
OWNER INFORMATION
||
Related information
•
Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre
display (p. 18)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
•
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display top view in the car. The
content is searchable and it is easy to navigate
between different sections.
Opening the menu in the top menu
–
Press
in the upper list in the owner's
manual.
> A menu containing various options for
finding information opens:
Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the owner's
manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcategories. The same article can be
found in several appropriate
categories in order to be found
more easily.
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
–
To open the owner's manual - drag down the
top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the owner's manual. The options
can be accessed from the owner's manual homepage and from the top menu.
1.
Press Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2.
Tap on a main category ( ).
> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles
( ) is shown.
3.
Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
18
OWNER INFORMATION
Quick Guide
Press the symbol to access a
page with links to a selection of
articles that can be particularly
useful to read in order to get to
know the most common functions of the car. The articles
can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for quick access.
Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with hotspots that lead to articles about
those parts of the car.
2.
3.
Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
Tap on the title to open the article.
Favourites
Press the symbol to access the
articles saved as favourites. Tap
on an article in order to read it
in its entirety.
Saving or deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing
at the
top right when an article is open. When an article
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:
.
Video
Press Exterior or Interior.
> Exterior or interior images are shown with
so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot
leads to articles about the corresponding
part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
screen to browse among the images.
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version
of the owner's manual is available in the car as well as other
useful information.
To go back, press the back arrow.
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star
again in the current article.
1.
Information
Press the symbol to view brief
instruction videos for various
functions in the car.
Using the search function in the top
menu
1.
in the top menu of the owner's
Tap on
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
of the screen.
2.
Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered.
3.
Tap on the article or category to access it.
Related information
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 112)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
19
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
The owner's manual is available as a mobile
app3 from both the App Store and Google Play.
The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
in the owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the
Volvo Cars website and support site.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
support site is available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and stepby-step instructions explain different procedures,
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a
mobile phone.
Downloadable information
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior and
interior images where different parts of the car
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections
3
20
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play.
Related information
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to customer support and your nearest Volvo retailer.
For certain mobile devices.
* Option/accessory.
OWNER INFORMATION
Log in to Volvo Cars website
Reading the owner's manual
Options/accessories
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is
possible to get an overview of service, agreements and warranties, amongst other things.
Here there is also information about accessories
and software adapted for your car model.
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's manual.
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
Related information
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
The intention of this owner's information is to
explain all of the possible features, functions and
options included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not
intended as an indication or guarantee that all of
these features, functions and options are
included in every vehicle. Some terminology used
may not exactly match terminology used in sales,
marketing and advertising materials.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications may
mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make
modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if problems should arise then the necessary information
about where and how to seek professional help
will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk: *.
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
}}
* Option/accessory.
21
OWNER INFORMATION
||
Footnote
Warning of personal injury
The owner's manual contains information in certain locations in the form of a footnote at the bottom of the page or at the end of a table. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
Information
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show menu and
message texts. In the owner's manual the
appearance of these texts differs from the normal
text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
Phone, New message.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and location in
the car. The information that applies to your
particular car is available on the respective
decals for your car.
22
OWNER INFORMATION
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual:
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the relative order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
Related information
Related information refers to other articles containing closely associated information.
Images
Illustrations used in the owner's manual are
sometimes schematic and are intended to provide an overall picture or example of a certain
function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's
appearance depending on equipment level and
market.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or
other controlled sources.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
Related information
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 20)
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
23
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID
Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of personalized Volvo services1 online.
Related information
•
•
Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26)
Book service and repair (p. 562)
It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car,
volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app2. Certain
functions and services require that the car is registered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the
Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo
services available directly from the car.
Examples of services:
•
Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when logging in to the Volvo On Call app.
•
Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an
address from an Internet map service directly
to the car.
•
Book Service and Repair - Register your preferred workshop/retailer at volvocars.com to
be able to book service directly from the car.
Advantages of Volvo ID
•
•
1
2
3
26
One user name and one password to access
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember.
If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
changed automatically for other services.
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com
or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must
also be registered to the car to enable use of the
various Volvo ID services.
Create a Volvo ID with the app
1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download
Centre in the centre display's app view.
2.
Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3.
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo
ID.
2.
Enter a personal email address.
3.
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
If you have Volvo On Call*.
Available in certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call
app4
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
3.
2.
Related information
3.
Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
•
•
•
•
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the email address linked to your
Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows:
1.
If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from Download Centre in the app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet.
2.
Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
4 Cars
with Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
27
YOUR VOLVO
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
28
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
YOUR VOLVO
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment here is some advice:
•
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph)
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to
increased energy consumption.
•
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
•
Use preconditioning* before starting in cold
conditions - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine
reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which decreases consumption and
reduces emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
therefore requested to contact a retailer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
}}
* Option/accessory.
29
YOUR VOLVO
||
Related information
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 626)
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 428)
•
30
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 204)
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 23)
Air quality (p. 181)
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
IntelliSafe-driver support
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car
safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems, both standard and optional, whose purpose is to make a car journey safe, to prevent
injuries and to protect passengers and other
road users.
Support
IntelliSafe includes driver support functions such
as Adaptive cruise control* which helps the driver
to maintain an even speed combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Pilot Assist5 helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's edge markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver to park in or
leave a parking space.
Other examples of systems that can help the
driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
systems.
Prevention
City Safety is a function that can contribute to
preventing accidents. The function can prevent or
mitigate a collision with pedestrians, cyclists,
larger animals or vehicles. Visual, acoustic and
5
brake pulse warnings are given in the event of a
risk of collision to help the driver act in time. If the
driver does not react to the warning and the risk
of collision is assessed as imminent then City
Safety can automatically brake the car.
•
•
•
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Airbags (p. 49)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Lane assistance (LKA) is another example of a
function that can help prevent accidents by helping the driver - on motorways and similar larger
roads - to reduce the risk of the car accidentally
leaving its own lane.
The function Steering aid during increased
collision risk can help the driver reduce the risk
of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or
colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by
actively steering the car back into its lane and/or
swerving.
Protection
With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers, the car is equipped with seatbelt tensioners
which can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and in collisions. The car also has airbags
and inflatable curtains, as well as Whiplash
Protection System (WHIPS), which protects
against whiplash injuries.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 262)
Active main beam (p. 138)
Safety (p. 42)
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
31
YOUR VOLVO
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
Information when it is needed, where it
is needed
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet,
use different types of apps and make the car a
Wi-Fi hotspot.
The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is shown in
different locations based on how it should be prioritised by the driver.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online
connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communication possible between you, the car and the outside world.
32
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Driver display
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
played. The display is operated via the two steering wheel keypads.
Centre display
Driver display6.
6
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
33
YOUR VOLVO
||
Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore minimal. The screen can even be operated while
wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the climate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the driver
needing to take his/her hands
off the steering wheel. The system can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
34
Driver display (p. 75)
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 502)
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Software updates
Recording data
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best
experience of your car, Volvo continuously develops the systems in the cars and the services that
you are offered.
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
You can update the software in your Volvo to the
latest version when your car is serviced at an
authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software
update gives you access to new functions and
improvements, as well as previous improvements
included with previous software updates.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
For more information about released updates and
answers to frequently asked questions, please go
to support.volvocars.com.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary depending on market, model, model year and options.
Related information
•
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32)
•
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
•
•
How the various systems in the car worked
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
}}
35
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely stored and
managed and that its management complies with
relevant legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo retailer.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo offers services so that you can drive your
Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible.
These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various
maintenance services.
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
integrity of everyone visiting our website.
This policy regards to the handling of customer
data and personal information. The purpose is to
give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of:
Before using the services, it is important for you
to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36)
•
•
•
•
The circumstances in which we gather and
process your personal data.
The types of personal data we gather.
The reason we gather your personal data.
How we handle your personal data.
This policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
36
•
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 504)
•
•
Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36)
Recording data (p. 35)
YOUR VOLVO
Important information on
accessories and auxiliary
equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively
affect the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer
system.
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
Options or accessories described in this manual
are marked with an asterisk. In the event of
uncertainty over what is standard or an option/
accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
WARNING
The driver always bears the ultimate responsibility that the car is used safely and that laws
and regulations in force are followed.
It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information and
the service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual then the printed information always has precedence.
Installation of accessories
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when
associated software is installed in the car's computer system.
•
Volvo original accessories are tested to
ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions
control. In addition, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where accessories may or may not be safely installed in
your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
before installing any accessories in or on
your car.
•
Accessories that are not approved by Volvo
may not have been specifically tested for use
with your car.
•
Some of the car's performance or safety systems can be negatively affected if you install
accessories that have not been tested by
Volvo, or if you permit someone without
experience of the car to install accessories.
•
Damage that is caused by accessories installed in a non-approved or incorrect way is not
covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be found in the service
and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept
Related information
•
•
•
Installation of accessories (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
}}
37
YOUR VOLVO
any liability for deaths, personal injury or
costs arising as a result of the installation of
non-original accessories.
||
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of software
or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on
the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer
system.
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is
under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
38
NOTE
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is connected to the On-board Diagnostic socket
(OBDII). This socket should only be used by
trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
YOUR VOLVO
Showing the car's identification
number
When contacting a Volvo retailer concerning
your Volvo On Call subscription, for example,
you will need the car's identification number
(VIN7).
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System System
Information Vehicle Identification
Number.
> The car's identification number is shown.
Driver distraction
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones with handsfree, navigation systems and audio systems with
lots of functions. You may also have other portable electronic devices for your own convenience.
Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the
driving experience. If they are used in the wrong
way they could distract you.
We wish to give the following warnings regarding
such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for
your safety. Never use a device or function in the
car in such a way that it will distract you from the
task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to
serious accidents. Apart from these general
warnings, we offer the following advice regarding
the new functions that may be in the car:
7
WARNING
The driver is responsible for doing everything
possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their
passengers and other road users. Part of this
responsibility is avoiding distractions such as
carrying out an activity that is not related to operating the car in a driving environment.
•
Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbidden
for the driver to use a mobile phone while
the car is moving.
•
If the car is equipped with a navigation
system you must only set and change the
itinerary when the car is parked.
•
Never program the audio system while
the car is moving. Program the radio's
presets when the car is parked and then
use the programmed presets for faster
and simpler use of the radio.
•
Never use laptops or hand-held computers while the car is moving.
Related information
•
Sound, media and Internet (p. 464)
Vehicle Identification Number
39
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety
WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with several safety systems that work together to protect the vehicle's
driver and passengers in the event of an accident.
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
is switched on during driving and the message SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems
does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop
should be contacted as soon as possible.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and activate
different safety systems, such as different types
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, roll-over or driving off the
road, the systems react in different ways to provide the best protection.
42
Seatbelt
WARNING
If the specific warning symbol is broken
then the general warning symbol is illuminated instead and the driver display
shows the same message.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's electrical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is
fault-free.
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
adjust their seating position.
Never modify or repair the car's various safety
systems yourself. Defective work in one of the
systems can cause malfunction and result in
serious personal injury. Volvo recommends
that an authorised Volvo workshop should be
contacted.
There are also mechanical safety systems such
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also
constructed so that a large part of the force of a
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body.
Warning symbol in driver display
Safety during pregnancy
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Airbags (p. 49)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Safety mode (p. 55)
Child safety (p. 57)
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
SAFETY
cle as they drive (which means that they must be
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the
seat with as large a distance as possible between
abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Power front seat* (p. 167)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists
of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion,
as well as a specially designed head restraint in
the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then
any load must be secured to prevent it from
sliding up to the front seat backrest in the
event of a collision.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat,
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat.
}}
* Option/accessory.
43
SAFETY
||
Seating position
Seatbelts
For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by WHIPS.
Related information
•
•
•
•
44
Safety (p. 42)
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Power front seat* (p. 167)
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 338)
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
3.
In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
Putting on seatbelts
1.
Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
•
•
•
2.
if it is pulled out too quickly
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over
the arm).
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
4.
Press together the seat mounting and move
the seatbelt up or down.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
Position the belt as high as possible without
it chafing against your throat.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
}}
45
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not
function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
Taking off seatbelts
1.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract.
2.
If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
•
•
•
46
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47)
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric* seatbelt tensioners that can
tension the seatbelts in critical situations and
collisions.
sioner are restored automatically, but they can
also be restored manually.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
Standard seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard
seatbelt tensioner.
WARNING
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in
the event of a collision with sufficient force in
order to more effectively restrain the occupant.
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
Electric seatbelt tensioner*
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In
critical situations, such as panic braking, driving
off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off
the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
Related information
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the
occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of
striking the car's interior and improving the effect
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.
•
•
•
When the critical situation has come to an end,
the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten-
•
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner*
(p. 47)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52)
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 326)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 338)
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner*
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be
reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner
can be reset manually if the belt remains
extended.
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
2.
Door and seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.
Driver display graphics
Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
The driver display's graphics show which seats in
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted passengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
}}
* Option/accessory.
47
SAFETY
||
Seatbelt reminder
Visual reminder in the roof console.
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and
by means of the warning symbol in the driver display.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt
is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if
either of them is not wearing one.
48
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts are
being used in the rear seat. The driver display's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
•
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
will cease once the seatbelt has been put on
again.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's warning symbol illuminates.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
SAFETY
Airbags
Deployed airbags
Driver airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable
curtains for driver and passengers.
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following
is recommended:
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is
equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee
airbag1 on the driver's side.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that none, one or more airbags are
deployed.
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it
is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of
components in the car's safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter battery. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags may
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
1
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Driver airbags (p. 49)
Passenger airbag (p. 50)
Side airbags (p. 54)
Airbags (p. 55)
Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's
side in the front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
driver as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
}}
49
SAFETY
||
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Related information
•
•
Airbags (p. 49)
Passenger airbag (p. 50)
Passenger airbag
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on the passenger side
in the front seat.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Steering wheel airbag location
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag1 location
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the top
or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
stowed.
1 The
50
car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
Front passenger airbag in front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps
to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
passenger as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions
the initial collision impact for the occupant. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car.
This is completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
SAFETY
WARNING
Label for passenger airbag
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Passenger airbag location
Related information
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
•
•
•
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Airbags (p. 49)
Driver airbags (p. 49)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52)
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
* Option/accessory.
51
SAFETY
Activating and deactivating
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the
car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
WARNING
Activating passenger airbag
If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated.
Switch
The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF
(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
ON - the airbag is activated and all front-facing passengers (children and adults) can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
52
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
2.
Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a warning symbol in
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the airbag is activated.
The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Deactivating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
(A) to OFF (B).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
2.
Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the passenger seat when
the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
}}
53
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)
Child seats (p. 58)
Side airbags
WARNING
The side airbags on the driver's and passenger
seats act to protect the chest and hips in the
event of a collision.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the side airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest
frames of the front seats and help to protect the
driver and passengers in the front seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
54
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbags and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 49)
SAFETY
Airbags
WARNING
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine
parts that are approved for fitting within these
areas.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the inflatable curtain system
can cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
Safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
If the car has been in a collision, the message
Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
shown on the driver display with a warning symbol as long as the display is not damaged and the
car's electrical system is still in working order.
This message means that the car has reduced
functionality.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 49)
}}
55
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
car to normal status after Safety mode See
Owner's manual has been shown.
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example.
Starting the car after safety mode
1.
WARNING
Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If there is only minor damage and a check
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be
attempted.
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Related information
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Starting and moving the car after safety
mode (p. 56)
Recovery (p. 455)
3.
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
2.
Switch off the car.
Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a systems
check and then try to resume normal status.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still shown on the display the car
must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
recovery service must then be used instead.
Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to
control once moving.
Moving the car after safety mode
1.
If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
56
SAFETY
Related information
•
•
•
Safety mode (p. 55)
Starting the car (p. 396)
Recovery (p. 455)
Child safety
Children must always sit secure while travelling
in the car.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and
attachment devices) which is designed for fitting
in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety
equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for
a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the
child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to
use.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
The equipment that should be used is selected
taking account of the weight and size of the child.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rearfacing child seat until as late an age as possible,
at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a
front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4
feet 7 inches) tall.
•
•
•
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Child seats (p. 58)
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 247)
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
57
SAFETY
Child seats
•
Suitable child seats should always be used
when children are travelling in the car.
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted
and used correctly.
•
•
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
Upper mounting points for child
seats
Child seat positioning (p. 60)
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats.
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52)
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
Related information
•
•
•
58
Child safety (p. 57)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 58)
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on
the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of
the rear seat's outer seats.
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 59)
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.
Lower mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting points
for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
The mounting points in the rear seat are located
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
Related information
•
•
Child seats (p. 58)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 59)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
•
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
Related information
•
•
•
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
Child seats (p. 58)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 58)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
•
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
The mounting points in the front seat are located
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
* Option/accessory.
59
SAFETY
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX2 mounting points for child seats in the rear seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international standard.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 58)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 58)
It is important to position the child seat in the
right place in the car and this depends, amongst
other things, on the type of child seat and
whether the passenger airbag is activated.
Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
The location of the mounting points
Child seat positioning
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on
the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
2
60
Names and symbols change depending on market.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rearfacing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat.
SAFETY
NOTE
Label for passenger airbag
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
Related information
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 58)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
61
SAFETY
Child seat mounting
NOTE
It is important to remember a number of things
when a child seat is mounted and used, which
depend on where the child seat is positioned.
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in
springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
•
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
•
When fitting front-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is activated.
•
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
•
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3
accessory.
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
•
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Installation in the rear seat
•
•
62
The accessory range varies depending on market.
Varies depending on market.
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for iSize4.
•
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint before
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
is not possible, follow the recommendations
from the child seat manufacturer.
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat
in front after the straps have been fitted in
the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.
Installation in the front seat
NOTE
3
4
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these3.
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
Related information
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 60)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
SAFETY
Overview table for location of child
seats
The table gives an overview of the types of child
seats suitable for the car's seats.
Seat
positionB
A
B
i-Size
child
seats
Universally
approved child
seats secured
using the car's
seatbelt
Other
child
seat categoriesA
3.5
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 5
For more information, contact the child seat manufacturer.
According to the numbering above.
Related information
Seat positions in left-hand drive cars.
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 60)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
Seat positions in right-hand drive cars.
63
SAFETY
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
64
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UA, B
X
UB
UB
UA, B
X
UB
UB
LC
UFA, D
UD, LC
UD
LC
UFA, E
UE, LC
UE
SAFETY
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Group 3
22-36 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UE
UE
UFA, E
X
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
B
C
D
E
Adjust the seat to a more elevated position.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
WARNING
•
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Related information
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 60)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
65
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R129.
The table gives a recommendation for which iSize child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Type of child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
i-Size child seats
X
X
i-UA, B
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A
B
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).
Related information
•
•
•
66
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Child seat positioning (p. 60)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Size classA
Type of child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)B
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)B
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
ILB, C, XD
X
ILC
X
ILB, C, E, XD
X
ILC
X
}}
67
SAFETY
||
Weight
Size classA
Group 1
9-18 kg
Type of child seat
A
Front-facing child seat
B
Front-facing child seat
B1
Front-facing child seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)B
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)B
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
X
ILB, E, F, XD
ILF, IUFF
X
ILB, E, XD
X
IL
X
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
B
C
D
E
F
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). There are no
upper mounting points for child seats here.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
NOTE
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be included
on the vehicle list for the child seat.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo dealer for information about which iSize/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
Related information
•
•
68
Child seat positioning (p. 60)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
SAFETY
•
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 63)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
69
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Horn
Centre and tunnel console
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing*
of tailgate
Roof console
Centre display
Start button
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media,
drive mode button*
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear
fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Electrical socket, USB port, wireless phone
charger*
Panorama roof*
Gear selector
Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox
Display in roof console
Parking brake
Driver display
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Automatic braking when stationary
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
72
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver's door
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Memory for settings for power front seat*,
door mirrors
Central locking, power windows, door mirrors,
electric child safety locks*
Bonnet opening
Adjusting front seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear
fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox
Driver display
Lighting control (p. 134)
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Starting the car (p. 396)
Driver display (p. 75)
Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing*
of tailgate
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Gearbox (p. 409)
}}
* Option/accessory.
73
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Centre and tunnel console
Driver's door
Centre display
Memory for settings for power front seat*,
door mirrors
Start button
Central locking, power windows, door mirrors,
electric child safety locks*
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media,
drive mode button*
Bonnet opening
Electrical socket, USB port, wireless phone
charger*
Gear selector
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
74
Adjusting front seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Lighting control (p. 134)
Starting the car (p. 396)
Driver display (p. 75)
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Gearbox (p. 409)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display
The driver display shows information about the
car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and
indicator and warning symbols. The content of
the driver display depends on the car's equipment, settings and which functions are active at
that time.
The driver display is activated as soon as a door
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver
display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.
To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
•
•
Depress the brake pedal.
Activate ignition position I.
•
Open one of the doors.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not illuminate on activation/start or be fully or partially illegible, the car must not be used. You
should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
Driver display1.
Location in the driver display:
1
On the left
In the middle
On the right
Speedometer
Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/ECO gaugeA
Trip meter
Outside temperature gauge
Gear shift indicator
OdometerB
Clock
Drive mode
Cruise control and speed limiter information
Messages, in some cases with graphics
Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information
Status of the Start/Stop function
–
Media player
Distance to empty tank
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory.
75
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
A
B
On the left
In the middle
On the right
–
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption
–
Phone
App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
–
Voice recognition
–
–
CompassA
–
Depends on drive mode selected.
Accumulated mileage.
•
•
Dynamic symbol
The dynamic symbol in its basic
form.
The centre of the driver display contains a
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for different types of message. An amber or red marker
around the symbol indicates the degree of
severity of a control or warning message. With an
animation, the basic shape can be turned into a
larger image in order to graphically indicate
where a problem is situated or to clarify information.
76
Messages in the driver display (p. 91)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 90)
Examples of indicator symbol.
Related information
•
•
Driver display settings (p. 77)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 85)
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 83)
•
Trip computer (p. 78)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display settings
Settings for the driver display's display options
can be made in the driver display's application
menu and in the centre display's settings menu.
Settings in the driver display's app
menu
In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from:
•
•
•
•
Selecting theme
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on My Car
Themes
3.
Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
•
•
•
•
Trip computer
media player
phone
navigation system*.
Settings in the centre display
Selecting information type
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car Displays
Display Information.
3.
Select what should be shown in the background:
media
• Show navigation even if no route is
set.
Display
Glass
Minimalistic
Performance
Chrome Rings.
Selecting language
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Driver
• Show no information in background
• Show information for current playing
Displays
Tap on System System Languages and
Units System Language to select language.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
These settings are personal and are saved automatically to the active driver profile.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
fuel level in the tank.
Driver display (p. 75)
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
quantity of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates the distance to empty tank.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Filling fuel (p. 431)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 624)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 90)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
* Option/accessory.
77
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records and calculates
vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous and
average fuel consumption. The information from
the trip computer can be shown in the driver display.
•
•
Distance to empty tank
Distance to empty tank
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The trip computer calculates the remaining mileage with the fuel available in the tank.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display.
Trip meter
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset automatically if the car is not used for at least four
hours.
The following information is registered while driving:
•
•
•
•
Mileage
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
•
•
•
2
78
Trip meter
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption.
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
Examples of trip computer information in the
driver display.2
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the
remaining drivable fuel quantity.
Odometer
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the
car has at the moment. The value is updated
approximately every second.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it easier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Related information
•
•
•
Resetting the trip meter (p. 80)
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Show trip data in the driver display (p. 79)
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 80)
Show trip data in the driver display
1.
The trip computer's recorded and calculated values can be shown in the driver display.
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
the app menu, you can choose which information
is shown on the driver display.
Open and navigate in the app menu using the righthand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Open the app menu in the driver display by
pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must first
be acknowledged before the app menu can
be opened.)
2.
Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3).
3.
Scroll down to the option buttons to select
which information to show in the driver display:
•
•
•
Distance to empty tank
Odometer
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no display of mileage
•
Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
no display of fuel consumption
•
Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Select or deselect an option with the O button (4). The change is made immediately.
}}
79
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Related information
•
•
Trip computer (p. 78)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 80)
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk
switch.
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and provide an overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient driving.
Open the Driver performance
app in app view in order to
show the trip statistics.
–
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
speed and driving time) with a long press on
the RESET button on the left-hand stalk
switch.
A short press on the RESET button resets
only the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically
when the car has not been used for four or more
hours.
Related information
•
80
Trip computer (p. 78)
Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The
bars are filled in from the right as driving progresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
for the current distance.
The average fuel consumption and total driving
time are calculated since the last time the trip
statistics were reset.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Settings for trip statistics
•
Resetting the trip meter (p. 80)
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.
Trip statistics from the trip computer3.
1.
Open the Driver performance app in app
view in order to show the trip statistics.
2.
Press Preferences to
Related information
•
•
Settings for trip statistics (p. 81)
Trip computer (p. 78)
•
change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
•
reset data after every trip. Performed
when the car has been stationary for more
than 4 hours.
•
reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always reset
simultaneously.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display.
Related information
3
•
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 80)
•
Trip computer (p. 78)
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
81
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Time and date
The clock is shown in both the driver display and
the centre display.
Clock location
Automatic time for cars with GPS
When the car is equipped with a navigation system, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone
is then adjusted automatically based on the location of the car. For certain types of navigation
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature is shown in the driver
display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
car.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select automatic setting of summer time with Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.
Related information
Clock location in driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at the
top right of the status bar.
In certain situations, messages and information
may cover the clock in the driver display.
Settings for time and date
–
Select Settings System Date and
Time in the centre display's top view to
change settings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or
down arrow on the touch screen.
82
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is within the range
-5 °C to +2 °C (23 till 36 °F) a snowflake symbol
is also shown in the driver display as a warning
for potentially slippery conditions.
Change the unit for the temperature gauge via
system settings in the centre display top view.
Related information
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Changing system units (p. 118)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that a system is operating, or
that a fault or abnormal condition exists.
Symbol
Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended, this
information symbol illuminates and
a text appears on the driver display.
The information symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Fault in brake system
The symbol lights up when there is
a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function.
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
Symbol
Specification
Symbol
Specification
Tyre pressure system
Position lamps
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot detect
or warn of low tyre pressure as
intended.
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Emissions system
Active main beam on
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
The symbol lights up blue when the
automatic main beam is on.
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbols flash when the direction indicators are used.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
the automatic main beam is off.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main
beam is on and with main beam
flash.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
}}
83
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Symbol
Specification
Specification
Symbol
Specification
Active main beam off
Stability system
Lane assistance and rain sensor
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating. If
the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in
the system.
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Front fog lamps on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
Rain sensor on
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Preconditioning on
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger compartment heater/air conditioning
are preconditioning the car.
84
Symbol
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then
detects whether the accelerator
pedal, steering wheel movements
and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it
intervenes and stabilises the car.
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Amber symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
AdBlue systemA
The symbol illuminates when the
AdBlue level is low or in the event
of a fault in the AdBlue system.
A
Applies to cars with diesel engines.
Related information
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 85)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Warning symbols in the driver
display
Specification
Symbol
Specification
Fault in brake system
Alternator not charging
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low. Visit the
nearest authorised workshop to
have the brake fluid level checked
and rectified.
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Visit a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
The red warning symbol illuminates
when a fault has been indicated
which could affect the safety
and/or drivability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time. The
warning symbol can also illuminate
in conjunction with other symbols.
Parking brake applied
Collision risk
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake
is applied.
City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals.
Seatbelt reminder
Low oil pressure
This symbol illuminates or flashes if
someone in a front seat has not
put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their
seatbelt.
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level
is normal, contact a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault or condition exists.
Symbol
Symbol
Specification
Warning
Airbags
If the symbol remains illuminated or
illuminates while driving, a fault has
been detected in one of the car's
safety systems. Read the message
in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message
in the driver display.
Related information
•
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 83)
Driver display (p. 75)
85
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or
developer.
Freetype Project License
3rd Party Software Disclaimers and License
Agreements Confidential ID 06-00004-004 39 /
75 Revision 06.00A, 2015-06-09 2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg.
Introduction
The FreeType Project is distributed in several
archive packages; some of them may contain, in
addition to the FreeType font engine, various
tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to,
the FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do not
fall under their own explicit license. The license
affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test
programs, documentation and makefiles, at the
very least. This license was inspired by the BSD,
Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group)
licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use
of free software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main points
are that: o We don't promise that this software
works. However, we will be interested in any kind
86
of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use
this software for whatever you want, in parts or
full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this
software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a
program, you must acknowledge somewhere in
your documentation that you have used the
FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit
and encourage the inclusion of this software, with
or without modifications, in commercial products.
We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType
Project and assume no liability related to The
FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked us
for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use
in compliance with this license. We thus
encourage you to use the following text:
"Portions of this software are copyright © <year>
The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All
rights reserved."
Please replace <year> with the value from the
FreeType version you actually use.
Legal Terms
0. Definitions – Throughout this license, the
terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the
`FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta
or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or
person using the project, where `using' is a
generic term including compiling the project's
source code as well as linking it to form a
`program' or `executable'. This program is
referred to as `a program using the FreeType
engine'. This license applies to all files distributed
in the original FreeType Project, including all
source code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you must
contact us to verify this. The FreeType Project is
copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as specified below.
1. No Warranty – THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS
PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN
NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE
INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE
PROJECT. '
2. Redistribution – This license grants a
worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable
right and license to use, execute, perform,
compile, display, copy, create derivative works of,
distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project
(in both source and object code forms) and
derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
authorize others to exercise some or all of the
rights granted herein, subject to the following
conditions: o Redistribution of source code must
retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any
additions, deletions or changes to the original
files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in all
copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary
form must provide a disclaimer that states that
the software is based in part of the work of the
FreeType Team, in the distribution
documentation. We also encourage you to put an
URL to the FreeType web page in your
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived
from or based on the FreeType Project, not just
the unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be
paid to us.
3. Advertising – Neither the FreeType authors
and contributors nor you shall use the name of
the other for commercial, advertising, or
promotional purposes without specific prior
written permission. We suggest, but do not
require, that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType
library', or `FreeType Distribution'. As you have
not signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is
copyrighted material, only this license, or another
one contracted with the authors, grants you the
right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore,
by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType
Project, you indicate that you understand and
accept all the terms of this license.
4. Contacts – There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o [email protected]. Discusses
general use and applications of FreeType, as well
as future and wanted additions to the library and
distribution. If you are looking for support, start in
this list if you haven't found anything to help you
in the documentation. o [email protected]. Discusses bugs, as well as
engine internals, design issues, specific licenses,
porting, etc. Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
HarfBuzz / UCDN License
Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copyright © 2012 Mozilla Foundation
Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited
Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia Corporation
and/or its subsidiary(-ies)
Copyright © 2009 Keith Stribley
Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL
International
Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson
•
Copyright © 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010
Red Hat, Inc.
•
Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and
Werner Lemberg
For full copyright notices consult the individual
files in the package. Permission is hereby
granted, without written agreement and without
license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software and its documentation for
any purpose, provided that the above copyright
notice and the following two paragraphs appear
in all copies of this software. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE
TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN
IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE. THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS
ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE
MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES,
ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
Copyright © 2005 David Turner
}}
87
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Libunibreak License
This library is released under an open-source
licence, the zlib/libpng licence. Please check the
file LICENCE for details. Apart from using the
algorithm, part of the code is derived from the
data provided under http://www.unicode.org/
Public. And the Unicode Terms of Use may apply:
URL:http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html
LICENSE:
•
Copyright (C) 2008-2012 Wu Yongwei
<wuyongwei at gmail dot com>
•
Copyright (C) 2012 Tom Hacohen <tom dot
hacohen at samsung dot com>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
author be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software. Permission is
granted to anyone to use this software for any
purpose, including commercial applications, and
to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions:
88
1.
The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgement
in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2.
Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3.
This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
Unicode Inc. License Agreement
EXHIBIT 1 UNICODE, INC. LICENSE
AGREEMENT - DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE
Unicode Data Files include all data files under
the directories http://www.unicode.org/Public/,
http://www.unicode.org/reports/, and http://
www.unicode.org/cldr/data/ . Unicode Software
includes any source code published in the
Unicode Standard or under the directories http://
www.unicode.org/Public/, http://
www.unicode.org/reports/, and http://
www.unicode.org/cldr/data/. NOTICE TO USER:
Carefully read the following legal agreement. BY
DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, COPYING OR
OTHERWISE USING UNICODE INC.'S DATA
FILES ("DATA FILES"), AND/OR SOFTWARE
("SOFTWARE"), YOU UNEQUIVOCALLY
ACCEPT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY, ALL
OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, DO NOT
DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY, DISTRIBUTE OR
USE THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND
SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of a copyright holder shall not be used
in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in these Data Files or
Software without prior written authorization of the
copyright holder.
ZLIB Data Compression Library License
Agreement
(C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software. Permission is
granted to anyone to use this software for any
purpose, including commercial applications, and
to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions:
1.
The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2.
Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3.
This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler [email protected]
[email protected] If you use the zlib
library in a product, we would appreciate *not*
receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The
sources are provided for free but without
warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely
written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it
does not include third-party code. If you
redistribute modified sources, we would
appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog
history information documenting your changes.
Please read the FAQ for more information on the
distribution of modified source versions.
GLEW Licence (Modified BSD Licence)
The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library
•
Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Milan Ikits
<milan.ikits@ieee org>
•
Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Marcelo E.
Magallon <[email protected]>
•
Copyright (C) 2002, Lev Povalahev
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in
binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution. * The
name of the author may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 75)
89
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Application menu in driver display
App
Functions
Application menu (app menu) in the driver display provides quick access to commonly used
functions for certain apps.
Trip computer
Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the
driver display, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone
Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation
Guide to destination, etc.
Handling the application menu in
the driver display
The application menu (the app menu) in the
driver display is operated with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Related information
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
of using the centre display. The figure is schematic - the
layout may vary.
The app menu is shown in the driver display and
is controlled using the steering wheel's righthand keypad. The app menu makes it easier to
switch between different apps or functions within
the apps without having to let go of the steering
wheel.
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
90
•
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 90)
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Opening/closing the app menu
Messages in the driver display
–
The driver display can show messages to inform
or assist the driver in the event of different
events.
Press on open/close (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must first
be acknowledged before the app menu can
be opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
selected.
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
1.
Navigate between the different apps that are
available by tapping on left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2.
Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
3.
Confirm or highlight an option for the function by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.
Related information
•
•
Application menu in driver display (p. 90)
Messages in the driver display (p. 91)
Message in the driver display4.
Message in the driver display5.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
The messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other information is currently being displayed. After a while,
}}
91
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
or when the message has been acknowledged/
action taken if required, the message disappears
from the driver display. If a message needs to be
saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is
opened from the app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons
for acknowledging the message or accepting a
request, for example.
4
5
92
Specification
Stop safelyA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Turn off
engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Service urgent
Drive to workshopA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
With 8-inch driver display.
With 12-inch driver display.
Specification
Related information
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
•
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 93)
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 94)
Regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown before the next
service date.
•
Message in centre display (p. 126)
Book time for
maintenance
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service
messages and their meanings.
Message
Message
Regular maintenance
Time for maintenance
Regular maintenance
Maintenance
overdue
Temporarily
offA
A
B
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown at the next service
date.
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
A function has been temporarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing messages in the driver
display
For messages without buttons:
–
Messages in the driver display are handled
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Message in the driver display7 and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Left/right
Message in the driver
right-hand keypad.
display6
Confirm
and the steering wheel's
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while.
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message Car
message stored in Car Status application is
shown in the centre display in conjunction with
this.
Related information
•
•
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 91)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 94)
Message in centre display (p. 126)
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
6
7
1.
Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
2.
Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2).
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
With 8-inch driver display.
With 12-inch driver display.
93
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Handling a message saved from the
driver display
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
–
To book service for a saved message:
–
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre display.
> The saved message is shown in the Car
status app.
To read a saved message later:
1.
Open the Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom tile of
the home view.
2.
Select the Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
3.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that need
to be saved are added in the
Car status app in the centre
display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have two
buttons available to book service or read the
owner's manual.
With Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved message:
–
94
Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
In maximised mode for the message, press
Owner's manual to read about the message in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
display and shows information linked to
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started.
Related information
•
•
•
8
In maximised mode for the message, press
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment8 for help in booking service.
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
Messages in the driver display (p. 91)
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 93)
Message in centre display (p. 126)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Overview of centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.
}}
95
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively9.
Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain
9
96
The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
functions are also so-called trigger functions,
which means they open a window with set-
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
ting options. Examples of these include
Camera.
Extra tile - recently used apps or car functions that do not belong in any of the other
tiles. Tap on the tile to expand it.
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating for
example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of
the climate row in order to open the climate
view with more setting options.
Application view (app view) - apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and
apps for embedded functions, such as FM
radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Network
and connection information is shown on the
left-hand side of the status bar, while mediarelated information, the clock and indication
about on-going background activity are
shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view. Settings, Owner's
manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some
cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation
Settings) and the contextual owner's manual
(e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be
accessed in the top view.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the tile to
expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated with
media. Tap on the tile to expand it.
Phone - the phone function can be reached
from here. Tap on the tile to expand it.
•
Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 117)
•
•
•
•
Changing system language (p. 118)
Changing system units (p. 118)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
Message in centre display (p. 126)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 98)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
Function view in centre display (p. 108)
Apps (p. 465)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 110)
•
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display
(p. 119)
•
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Media player (p. 474)
Phone (p. 488)
Climate controls (p. 190)
Switching off and changing the volume of
the system sound in the centre display
(p. 117)
* Option/accessory.
97
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing the centre display
ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways.
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and movProcedure
98
An infrared light curtain just above the surface of
the screen enables the screen to detect a finger
that is just in front of the screen. This technology
makes it possible to use the screen even with
gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen:
Execution
Result
Press once.
Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick succession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Procedure
Execution
Result
Drag
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps
or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart
Zooms in.
Drag together
Zooms out.
}}
* Option/accessory.
99
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Returning to home view from another
view
1.
2.
Briefly press the home button below the centre display.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
NOTE
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it
is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the controls in the centre display
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
100
drag the control to the desired temperature,
•
tap on the desired temperature on the control.
tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the
temperature gradually, or
Related information
Briefly press again.
> All tiles of the home view are set to their
default mode.
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 101)
•
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 110)
•
Keyboard in centre display (p. 112)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating centre
display
1.
The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the screen.
2.
Give a long press on the physical home button below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be shown.
All functions connected to the screen are
still running.
Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
screen.
Home button for the centre display.
The effect of using the home button that the
screen dims and the touchscreen no longer
reacts to touch. The climate row will still be
shown. All functions connected to the screen are
still running, such as climate, audio, guidance*
and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it
is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The
dimming function can also be used to fade the
screen so that it does not disturb while driving.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically
when the engine is off and the driver's door is
opened.
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 117)
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the centre
display: home view, top view, climate view, application view (app view) and function view. The
screen is started automatically when the driver's
door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four tiles:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra tile.
An app or car function selected from the app or
function view starts in the respective tile of the
home view. For example FM radio starts in the
Media tile.
The extra tile contains the last used app or car
function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The tiles show brief information about each different app.
NOTE
When the car is started, the home view's various sub-views show information on the current status of apps.
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
}}
* Option/accessory. 101
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
Status bar
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network and connection information
is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock and
indication that background activity is in progress
are shown on the right.
Top view
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from
the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is always available to:
• Settings
• Owner's manual
• Profile
• The car's saved messages.
In the top view, access is given to the following in
some cases:
•
Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation
Settings). Change settings directly in the
top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is running.
•
Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation
Manual). Gain access directly in the top view
to articles in the digital owner's manual that
are related to the content displayed on
screen.
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
the screen. The most common climate settings
can be made directly there, such as setting temperature and seat heating*.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate settings.
Press the symbol to close the climate
view and return to the previous view.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on
the home button or at the bottom of the top view
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visible and available for use again.
NOTE
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at
the top of the screen. Open the top view by
102
The top view is not available during starting/
shutdown or when a message is shown on
the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Application view
app view, such as the number of unread text
messages for Messages.
Function view
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the tile
to which it belongs, such as Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depending
on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
left to right10 across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Application view with the car's apps.
left10
Swipe from right to
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app view)
from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the
10
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
The function view with buttons for different car functions.
Swipe from left to right10 across the screen in
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate or deactivate
different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping
Aid* and Park Assist*.
}}
* Option/accessory. 103
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated or deactivated by
pressing the relevant function button. Some functions (trigger functions) open in a new window
when pressed.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
right to left10 across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Related information
•
•
•
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display
(p. 119)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
10
104
Managing tiles in centre display (p. 105)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 110)
Driver profiles (p. 123)
Climate controls (p. 190)
Apps (p. 465)
Function view in centre display (p. 108)
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing tiles in centre display
Home view consists of four tiles: Navigation,
Media, Phone and an extra tile. These views
can be expanded.
}}
105
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Expanding a tile from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the centre display.
106
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Expanding a tile:
–
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
Tap anywhere on the tile. When a tile is
expanded, the extra tile in the home view is
temporarily forced away. The other two are
minimised and only certain information is
shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the
other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
Related information
•
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 98)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 101)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
Press on the symbol to go back
to the expanded mode, or press
the home button at the bottom
of the screen.
Closing an expanded tile:
–
The tile can be closed in three different ways.
•
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
tile.
•
Tap on another tile (that tile will then open
in expanded mode instead).
•
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening or closing a tile in full screen
mode
The extra tile11 and the tile for Navigation can
be opened out in full screen mode, with even
more information and more setting options.
When a new tile is opened in full-screen mode,
no information from the other tiles is shown.
11
Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. Go back to the
home view's standard view from full screen mode
- press twice on the home button.
Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile
107
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Function view in centre display
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view from
home view by swiping from left to right across
the screen12.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for car
functions; see below:
Type of button
Property
Affects car function
Function buttons
Have on/off positions.
Most buttons in function view
are function buttons.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press
the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons
Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be a
window to change seat position.
Parking buttons
Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
12
108
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
• Camera
• Headrest Fold
• Park In
• Park Out
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a
function or parking button, the function is activated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
The function is deactivated when the LED indicator is extinguished.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or deactivate the function.
When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.
Related information
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 98)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
109
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often.
The apps and buttons for car functions in the
app view and function view respectively can be
moved and organised as desired.
1. Swipe from right to left13 to access the app
view, or swipe from left to right13 to access
the function view.
2.
3.
Tap on an app or button and hold it down.
> The app or button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
Drag the app or button to a vacant space in
the view.
The maximum number of rows available for use in
order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move
an app or button outside the visible view, drag it
to the bottom of the view. New rows are then
added, where the app or button can be located.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
Related information
•
•
•
Function view in centre display (p. 108)
Apps (p. 465)
Managing the centre display (p. 98)
An app or button can thus be located further
down and is then not visible in the normal mode
for the view.
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in
the view.
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in
the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar.
Symbol
Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Connection to the Internet failed.
Roaming activated.
Signal strength in mobile phone network.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.
Information sent to and from GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
13
110
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Related information
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot).
The car then shares the available
connection.
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
•
Message in centre display (p. 126)
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
111
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Keyboard in centre display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for articles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.
112
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
}}
113
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Row of suggested words or characters14.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among the
suggestions by pressing on the right and left
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not available, the row will
not be shown on the keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.
The button works in different ways, depending on the context in which the keyboard is
used - either to enter @ (when an email
address is entered) or to create a new row
(for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to
enter one capital letter and then continue
with lower-case letters. Another press makes
all letters capital letters. The next press
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters.
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop,
exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter in the text field is
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
names or addresses, each word automatically
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
password, web address or email address
14
114
Applies to Asiatic languages.
entry, all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Variants of a letter or character
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which in
number mode is shown instead of
, to
to
return to the letter keyboard, or
open the keyboard with special characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected language.
To make it possible to change languages for
the keyboard, the languages must first be
added under Settings.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes
one character at a time. Hold the button
depressed to delete characters more quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
characters by hand instead.
Pressing the confirmation button above the keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the
entered text. The appearance of the button differs depending on context.
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible variants
of letters or characters. Press the required variant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/
character is entered.
Related information
•
Changing keyboard language in centre display (p. 115)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115)
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 98)
Managing text messages (p. 494)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
Switching between different languages
in the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the button in the
keyboard is used to switch
between the different languages.
To make it possible to switch between different
languages for the keyboard, the languages must
first be added under Settings.
Adding or deleting languages in
settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The keyboard
language can be manually adapted without
affecting the system language.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press System System Languages and
Units Keyboard Layouts.
3.
Select one or more languages from the list.
> It is now possible to switch between the
selected languages directly from the keyboard for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under Settings, the keyboard retains the same
language as the car's system language.
To change keyboard language with list:
1.
Give a long press on the button.
> A list opens.
2.
Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected
language and other word suggestions are
given.
–
•
•
Applies to certain system languages.
The centre display keyboard allows you to enter
characters, letters and words on the screen by
"drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing
with the keys to entering letters
and characters by hand.
To change the keyboard language without displaying the list:
One short press of the button.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next language in the list without displaying the list.
Related information
15
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre
display
Changing system language (p. 118)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 112)
Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
The text field where the characters or word
suggestions15 appear as they are written on
screen (1).
}}
115
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
part of word. It is possible to scroll through
the list.
||
Space. A space can also be created by
entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-written letters (1). See the heading "Entering a
space in the free text field with handwriting
recognition" below.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete the
next character/letter, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular character input.
Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Change text input language.
16
116
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of
a word in the area for hand-written letters
(1). Write a word or parts of a word above
each other or on a line.
> A number of suggested characters, letters
or words is shown (3). The most likely
choice is found at the top of the list.
Deleting/changing characters/letters written
by hand
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
2.
Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a
moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
the required character, letter or word in
the list.
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
–
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
•
Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
•
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
•
Swipe horizontally from right to left16 over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
•
Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes
all of the entered text.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
The appearance of the screen in the centre display can be changed by selecting a theme.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
the handwriting field17.
Entering a space in the free text field with
handwriting recognition
2.
Press My Car
Themes.
3.
Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
Displays
Display
As a supplement to these appearances, it is possible to choose between Normal and Bright.
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
the text is light. This alternative is the default for
all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
which the background is light and the text is dark.
This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong daylight.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
The centre display can be used to change the
volume of the system sound or switch off the
system sound altogether.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Sound
3.
Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen touch
sounds. Drag the control to the desired volume.
System Volumes.
Related information
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
•
Audio settings (p. 464)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
Related information
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right18.
Related information
•
17
18
Keyboard in centre display (p. 112)
•
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 101)
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
117
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing system units
Changing system language
Units settings are defined in the centre display's
Settings menu.
Language settings are defined in the centre display menu Settings.
1.
NOTE
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System System Languages
and Units Units of Measurement.
3.
Select from the following unit standards:
Celsius.
Celsius.
• US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-
heit.
> The units in the driver display and centre
display are changed.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System
and Units.
3.
Select System Language. Languages that
support voice recognition have a voice recognition symbol.
> The language in the driver display and
centre display are changed.
Related information
118
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
•
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
•
Changing system language (p. 118)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
Settings and information for many of the car's
functions can be managed in the centre display.
Changing the language in the centre display
may mean that some owner information is not
compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is
difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back in the structure on
screen.
• Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Opening settings in the centre
display
System Languages
Top view with button for Settings.
1.
Open the top view by pressing on the tab or
by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen.
2.
Press Settings to open the settings menu.
3.
Press one of the categories shown and navigate to subcategories and respective settings by pressing again.
4.
Press Back to go back in the settings menu.
Related information
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
•
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
•
Changing system units (p. 118)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
Press Close to close the settings menu.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Related information
•
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
Setting types in the centre display (p. 121)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 122)
Open contextual setup in the centre
display
Press Close or the physical home button
beneath the centre display to close setup view.
It is possible to use contextual setup for most of
the car's basic apps so that you can change settings directly in the top view in the centre display.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all.
Third party apps
Third party apps are not included in the car's system from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings
are always made inside the app and not from the
top view.
Related information
Top view with button for contextual setting.
The apps installed in the car from the beginning,
e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and
are part of the car's embedded functions. Settings for these apps can be changed directly in
the top view in the centre display.
•
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
•
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
When contextual setup is available:
1.
Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.
2.
Press Navigation Settings.
3.
Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
119
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing settings in the centre
display
You can change Settings and information for
many of the car's functions via the centre display.
1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or
by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen.
2.
Press Settings to open the settings menu.
3.
Press on one of the categories and subcategories to navigate to the required setting.
4.
Change one or more settings. Different types
of setting are changed in different ways.
> The changes are saved immediately.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
Setting types in the centre display (p. 121)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 122)
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
In the event of a change of ownership, user data
and system settings should be restored to factory settings.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system settings
to the original factory settings in the event of a
change of ownership. In the event of a change of
ownership it is also important to change the
owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
Related information
•
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
A subcategory in the settings menu with different types
of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio buttons).
120
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting settings in the centre
display
4.
It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings
defined in the centre display settings menu.
Two types of reset
There are two different types of resets for settings in the settings menu:
Press OK to confirm the reset.
Setting types in the centre display
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Different types of setting are changed in different ways. See the table for a description of the
various types of setting.
Related information
Setting
type
Description
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
Trigger
function
Starts an app or separate view
for more advanced settings
through a press on the text, e.g.
to connect a device with
Bluetooth®.
Radio button
Select a setting from several
options by pressing the required
radio button, e.g. to select a system language.
Multiselector
button
Select a level for something by
pressing the required part of the
button, e.g. to select a sensitivity
level for City Safety.
Checkbox
Activate/deactivate a function by
pressing on the box to select/
deselect it, e.g. to select automatic start of seat heating.
• Factory reset - clears all data and files and
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
• Reset Personal Settings - clears personal
•
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
•
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 122)
resets all settings to their default values.
data and resets personal settings to their
default values.
Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset your settings.
Setting types
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System
3.
Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
Factory reset.
}}
121
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Setting
type
Description
Slider
Select a level for something
within an interval by pressing and
dragging the slider, e.g. to select
volume level.
Display of
information
No actual setting. Shows information about something, e.g. the
car's identification number.
Related information
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
Table showing centre display
settings
Subcategories
The settings menu in the centre display has a
number of main categories and subcategories
where settings and information for many of the
car's functions are collected.
Parking Brake and Suspension
Locking
Wipers
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication,
Climate and System.
Sound
In turn, each category contains a number of subcategories and setting options. The tables below
show the first level of subcategories. The setting
options for a function or area are described in
more detail in the corresponding section of the
owner's manual.
Tone
Subcategories
Balance
System Volumes
Navigation
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other settings are global, which means they are not linked
to a driver profile.
Subcategories
My Car
Traffic
Map
Route and Guidance
Subcategories
Displays
Media
IntelliSafe
Subcategories
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode*
AM/FM radio
Lights and Lighting
DAB*
Mirrors and Convenience
122
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Subcategories
Gracenote®
TV*
Video
System
Subcategories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Communication
Subcategories
Phone
Text Messages
Android Auto*
Apple CarPlay*
Bluetooth Devices
Wi-Fi
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Car Modem Internet*
Volvo On Call*
Privacy and data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control*
Factory reset
System Information
Related information
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 95)
•
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 120)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal preferences and can be saved in one or more driver
profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved in
the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
car is adapted to the settings of that specific
driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
In the car, the settings defined are either personal or global. Only personal settings are saved
in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation*, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles.
Volvo Service Networks
Climate
The main category Climate has no subcategories.
}}
* Option/accessory. 123
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver profiles.
They remain the same regardless of which driver
profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add
additional languages to the keyboard, these
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved
to a specific driver profile - the settings are
global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X the brightness setting is a personal setting.
Option 1:
1.
Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
in the top of the centre display when the display has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
Related information
2.
Select the driver profile required.
3.
Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
•
•
•
124
Selecting driver profile
When the centre display has been started, the
selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
screen. The driver profile last used is the one
that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It
is possible to change to another driver profile
after the car has been unlocked. However, if the
remote control key has been linked to a driver
profile then this is what is selected when the car
is started.
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
Selecting driver profile (p. 124)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 125)
•
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 125)
Option 2:
•
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 122)
1.
Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2.
Press Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
3.
Select the driver profile required.
4.
Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Related information
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 123)
•
•
Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 125)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Renaming a driver profile
It is possible to change the name of the different
driver profiles used in the car.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press System
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile.
The driver profile along with all of its settings will
then be automatically selected every time the car
is used with that specific remote control key.
NOTE
Driver Profiles.
3.
Select Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
4.
Tap in the box Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to
change the name. Tap on
to close
the keyboard.
5.
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
Save the name change by pressing Back or
Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space, as
the profile name will not then be saved.
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press System Factory reset
Personal Settings.
3.
Select one of the options Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Reset
Related information
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 123)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
The first time the remote control key is used, it is
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the
car is started, the Guest profile will automatically
be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a driver
profile
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The
active profile can then be linked to the key.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press System
3.
Select the desired profile. The display returns
to the home view. The Guest profile cannot
be linked to a key.
Related information
•
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 124)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 112)
Driver Profiles.
}}
125
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
4.
5.
Drag down the top view again and tap on
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.
Select Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver profile to a different key than the one currently
being used in the car. If there are multiple
keys in the car, the message More than one
key is found, put the key you want to
connect on backup reader will be displayed.
6.
Press OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
Message in centre display
The centre display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of different
events.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 123)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
Remote control key (p. 217)
Message in the centre display's top view.
The centre display shows messages that are of
lower priority for the driver.
The backup reader's location in the storage compartment.
> When the message Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
126
Most messages are shown above the centre display's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has been
taken, the message disappears from the status
bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or a button for activating/deactivating a function linked
to the message.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the form
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
higher priority than messages shown in the status bar and require acknowledgement/action
before they disappear. Messages that need to be
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
display.
Managing messages in the centre
display
Messages in the centre display are handled in
centre display views.
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 127)
•
Handling a message saved from the centre
display (p. 128)
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 91)
–
Close the message by tapping on it, or allow
the message to close automatically after a
while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned
in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
•
For messages without buttons:
Related information
•
•
•
Message in centre display (p. 126)
Handling a message saved from the centre
display (p. 128)
Messages in the driver display (p. 91)
Message in the centre display's top view.
Some messages in the centre display have a button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to
the message.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
–
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
127
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Handling a message saved from the
centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.
–
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
Message in centre display (p. 126)
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 127)
Messages in the driver display (p. 91)
Voice recognition19
The driver can use voice recognition to control
certain functions in the media player, Bluetoothconnected phone, climate system and Volvo's
navigation system*.
Voice commands offer additional convenience
and assist the driver to not be distracted so that
he or she can concentrate on driving, the road
and the traffic situation.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and
complying with all applicable rules of the road.
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
of the centre display.
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown. Messages with an arrow to the right can be
maximised.
2.
128
Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
Voice control system microphone
Voice control is done in dialogue form with the
user saying commands and receiving verbal
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
responses from the system. The voice recognition
system uses the same microphone as Bluetoothconnected devices, and the voice recognition
system's responses are given via the car's speakers. In some cases, a text message is also shown
in the driver display. Functions are controlled
from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Settings are made via the centre display.
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. Download updates for optimal performance from support.volvocars.com.
Using voice recognition20
Depress the steering wheel
button for voice recognition
to activate the system and
initiate a dialogue using voice
commands.
Remember the following:
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Using voice recognition (p. 129)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 131)
•
Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a
normal tempo.
Press
, say "Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book. If the contact has several
phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the
right category must be referred to.
So press
Mobile".
Commands/phrases
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows
and panoramic roof* closed.
•
•
by saying "Cancel".
with a long press on the voice recognition
.
button on the steering wheel
and say "Call Robin Smith
The following commands are always available for
use:
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands
during this time).
Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:
•
•
Example of voice recognition control
"Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
in the ongoing dialogue.
"Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
"Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
replies with the commands available in the
current situation, a prompt or an example.
Commands for specific functions such as phone
and radio are described in specific sections.
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition
when the
system voice is speaking and say the next command.
19
20
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
}}
* Option/accessory. 129
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
•
•
•
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number, e.g.
zero three one two two four four three
(03122443).
House numbers can be spoken individually
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
For English and Dutch, several groups can
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twentytwo (22 22). For English, double or triple can
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can
be given within the range 0-2300.
Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point
two or hundred four point two (104.2).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
21
22
130
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130)
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition21
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or
dictate brief messages with voice control commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice
recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone book. If a
contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone
numbers then the number category can also be
stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
Press
mands:
"Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book.
•
"Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 131)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Using voice recognition (p. 129)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 131)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
and say one of the following com-
•
•
•
Related information
"Recent calls" - displays the call list.
"Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
"Message to [contact]" users are requested to say a brief message. The message is
then repeated aloud and the user can
choose to send22 or revise the message. For
this function to work, the car must be connected to the Internet.
Applies to certain markets.
Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Voice control of radio and media23
Commands for radio and media player device
control are shown below.
Tap on
and say one of the following commands:
•
"Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
•
"Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
•
"Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
song.
•
"Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
•
"Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel*24.
•
"Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
•
"Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
radio frequency in the current frequency
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
band is started by default.
•
"Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
•
"Radio" - starts FM radio.
23
24
25
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
Settings for voice recognition25
"Radio AM" - starts AM radio.
Settings for the voice control system are
selected here.
"DAB " - starts DAB radio*.
"TV" - starts playback from TV*24.
"USB" - starts playback from USB.
"iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
"Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Bluetooth-connected media source.
"Similar music" — plays back music similar
to the music currently playing back from USB
devices.
Related information
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Using voice recognition (p. 129)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130)
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 131)
Settings
System
Voice Control
Settings can be made within the following areas:
• Repeat Voice Command
• Gender
• Speech Rate
Audio settings
Select audio settings under:
Settings Sound
Voice Control
System Volumes
Language settings
Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language list .
Changing the language also affects menu, message and help texts.
Settings System System Languages
and Units System Language
}}
* Option/accessory. 131
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
132
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Using voice recognition (p. 129)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Audio settings (p. 464)
Changing system language (p. 118)
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to control
both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand
stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior
lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using
a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
Exterior lighting
Position
Specification
Position
Daytime running lights.
Specification
Daytime running lights and position
lamps in daylight.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position lamps in
weak daylight or darkness, or when
the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
Daytime running lights and position
lamps.
Position lamps when the car is
parked.A
The Active main beam function can
be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Dipped beam and position lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be
moved to
position from another position to switch on
only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the car is running, the following functions are available in the rotating ring's
different positions.
Volvo recommends that
when the vehicle is driven.
mode is used
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
134
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
Several light functions can be adjusted and activated via the centre display, such as active main
beam, home safe lighting and approach lighting.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting.
Position lamps
Position lamps can be used so that other road
users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The
position lamp is switched on with the rotating
ring on the stalk switch.
Lights and Lighting.
Related information
Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interior lighting (p. 144)
Position lamps (p. 135)
Using direction indicators (p. 139)
Using main beam (p. 137)
Dipped beam (p. 137)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 141)
Rear fog lamp (p. 141)
Active bending lights* (p. 140)
Brake lights (p. 142)
Emergency brake lights (p. 142)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 134)
Active main beam (p. 138)
Using home safe lighting (p. 143)
Approach light duration (p. 144)
Using direction indicators (p. 139)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 118)
Function view in centre display (p. 108)
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the
position - the
position lamps are switched on (number plate
lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position
II or the car is running then the daytime running
lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on regardless of the ignition position of the car's electrical
system.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating
ring can be moved to the position lamp
}}
* Option/accessory. 135
LIGHTING
||
position from another position to switch on only
the position lamps instead of other lighting.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver should
.
turn to a position other than
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside,
the rear position lamps come on (if not already
switched on) to warn road users approaching
from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition position of the car's electrical system.
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running
lights are switched on when the rotating ring on
,
or
the stalk switch is in position
as well as when the car's electrical system
is in ignition position II or when the car is running. In position
, the headlamps change
automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or
darkness.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
Related information
•
•
takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
Lighting control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Lighting control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Dipped beam (p. 137)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are
switched on when the car is driven in daylight.
The car automatically changes lighting from daytime running light to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also
1
136
Daytime Running Lights
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring
position, dipped beam is activated
in the
automatically in weak daylight or darkness, when
the car's electrical system is in ignition position II
or when the car is running.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
mode for tunnel detecswitch must be in
tion to work.
Using main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk
switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting
and should be used when driving in the dark for
better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle
other road users.
Related information
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Daytime running lights (p. 136)
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if:
•
•
•
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to
main beam flash position. Main beam comes
on until the stalk switch is released.
the front fog lamps* are activated
the rear fog lamp is activated
the front and rear fog lamps are activated
Dipped beam is always switched on when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running.
}}
* Option/accessory. 137
LIGHTING
||
Active main beam
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in
2 or
. Activate main
position
beam by moving the stalk switch forwards.
Deactivate by moving the stalk switch backwards.
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in
front, and then switches from main beam to
dipped beam.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Lighting control (p. 134)
Active main beam is activated with the rotating ring on
the stalk switch in position
.
The function can also take streetlights into
account. Main beam is reactivated when the camera sensor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles
or vehicles ahead.
138
When active main beam is activated, the symbol
illuminates with a white glow in the driver
display.
Car with LED3 headlamps*
If the active main beam has the on/off functionality4 then the lighting returns to main beam about
a second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Active main beam (p. 138)
2 When dipped beam is activated.
3 LED (Light Emitting Diode)
4 Depending on the car's equipment
If active main beam is deactivated while main
beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to
dipped beam.
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
blue.
Related information
•
•
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
12 mph) or higher.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
level.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Limitations for active main beam
The camera sensor on which the function is
based has limitations.
If this symbol is shown in the driver display, together with the message Active
High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching between
main and dipped beam must be performed manually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
position. The
symbol extinbe in the
guishes when these message are shown.
Related information
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 134)
Using main beam (p. 137)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 323)
Using direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable
e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain.
When active main beam becomes available again,
or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,
symbol illuthe message goes out and the
minates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are
favourable.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.
The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.
}}
139
LIGHTING
NOTE
Active bending lights*
•
This automatic flashing sequence can be
stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
•
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Active bending lights are designed to provide
maximum illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED5 headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level.
||
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/activated via the centre display's function view.
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135)
Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
(p. 575)
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135)
•
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 141)
Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide maximum illumination in bends
and junctions and can thereby provide the driver
with improved visibility.
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started. In the event of a fault in the funcsymbol illuminates in the driver
tion, the
display at the same time as the driver display
shows an explanatory text.
5
140
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
NOTE
The front fog lamps emit a stronger beam than
dipped beam and are therefore additionally
effective in fog.
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Cornering lights*
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than
the normal rear lights and should only be used in
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or
dust so that other road users have an early warning of a vehicle ahead.
The front fog lamps can include the cornering
lights function, which temporarily illuminates the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction
the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active or the car is
running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch
is in position
,
or
.
Press the button to activate and deactivate. The
symbol in the driver display illuminates
when the front fog lamps are switched on.
The front fog lamps switch off automatically when
the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off
the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to
position.
the
The function is activated in weak daylight or darkness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
or
position and the speed of the
the
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be activated and deactivated via the centre display.
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car,
on the driver's side.
Related information
•
ignition position II is active or the car is running and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
position
or
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.
•
•
•
•
•
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
Lighting control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Rear fog lamp (p. 141)
Active bending lights* (p. 140)
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135)
}}
* Option/accessory. 141
LIGHTING
||
Press the on/off button. The
symbol in the
driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
Brake lights
Emergency brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when:
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. It is also switched on when
the car is braked automatically by one of the
driver support systems.
The function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a
constant glow.
The emergency brake lights are activated during
heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at
high speeds.
•
the start knob is turned clockwise to switch
off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is
set to the
position
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
off.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
•
•
•
•
142
Lighting control (p. 134)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 141)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 142)
Brake functions (p. 401)
Changing brake light bulb (p. 576)
After the driver brakes to a low speed and then
releases the brake, the brake light returns to normal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at
the same time. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or
switches off the hazard warning flashers.
Related information
•
•
•
Brake lights (p. 142)
Foot brake (p. 401)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 577)
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
by means of all of the car's direction indicators
being activated simultaneously. The function can
be used to give a warning in the event of traffic
hazards.
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
flashers may vary between countries.
Related information
•
•
Using home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
To activate the function:
Emergency brake lights (p. 142)
1.
Switch off the car.
Using direction indicators (p. 139)
2.
Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3.
Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and position lamps,
exterior handle lighting* and number plate lighting are switched on.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stopped flashing and are then deactivated automatically when the car drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135)
•
Approach light duration (p. 144)
* Option/accessory. 143
LIGHTING
Approach light duration
Interior lighting
Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
lighting at a distance.
The interior is equipped with several different
types of lighting to improve the experience. This
includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and
ground lighting.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes
from when:
The function is activated when the remote control
key is used for unlocking. At which point, position
lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate
lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo
area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened
within the activation time, the time for the lighting
in the outside handles* and the interior lighting
will be extended.
The function can be activated and deactivated via
the centre display.
•
the car has been switched off and its electrical system is in ignition position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but it has not
been started.
Front roof lighting
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135)
•
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 143)
Remote control key (p. 217)
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Reading lighting
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the button in the roof console.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
With the automatic system activated, the light
indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and
off according to the following.
Passenger compartment lighting:
•
illuminates when the car is unlocked and
when it is switched off
•
extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked
Reading lamp, left-hand side
•
comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
Passenger compartment lighting
•
remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side
doors is open.
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
144
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Rear roof lighting*
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
ning. The ambience light can be adapted in the
centre display and also precisely adjusted using
the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Glovebox lighting
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Sun visor mirror lighting*
The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is
switched on and off respectively when the cover
is opened or closed.
Ground lighting*
The ground lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
Reading lamps above the rear seat.
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed.
Decor lighting
The ambient light is switched on when you open
the doors and is switched off when the car is
locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be
adapted in the centre display and also precisely
adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument
panel.
The lighting in the storage compartments in the
doors is switched on when you open the doors
and is switched off when the car is locked. The
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the
thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel
console
The lighting in the front cup holders is switched
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off
when the car is locked. The brightness can be
precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the
instrument panel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 146)
Lighting control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
Ambience lights*
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units,
one on each side of the roof.
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is run-
* Option/accessory. 145
LIGHTING
Adjusting interior lighting
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used. The
interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light
functions can also be adjusted via the centre
display.
The thumbwheel, on the instrument panel by the steering
wheel, is used to adjust the
brightness of the display light,
control light, ambient light and
ambience light*
Changing the brightness of the lights
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Choose between By Temperature and By
Colour in order to change the colour of the
light.
Adjusting ambient decor illumination
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3.
Choose between the following settings:
•
Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
•
Under Ambient Light Level, select from
Reduced and Full.
Adjusting ambience light*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is running.
146
With the By Temperature option, the light
changes according to the set passenger
compartment temperature.
With the By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to adjust
further.
Related information
•
•
•
Interior lighting (p. 144)
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains controls for windows, glass
and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
laminated.
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 199)
Laminated glass
The windscreen and panorama* roof have laminated glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides
better protection against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
Laminated glass is available as an option for certain other glass surfaces.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is
laminated1
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 148)
•
•
•
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 154)
•
1
148
Power windows (p. 149)
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 151)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
All windows and sun blinds* controlled electrically have pinch protection which is deployed if
they are blocked by any object when opening or
closing.
In the event of blocking, the movement stops and
then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm
(approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or
to full ventilation position).
If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate once more in the same direction without pinch protection, if this is done within
10 seconds after pinch protection deployment. In
other words, it is possible to force pinch protection when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when
ice is formed, by continuing to press the control
until fully closed.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 198)
Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Related information
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 149)
•
•
Operating power windows (p. 150)
Panorama roof* (p. 154)
Reset sequence for pinch
protection
If any fault arises with the electrical functions of
the power windows, a reset sequence can be
tested.
Power windows
The power windows are operated using the control panels in each respective door. The driver's
door has controls for operating all windows and
also to activate the child safety locks.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
If the problem persists, or if it concerns the panoramic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop.2
Reset the power window
1. Start with the window in closed position.
2.
Then operate it in the manual position 3
times upwards to closed position.
> The system is initiated automatically.
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 148)
•
Operating power windows (p. 150)
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the
controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or
windows from being opened from the inside.
Controls for rear windows.
Controls for front windows.
The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
* Option/accessory. 149
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
•
•
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Related information
•
•
•
Operating power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door.
The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
•
•
Operating power windows (p. 150)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 148)
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 149)
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto. Move one of the
controls gently up or down. The power windows move up or down as long as the control
is held in position.
Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and
release it. The window runs automatically to
its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
ignition position must be I or II. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the
car has been switched off and after the ignition
has been switched off - although not after a door
has been opened. Only one control panel can be
operated at a time.
It can also be operated using the remote control
key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
central locking button.
150
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not at risk of crushing when all the windows
are closed with:
•
•
•
keyless closing*
central locking button
remote control key.
NOTE
•
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
Rearview and door mirrors
The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used
to give the driver better visibility to the rear.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is adjusted easily by
angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror
can be fitted with HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and compass*.
Door mirrors
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear to be further away
than they actually are.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph),
but they can be closed.
The driver always bears responsibility for following traffic regulations in force.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel. There
are also a number of automatic settings that can
be linked to the memory function buttons for the
power seat*.
Related information
Related information
•
•
Power windows (p. 149)
•
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 149)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 148)
•
•
•
•
HomeLink®* (p. 456)
Compass* (p. 459)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 152)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 153)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242)
}}
* Option/accessory. 151
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 199)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart
from when gearbox reverse position is selected.
Manual dimming
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a
control in the mirror's lower edge.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior
rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
Control for manual dimming.
1.
Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2.
Return to normal mode by moving the control
towards the windscreen.
The control for manual dimming is not available
on mirrors with automatic dimming.
152
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Mirrors and Convenience.
The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors
- one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects
ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor
detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must
also be equipped with automatic dimming.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Angling the door mirrors
Resetting to neutral
To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door
mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the
driver. There are a number of automatic settings
that can also be linked to the memory function
buttons for the power seat*.
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work correctly.
1.
Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down
the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2.
Fold them out again by pressing the L and R
buttons simultaneously.
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 151)
3.
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Angling the door mirrors (p. 153)
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Using controls for door mirrors
Related information
•
•
Folding in rearview mirrors electrically*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces.
Controls for door mirrors.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel.
3 Only
in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2.
Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(ignition position must be at least I).
2.
Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Angling during parking3
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
}}
* Option/accessory. 153
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
Note that the button may need to be pressed
twice, depending on whether it was already preselected. The button flashes when the door mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is disengaged, the door mirror automatically starts to
return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches
its original position after approx. 8 seconds.
Automatic angling during parking3
With this setting, the door mirror is automatically
angled down when reverse gear is selected. The
folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted.
You can make the door mirror return to its original position by pressing the L or R button twice.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
154
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate.
Mirrors and Convenience.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 151)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 152)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
Panorama roof*
The panorama roof is divided into two glass sections. The front section can be opened vertically
at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear section is fixed
roof glass.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a
sun blind made of perforated fabric and located
under the glass roof to provide extra protection
from factors such as strong sunlight.
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 199)
Mirrors and Convenience.
Automatic retraction when locking*
3 Only
1.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
It can also be operated using the remote control
key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
central locking button.
in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system
must be in ignition position I or II.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
•
•
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
•
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof.
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219)
•
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
Wind deflector
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
•
IMPORTANT
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
Related information
•
•
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 156)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 158)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 148)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242)
* Option/accessory. 155
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Operating the panorama roof*
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control in the roof panel and both are
equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
•
•
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
4
156
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system
must be in ignition position I or II.
It can also be operated using the remote control
key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
central locking button.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not at risk of crushing when all the windows
are closed with:
•
•
•
The movement of the roof is stopped if the control is released during manual operation, or when
the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the
maximum opening or closing position. The movement of both panoramic roof and sun blind are
also stopped if the roof control is operated again
in the opposite direction to the current direction
of movement.
The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also
equipped with pinch protection.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can be
opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
panoramic roof must be fully closed before
the sun blind can be fully closed.
keyless closing*
central locking button
remote control key.
IMPORTANT
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Open and close ventilation position
Fully open and close the panoramic
roof using the roof control
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward once.
Close by pressing the control downward
once.
When the ventilation position is selected the front
glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, then it opens automatically approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
Operation, manual mode
Operation, automatic mode
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual opening.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2.
Open the panoramic roof to comfort position
- press the control backwards a second time
to the position for automatic opening and
release.
3.
Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third
time to the position for automatic opening
and release.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the automatic closing position instead.
Automatic operation - rapid opening or
closing
The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened
or closed simultaneously:
–
To open - press the control rearward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
To close - press the control forward/downward to the automatic operation position
twice and release.
2.
Open the panoramic roof to comfort position
- press the control backwards a second time
to the position for manual opening.
–
3.
Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third
time to the position for manual opening.
Related information
The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the manual closing position instead.
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 154)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 158)
}}
* Option/accessory. 157
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
•
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 148)
Automatic closing of the panoramic
roof's* sun blind
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242)
With this function, the sun blind is closed automatically 15 minutes after the car has been
locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in
order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's upholstery from
sun-fading.
The function is deactivated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated or
deactivated in the centre display.
•
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 148)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242)
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all windows
are closed with:
•
•
•
keyless closing*
central locking button
remote control key.
Related information
•
•
158
Panorama roof* (p. 154)
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 156)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using windscreen wipers
Intermittent wiping
The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen.
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch.
Set the number of sweeps per time unit
with the thumbwheel when intermittent
wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wipers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen and rear window is scraped away.
Right-hand stalk switch.
IMPORTANT
Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Related information
•
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
* Option/accessory. 159
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles*
Using the rain sensor
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from
freezing.
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
right-hand stalk switch.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
or moving the stalk switch
sensor button
up to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Rain sensor button
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when
wiper blades are set in service position. The rain
sensor is reactivated when service mode has
been deactivated.
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
is shown in the driver display.
symbol
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the electrical system in ignition position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position for
a single sweep.
160
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen.
sor button
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running
or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the driver
display extinguishes.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Related information
•
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can be
activated in such a way that the rain sensor button does not need to be depressed each time the
car is started:
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
•
•
Wipers.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
* Option/accessory. 161
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and
headlamp washers are started using the righthand stalk switch.
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on.
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the
symbol, is shown in the driver display, then
the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is
switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it. The headlamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is
switched on.
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
–
162
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to start the windscreen and
headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
been released.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear
window. Washing/wiping is started and settings
are changed by means of the right-hand steering
wheel stalk switch.
•
•
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
Activating the rear window wiper and
washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a coolingdown period.
Select
for intermittent wiping with the
rear window wiper.
–
Select
for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window washing
and wiping.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
* Option/accessory. 163
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The
function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing.
Wipers.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
Related information
•
•
164
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
166
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
Change the backrest inclination by turning
the control knob.
•
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 169)
•
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat* (p. 169)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 170)
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion* by pumping up/down1.
1
•
You can manually adjust the height of the
head restraints by pressing in the button.
Change the length* of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
Raise/lower the seat by means of pumping
the lever up/down.
Related information
•
•
Power front seat* (p. 167)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
Only applies to the driver's seat.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Power front seat*
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forwards/backwards and
upwards/downwards, and the backrest inclination can be changed. The lumbar support can
be adjusted upwards/downwards/forwards/
backwards. Seat cushion length is adjusted
manually*.
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 170)
Adjusting the power front seat*
Set to desired sitting position using the control
on the front seat's seating section. Activate and
use the lumbar support control by pressing the
four-way button.
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
happens, remove the object and then operate the
seat again.
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine running. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also
be performed for a period of time after the
engine has been switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
•
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 169)
•
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat* (p. 169)
Activate and use the lumber support control
by pressing the button upwards/downwards/
forwards/backwards.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
adjusting the control up/down.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest inclination by adjusting
the control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
}}
* Option/accessory. 167
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
The backrests of the front seats cannot be lowered fully forward.
Storing memory function in power
operated front seat*
3.
The memory function stores settings for the seat
and door mirrors*.
It is possible to store two different settings with
the memory function. The memory function's*
keypad is located on the driver's door.
Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in the
selected memory button an acoustic signal sounds and the light indicator in the M
button extinguishes.
If none of the memory buttons is depressed
within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new
memory can be set.
Related information
•
•
•
•
You can manually adjust the height of the
head restraints by pressing in the button.
Related information
•
•
•
168
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Power front seat* (p. 167)
Button M for storing settings.
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
•
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 169)
•
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat* (p. 169)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 170)
Memory button
Memory button
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Power front seat* (p. 167)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 169)
•
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat* (p. 169)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 170)
Store setting
1.
Adjust seat and door mirrors to the desired
position.
2.
Press and hold the M button depressed. The
light indicator in the button illuminates.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Using stored memory in a powered
front seat
WARNING
The memory function stores settings for the seat
and the door mirrors*.
Using a stored setting
A stored setting can be used with the front door
either open or closed:
Open front door
– Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
with a short press. Seat and door mirrors
move and then stop at the positions stored in
the selected memory button.
•
Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on the
power seat control panel.
•
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat*
For increased comfort, you can adjust the length
of the seat cushion*.
Adjusting the seat cushion
Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the
control on the front of the seat.
Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
Related information
Closed front door
– Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
depressed until seat and door mirrors stop in
the positions that are stored in the selected
memory button.
•
•
•
•
If the memory button is released, the movement
of the seat and door mirrors will be stopped.
•
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat* (p. 169)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 170)
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Power front seat* (p. 167)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
Control for seat cushion adjustment.
1.
Grip the handle
on the front of the seat
and pull upwards.
2.
Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3.
Release the handle and make sure that the
seat cushion has reached the correct position.
Related information
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Power front seat* (p. 167)
}}
* Option/accessory. 169
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
•
•
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
•
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 169)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 170)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
2.
Press the front section of the four-way button to increase lumbar support.
To adjust lumbar support, the four-way control*
on the seat can be used.
3.
Press the rear section of the four-way button
to decrease lumbar support.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 166)
Power front seat* (p. 167)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 168)
•
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 169)
•
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat* (p. 169)
Four-way control, located on the side of the seat's seating section.
4-way lumbar support provides options to adjust
the lumbar support. Use it by pressing the fourway button located on the side of the seat's seating section. The lumbar support can be adjusted
forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards.
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
To adjust the lumbar support:
1.
170
Press the four-way button (round) upwards/
downwards to move the lumbar support
upwards/downwards.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be folded forward individually.
IMPORTANT
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
If the car has private locking, the tailgate must
be closed before lowering the seat.
WARNING
•
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the seat.
Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can
lead to trapping injuries.
•
When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
•
Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
•
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
Lowering the backrest
Car with electronic folding
For cars with automatic gearbox, set the
gear selector in P to prevent it from being
moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered
manually.
WARNING
Pay attention that people are not at risk of
being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automatically on the press of a button, no one must be
on or too close to the rear seat.
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
be stationary and the tailgate open.
For electronically controlled folding of backrests:
1.
Ensure that there are no occupants or
objects in the rear seat.
2.
Lower the centre seat's head restraint manually.
3.
Hold the button for folding depressed. The
buttons are marked L and R for left and
right-hand backrest sections respectively.
4.
The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are
also lowered automatically.
To lower the backrest manually:
If the car is equipped with electronic folding of
the rear seat* there are buttons located in the
}}
* Option/accessory. 171
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints
in the rear seat are locked properly after
being folded up.
The head restraints of the outer seats must
always be raised when there are passengers
on any of the rear seats.
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
1.
Lower the centre head restraint manually
2.
Pull the handles located in the car's left and
right-hand rear seat backrests forward
.
3.
The backrest disengages from the lock and
is automatically lowered to the horizontal
position.
Car without electronic folding
The rear seat consists of two parts:
•
•
172
The right-hand seat and centre seat are
folded as one unit.
The left-hand seat is folded separately.
.
1.
Lower the centre head restraint manually
2.
Pull the handles located in the car's left and
right-hand rear seat backrests forward
.
3.
.
The backrest disengages from the lock and
needs to be lowered manually to the horizontal position.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
1.
Move the backrest up/down manually.
2.
Press the backrest until the lock engages.
3.
The head restraint is raised manually.
4.
If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
Related information
•
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
(p. 173)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward
visibility.
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger.
Adjusting the head restraint, centre
seat
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illustration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
The outer head restraints can be retracted via the
centre display's function view. You can lower the
head restraints in ignition position 0.
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 173
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Press the Headrest Fold button to activate/deactivate lowering.
||
Steering wheel controls and horn
Horn
The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.
The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up.
Related information
•
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 171)
Related information
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
•
•
Steering lock (p. 175)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Controls for driver support systems2.
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in
an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition and menu,
message and phone handling.
2
174
Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Steering lock
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise
can be perceived when the steering lock locks
or unlocks.
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the
steering lock will lock automatically after a while.
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car is
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked,
the steering lock will deactivate if the remote
control key is inside the passenger compartment
and the car is started by turning the start knob
clockwise to unlock the steering lock.
Related information
•
•
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 174)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must never
be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is
regulated according to the car's speed in order to
give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
1.
Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.
2.
Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3.
Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you move
the lever back.
Related information
•
•
Steering lock (p. 175)
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 174)
175
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
Climate
Climate zones
The car is equipped with manual or electronic*
climate control. The climate control system cools
or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the
passenger compartment.
All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical buttons in the centre console.
The number of climate zones that the car is divided into governs the options for setting different
temperatures for different parts of the passenger
compartment.
2-zone climate*
1-zone climate
Some functions for the rear seat can also be
controlled from the climate controls* at the rear
of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
178
Climate zones (p. 178)
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
Climate control - sensors (p. 179)
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides.
Perceived temperature (p. 179)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180)
Parking climate* (p. 203)
Heater* (p. 211)
Air quality (p. 181)
Climate zones with 1-zone climate.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 178)
With 1-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment is set jointly for the left and
right-hand sides.
Air distribution (p. 184)
Climate controls (p. 190)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the climate in the car.
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also
an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate
control system air intake.
Sensor location
Related information
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the interior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror.
•
•
Climate (p. 178)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate
in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual temperature.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically perceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 178)
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instrument panel.
Temperature sensor for the passenger compartment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
* Option/accessory. 179
CLIMATE
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition1
•
"Air condition on"/"Air condition off" activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature, activate a heated seat* or change fan level.
Press
and say one of the following commands:
•
"Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" activates/deactivates the air circulation.
•
"Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
- activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
and door mirrors.
•
•
"Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
•
"Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
•
•
"Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature
setting one step.
"Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates
the heated windscreen*.
•
•
"Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature for all climate zones in the car
with the temperature set for the driver's side.
"Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
•
•
"Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
"Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/deactivates the heated steering wheel*.
•
"Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes
the desired air flow.
•
•
"Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes
the air flow to Max/Off.
"Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
•
"Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" raises/lowers the fan level one step.
•
"Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
•
"Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate
regulation.
•
"Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
1
180
"Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
•
"Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat
ventilation*.
•
"Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
the ventilated seat* one step.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Climate (p. 178)
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Using voice recognition (p. 129)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 131)
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger compartment and the air cleaning system ensure that
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
high.
•
•
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182)
Clean Zone*
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182)
The Clean Zone function checks and indicates
whether or not all conditions have been met for
good air quality in the passenger compartment.
Passenger compartment filter (p. 183)
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air
Quality System* also help to maintain high air
quality in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 178)
Clean Zone* (p. 181)
The indicator is visible in the climate view in
the centre display.
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that are checked:
•
•
That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
•
That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
System* is activated.
That all side windows and the panorama
roof* are closed.
}}
* Option/accessory. 181
CLIMATE
||
•
•
That the ventilation fan is activated.
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Interior Air Quality System*
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises
a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and
asthma-inducing substances.
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully automatic air quality system that separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
contaminants in the passenger compartment.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and groundlevel ozone.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the conditions for good air quality have been met.
The following is included:
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 181)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 183)
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
The fully automatic air quality system Interior
Air Quality System (IAQS).
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
to prevent misting.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 181)
In the event of misting, the defrost functions
for windscreen, side windows and rear window should be used.
Clean Zone* (p. 181)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 183)
Related information
182
•
Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 183)
•
•
Air quality (p. 181)
Clean Zone* (p. 181)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
•
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 183)
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor
should be activated/deactivated.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deactivate the air quality sensor.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
Related information
•
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 181)
Clean Zone* (p. 181)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182)
* Option/accessory. 183
CLIMATE
•
Air distribution
Table of air distribution options (p. 187)
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate control2 running the
air distribution takes place automatically. If necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable,
which means that you can open/close the vent to
aim the air flow.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment.
With 1-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel.
Addition with 2-zone climate* - two at the
rear of the tunnel console.
NOTE
At low ambient temperatures, no air is distributed from the adjustable air vents on the rear
of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
•
•
2
184
Climate (p. 178)
Changing air distribution (p. 185)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 185)
Not available with manual climate control.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Changing air distribution
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required.
Related information
•
•
Air distribution (p. 184)
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 187)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 185)
Opening, closing and aiming the air
vents
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side windows then misting can be eliminated.
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.
Opening and closing the air vents
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
and centre console
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press one or more of the air distribution buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
3
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
Air vent knob3.
–
Turn the knob in order to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the marking
on the knob is in vertical position.
}}
185
CLIMATE
||
Aiming the air vents
The air vent's lever3.
–
Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.
Related information
•
•
•
3
186
Air distribution (p. 184)
Changing air distribution (p. 185)
Table of air distribution options (p. 187)
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
CLIMATE
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.
Air distribution
Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
With manual climate control it is not possible to deselect all air distribution buttons.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents.
Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows
from other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
}}
187
CLIMATE
||
188
Air distribution
Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air
flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the
floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument
panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
CLIMATE
Related information
•
•
Air distribution (p. 184)
•
Changing air distribution (p. 185)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 185)
189
CLIMATE
Climate controls
The climate control system's functions are controlled from physical buttons in the centre console, the centre display and the climate controls
at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
Climate row with 2-zone climate. Climate row with 1zone climate has some differences regarding the location of the controls.
Temperature controls for driver and passenger side4.
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mirrors.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated climate settings.
Climate row in centre display
Climate view in centre display
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions, other
main climate functions can also be controlled in
the Main climate tab.
4
5
190
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated
steering wheel*5.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting
the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Controls for air distribution.
With 1-zone climate, the control is to the right of the centre button. With manual climate control, the set temperature is not shown, simply a scale.
With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone climate, the control is shared with the rear
seat).
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate6.
Parking climate*
The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab.
Climate controls at rear of tunnel
console*
If the car is equipped with heated rear seats*
there are physical buttons at the rear of the tunnel console for controlling them.
•
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 196)
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
•
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 198)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 199)
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
•
•
•
Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 200)
Synchronising temperature (p. 202)
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
(p. 202)
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 178)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 191)
•
Activating and deactivating heated rear seat*
(p. 192)
•
Activating and deactivating ventilated front
seat* (p. 193)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 194)
•
•
Activating auto climate control (p. 195)
6
7
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row7.
1.
Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
for heated seats is immediately available in
the climate row.
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
(p. 195)
Not available with manual climate control.
With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row.
}}
* Option/accessory. 191
CLIMATE
||
2.
Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated front seat*
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start in the event of low
ambient temperature.
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
4.
Select Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated front seat* (p. 192)
Related information
•
•
192
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the rear seat
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console.
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels: Off, High, Medium
and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activating and deactivating
ventilated front seat*
The seats can be ventilated to provide increased
comfort in a hot climate, for example.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the
cooler the passenger compartment air becomes.
The system can be activated when the engine is
running.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row8.
1.
Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or heated steering wheel, the button for ventilated seats is immediately available in the
climate row.
2.
Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
seats in order to change between the four
levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Related information
•
8
Climate controls (p. 190)
With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row.
* Option/accessory. 193
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
2.
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change between
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Related information
•
•
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate
1.
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated steering wheel* (p. 194)
194
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic start
of heated steering wheel.
4.
Select Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
row9.
Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the centre
display in order to open the controls for seat
and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or ventilated seats, the button for heated
steering wheel is immediately available in the
climate row.
9
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated steering
wheel*
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 194)
With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating auto climate control10
NOTE
With auto climate control activated, multiple climate functions are controlled automatically.
Temperature and fan speed can be changed
without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system. The automaticallyregulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed
manually or when maximum defroster is activated.
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Auto-regulation button in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Give a short or long press on AUTO.
The air recirculation button in the climate view.
•
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Short press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically.
•
Long press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan speed
are changed to standard settings: 22 °C
(72 °F) and level 3.
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
and the button illuminates.
10
Not available with manual climate control.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
}}
195
CLIMATE
||
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
when max defroster is activated.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
air recirculation (p. 196)
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment.
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the
timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically
switched off after 20 minutes.
Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and
ice from windows.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre console
There is a physical button in the centre console
for quick access to max defroster.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
only be activated individually from the climate
view in the centre display.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
(p. 195)
Physical button in the centre console.
Cars without heated windscreen:
–
196
Press the button.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Cars with heated windscreen:
–
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre display
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
•
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button.
Max defroster button in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, activates air conditioning and changes the
fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.
When max defroster is deactivated, the
climate control system returns to the previous settings.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
197
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre display
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove
mist and ice from the window.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre console
NOTE
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated windscreen.
If the heated windscreen is activated when
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
engine then the engine will be restarted.
Related information
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
Physical button in the centre console.
–
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated windscreen* (p. 199)
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
•
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
198
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated
windscreen*
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door
mirrors
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove
mist and ice from the window.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic
start activated, heating will start when there is a
risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window.
The heating switches off automatically when the
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen.
Activating and deactivating heated rear
window and door mirrors from centre
display
Activating and deactivating heated rear
window and door mirrors from centre
console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated rear window and door
mirrors.
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 198)
Related information
Physical button in the centre console.
–
Press the button.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 200)
* Option/accessory. 199
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic starting of the heated
rear window and door mirrors
Regulating fan level for front seat11
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated rear window and door mirrors should be
activated/deactivated when the engine is started.
With automatic start activated, heating will start
when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone.
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
2.
Press Climate.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
3.
Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
11
12
13
200
•
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 199)
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
Only with electronic climate control.
Only with electronic climate control.
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means that
the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.13
Related information
1.
Related information
NOTE
The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled12 fan speeds for the front seat.
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Climate controls (p. 190)
CLIMATE
Regulating temperature for front
seat14
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees15 for the front seat's climate
zones.
Temperature control17, 15.
2.
Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
•
Temperature buttons in the climate
1.
row16, 15.
Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button in the centre display's climate row to
open the controls.
drag the control to the desired temperature, or
•
press +/− to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature15.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
14
15
16
17
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
With manual climate control, the set degrees are not shown, simply a scale.
With 1-zone climate, the temperature button is to the right of the centre button.
With 1-zone climate, the control is horizontal instead of vertical.
201
CLIMATE
Synchronising temperature18
The temperature in the car's different climate
zones can be synchronised with the temperature
set on the driver's side.
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
1.
Press the driver's side temperature button in
the centre display's climate row in order to
open the controls.
2.
Press Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car is
synchronised with the temperature set for
the driver's side and the synchronisation
symbol is shown adjacent to the temperature button.
The synchronisation is stopped by means of a
further press on Synchronise temperature or
18
202
Not available with 1-zone climate.
by means of changing the temperature settings
for a climate zone other than the driver's.
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
Related information
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
The air conditioning button in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically controls starting and switching off as
required.
CLIMATE
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
Parking climate*
The climate of the car's passenger compartment
can be preconditioned or maintained while the
car is parked.
•
•
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 208)
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 210)
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 190)
Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are controlled from the Parking climate tab in the centre display's climate view.
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 178)
Preconditioning* (p. 204)
* Option/accessory. 203
CLIMATE
Preconditioning*
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
Preconditioning of the car before driving can
reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
the timer.
Preconditioning warms the passenger compartment and engine or airs the passenger compartment before driving. The function can use direct
start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
•
The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
up both the passenger compartment and the
engine.
•
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
Starting/stopping from the centre
display
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort
temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
Related information
•
•
•
204
Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in
the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 204)
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
3.
Press Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extinguished.
Parking climate* (p. 203)
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the
car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Starting from the app*
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Preconditioning heats the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature or ventilates the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)19 via the Volvo On
Call* app.
Related information
•
•
•
Parking climate* (p. 203)
Preconditioning* (p. 204)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
Preconditioning time setting*
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning
is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
•
•
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning*
The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
A time on a single date
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without repetition.
Related information
•
•
19
Certain markets.
Preconditioning* (p. 204)
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205)
•
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 207)
•
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 207)
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
}}
* Option/accessory. 205
CLIMATE
||
3.
Press Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if there
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
add a new one.
4.
Tap on Date to set the time for a single date.
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the
car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more
days of the week.
6.
7.
206
With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the arrows.
Editing a time setting
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
With Days: Select the days of the week for
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for
the days of the week.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Press the time setting that is to be changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting" above.
Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
Tap on Confirm in order to add the time setting.
> The time setting is added to the list and is
activated.
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 207)
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
5.
•
Related information
•
•
•
Preconditioning* (p. 204)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 207)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning*
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on need.
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the
car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping
on the timer button to the right of the setting.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Removing time setting for
preconditioning*
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
1.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Preconditioning* (p. 204)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205)
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 207)
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Press Edit list.
4.
Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
> The icon changes to the text Delete.
5.
Press Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the list.
Related information
•
•
Preconditioning* (p. 204)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
}}
* Option/accessory. 207
CLIMATE
•
•
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 207)
Climate comfort when parking*
The climate in the car's passenger compartment
can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
and maintain the level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
via direct start.
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
in the passenger compartment after driving. The
function can use direct start from the centre display.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
•
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold climate, heats the passenger compartment to
comfort temperature.
•
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
•
•
208
Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Press Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
extinguishes.
Parking climate* (p. 203)
Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking* (p. 208)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
•
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 208)
* Option/accessory. 209
CLIMATE
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
Symbol
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
Message
Specification
Parking climate
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Service required
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
A
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a workshopA to check the function.
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Filling the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
210
Parking climate* (p. 203)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Heater*
The heater helps the engine and passenger
compartment reach the correct temperature
before and during driving.
The heater has two subfunctions:
•
•
Parking heater - heats the engine and passenger compartment, if necessary, when the
parking climate control's preconditioning* is
activated.
NOTE
NOTE
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
battery if the heater needs to be used.
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
used.
Fuel and refuelling
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary, during driving.
Check in the driver display that the
heater is switched off. This symbol
is lit when it is working as a parking
heater.
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted inside the
engine compartment.
Related information
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from under the front part of the car
and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound
from the fuel pump may also be heard from
the rear section of the car. This is perfectly
normal.
Battery and charging
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
•
•
•
Climate (p. 178)
Parking heater* (p. 212)
Additional heater* (p. 213)
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
display shows a message.
* Option/accessory. 211
CLIMATE
Parking heater*
NOTE
The parking heater heats the passenger compartment as necessary before driving if the car's
preconditioning is activated.
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs
to be used.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of
the car's heater. The heater is fitted inside the
engine compartment.
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
starter battery if the parking heater needs to
be used.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from under the front part of the car
and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound
from the fuel pump may also be heard from
the rear section of the car. This is perfectly
normal.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined
with short journeys may discharge the battery
and impair starting.
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the
car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
If the heater is used on a regular basis, then
the car should be driven for the same amount
of time that the heater is used in order to
ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
the same amount of energy as consumed by
the parking heater. The parking heater is used
for a maximum of 30 minutes each time.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds coming from the parking heater, switch off the
heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair.
The parking heater starts automatically if the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated
and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated up.
It switches off automatically when a set timer
time or the heater's maximum run time expires, or
if the car is restarted.
•
Related information
•
•
Heater* (p. 211)
Additional heater* (p. 213)
The heater's maximum running time is
40 minutes.
212
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Additional heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted inside the
engine compartment.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from under the front part of the car
and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound
from the fuel pump may also be heard from
the rear section of the car. This is perfectly
normal.
•
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
auxiliary heater (p. 213)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of auxiliary heater
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
It is possible to set whether automatic start for
the additional heater should be activated/deactivated.
1.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Additional Heater to activate/deactivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the automatic start
for the additional heater should be switched
off for short driving distances.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while the
car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
Related information
•
Additional heater* (p. 213)
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs
to be used.
Related information
•
•
Heater* (p. 211)
Parking heater* (p. 212)
* Option/accessory. 213
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Lock confirmation
Lock and alarm indicator
When the car is locked or unlocked the direction
indicators confirm that locking or unlocking was
correctly performed.
Indication in lock buttons
Front door
Exterior indication
Locking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors1.
Unlocking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the
door mirrors1.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to
indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed
with only the driver's door closed2, the car will be
locked but lock indication with hazard warning
flashers will only occur after all doors, tailgate
and bonnet have been closed.
1
2
216
The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
show the status of the alarm system.
Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pulsating flashes.
Other indication
The home safe lighting and approach light functions also provide indication of locking and
unlocking.
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
of either front door indicates that all doors are
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extinguish in both doors.
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
In rear door*
Lock indication setting
Remote control key
It is possible to select how the car confirms
locking and unlocking in the centre display settings menu.
The remote control key locks and unlocks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote
control key needs to be inside the car for it to be
started.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Tap on Visible Locking Feedback to select
when the car should give a visible response:
at Lock, Unlock, Both, or to switch off the
function.
Locking.
Indication with retractable door mirrors*
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue
to illuminate.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
Related information
3.
Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function.
•
•
•
3
Lock indication setting (p. 217)
Approach light duration (p. 144)
Using home safe lighting (p. 143)
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Mirrors and Convenience.
Related information
•
Lock confirmation (p. 216)
Remote control key3, on left, and button-less key (Key
Tag)*, on right.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as standard. The key must be in the front part of the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver's pocket or
the runnel console cup holder, for it to be possible to start the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 217
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Keyless locking and unlocking of doors, tailgate
(Passive Entry*) is also available as an option.
The key then has a range extending in a semicircle with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet)
out from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively.
Remote control key buttons
matically when the button is held depressed.
The tailgate is also closed with a long press acoustic warning signals sound.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the button
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators
and the horn. The function can be turned off
with the same button once it has been active
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after
3 minutes.
With keyless starting and keyless locking and
unlocking, the remote control key can be located
anywhere in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start
the car.
Each one of the remote control keys included
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
certain profile is used, the car's settings are
adapted according to the profile.
Button-less key (Key Tag)
For cars equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and buttonless key (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same
way as the normal remote control key when it
comes to keyless starting and locking and
unlocking4. It has no detachable key blade and
the battery cannot be replaced.
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side3.
Locking - Pressing the button locks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
arms the alarm*.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and panoramic roof* are deenergised by always taking the remote control
key with you when you leave the car.
Press and hold to close all of the windows
and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the
alarm.
A longer press opens all windows simultaneously5.
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and
disarms its alarm. On cars with power operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto-
4
3
5
218
The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
When the remote control key is positioned in
the backup reader, make sure that there are
no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus nearby (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to
one another in the storage compartment may
cause interference with each other.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The "Double lock" function is also deactivated.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
Interference
Remote control key functions for keyless starting
and keyless locking and unlocking* can be disrupted by electromagnetic fields and screening.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close to
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers preferably no closer than 10-15 cm
(4-6 inches).
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
Locking with the remote control key
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219)
Remote control key range (p. 222)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 222)
Detachable key blade (p. 227)
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 226)
Immobiliser (p. 230)
If there is still interference - use the remote control key's detachable key blade to unlock and
then place the key in the backup reader in the
storage compartment to disarm the car.
6
7
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking then all side doors must be closed.
Remote control key6.
–
Press the remote control key
lock.
button to
The driver's door must be closed in order for the
lock sequence to be activated7. If any of the other
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not
locked and their alarms armed* until they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked.
}}
* Option/accessory. 219
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The "Double lock" function is also deactivated.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
When the remote control key does not
work
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade.
NOTE
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 220)
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is
open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is
closed and the car is completely locked8.
•
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key (p. 221)
•
•
Remote control key (p. 217)
Unlocking with the remote control key
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable
key blade (p. 229)
Press the remote control key
unlock.
It is possible to select different sequences for
remotely controlled unlocking.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car Locking
Interior Unlock.
3.
Select option:
button to
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 222)
Automatic relocking
Remote and
• All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
Related information
Locking when the tailgate is open
–
Settings for remotely controlled and
inside unlocking
• Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
the doors requires two presses on the
remote control key's unlock button.
The settings made here also affect central
unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219)
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
8
220
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
1.
It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by pressing a button on the remote control key.
button.
Press the remote control key's
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show
that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 248)
The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle
and open the tailgate.
Use the remote control key
tailgate and disable the alarm9.
If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed.
button to unlock the
2.
With the power operated tailgate option* Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
button
remote control key's
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the doors remain locked and their
alarm functions armed.
9
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 221
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work properly it needs to be within a certain distance from
the car.
(5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) from the tailgate.
NOTE
The remote control key's functions for e.g. locking/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
or
have a range that extends approx.
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again.
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
For keyless use10
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
10
222
The battery in the remote control key needs to
be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key
blade.
For manual use
For keyless use, a remote control key or the button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicircular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
•
•
Remote control key (p. 217)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 241)
Antenna locations for the start and lock systems (p. 244)
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not apply
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery varies depending on how often the vehicle/key
is used.
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
the information symbol illuminates and
the message Car key battery low
See Owner's manual is shown in the
driver display
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt.
Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
The battery in the button-less key11 (Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Opening the key and changing the
battery
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must be deleted from the car since it is still
possible to use it to start the car via back-up
start.
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
Turn the key, move the button to the side
and slide the back shell a few millimetres
upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
11
This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).
}}
* Option/accessory. 223
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the battery cover anticlockwise until the markings
meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's battery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
224
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Reposition the rear side's shell and press
it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Turn the remote control key over and refit
the front side's shell by pressing it down until
a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
properly positioned and securely attached.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
IMPORTANT
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 217)
225
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Ordering more remote control keys
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
A button-less key is supplied if the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered.
A total of twelve keys can be programmed and
used for one single car. If additional keys are
ordered, additional driver profiles are added - one
per new remote control key. This also applies for
the key tag.
Red Key - restricted remote control
key*
A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner
to set limitations for certain of the car's properties. The limitations are intended to encourage
the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when
being loaned out.
The restrictions are intended to act as measures
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young drivers, valet parking or a workshop. The holder of a
Red Key cannot change settings defined for it –
a regular remote control key is required for this.
Related information
•
•
Red Key settings* (p. 227)
Remote control key (p. 217)
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
remote control keys must be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car
can be checked via driver profiles in the centre
display's top view, select Settings System
Driver Profiles.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 217)
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
maximum speed, set speed reminders and determine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume.
In addition, some of the car's driver support systems will always be active. Other functions of the
key are the same as those of a normal remote
control key.
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer. A total of eleven keys with restrictions can be programmed and used for a single
car - at least one must be a normal remote control key.
226
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Red Key settings*
The holder of a regular remote control key can
define settings for Red Key. Certain driver support functions are always active.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press System Driver Profiles Red
Key.
> The following settings can be defined:
• Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise
Control
• Reduced Maximum Volume
• Max Speed Limit
• Speed Limit Warning
Adaptive cruise control*:
• Setting at first use: Longest intervals
Reduced max. volume (On/Off):
• Setting at first use: On
Speed limiter (On/Off):
• Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)
•
Setting during first use is 120 km/h
(75 mph)
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Speed reminder (On/Off):
• Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
•
Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
•
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Driver support functions
The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Detachable key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
Lane assistance (LKA)*
Distance Warning*
City Safety
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
Road Sign Information*
Related information
•
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 226)
The driver display shows the symbol
and message
Red key Speed limitation cannot
be exceeded.
}}
* Option/accessory. 227
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
The key blade's application areas
Detaching the key blade
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
the left-hand12 front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key.
•
•
all doors are emergency-locked.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated and deactivated.
The button-less key13 (Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.
Return the key blade to its intended position
in the remote control key after use.
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable
key blade (p. 229)
•
Remote control key (p. 217)
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
12
13
228
This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
5.
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade
can be used to unlock the car from the outside e.g. if the remote control key's battery has
become discharged.
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
clockwise in step (3).
Unlocking
Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Switching off the alarm*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1.
Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's storage compartment.
2.
Press the start button.
> The control automatically returns to its
starting position - the alarm signal stops
and the alarm switches off.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
has become discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
them being opened from outside.
Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side14 to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so that the rear
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
14
This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
The backup reader's location in the storage compartment.
}}
* Option/accessory. 229
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Immobiliser
•
A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety locks
cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking button.
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents an unauthorised person
from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
||
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the
child safety locks.
–
Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote control key. Insert the key blade in
the hole for lock reset and press the key in
until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock
button on the remote control key or with the central locking button on the driver's door.
15
230
Related information
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 256)
•
Remote control key (p. 217)
Detachable key blade (p. 227)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 222)
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol
Message
Specification
Car key not
found
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting place the key on
the key symbol in
the storage compartment and try
again.
See
Owner's
manual
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system15
The car is fitted with a system which makes it
possible to track and locate the car and to
remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents
starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo
dealer for more information and assistance with
activating the system.
Only certain markets and together with Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser
with tracking system:
Symbol
Message
Specification
Remotely
immobilised
The remote-controlled immobiliser
with tracking system is activated.
The car cannot be
started. Contact
Volvo On Call
Service Centre.
Car not possible to start
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 217)
Ordering more remote control keys (p. 226)
231
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the car's remote key system
can be seen in the following tables.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
For more information about type approval, see
support.volvocars.com.
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval numbers, see following
tables.
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this
CV1-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other
relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED).
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
232
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia
P1614120100
Argentina
CNC ID: C-14771
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Brazil
MT-3245/2015
Indonesia
Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
Malaysia
RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)
Mexico
IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates
ER37847/15
DA0062437/11
}}
233
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
Namibia
TA-2016-02
South Africa
TA-2014-1868
Remote control key
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Jordan
234
TRC/LPD/2015/104
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
TA-2015-102
}}
235
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Oman
Serbia
236
Type approval
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-432
The United Arab
Emirates
Key Tag
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2015/107
}}
237
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
238
TA-2015-103
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Oman
Serbia
}}
239
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-414
The United Arab
Emirates
Related information
•
240
Remote control key (p. 217)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless and touch-sensitive
surfaces*
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking, it is sufficient to have the remote control key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
making it more convenient to open the car if your
hands are full.
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive
surface is activated at a time. Gripping the
handle while touching the lock surface risks
giving double commands. This means that the
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not
be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 243)
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
Tailgate
The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure
plate that is only used for unlocking.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
* Option/accessory. 241
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless locking and unlocking*
open when locking the car with a side door handle.
The car is locked and unlocked from the outside
using the door or tailgate handles if the car is
equipped with keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry)*.
–
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for
unlocking only.
NOTE
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range for locking and unlocking to
work.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Touch the marked surface towards the rear
on the outside of a door handle after the
door has been closed, or press the lock16
button on the bottom edge of the tailgate
before closing it.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
to flash to indicate the car is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the
touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door
handle and hold it there until all of the side windows and the panoramic roof have been closed.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is
open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is
closed and the car is completely locked17.
Keyless locking
All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
16
17
242
Applies with power operated tailgate*.
If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless unlocking
Settings for Keyless entry*
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
–
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
For keyless unlocking of the tailgate, all you have
to do is have the remote control key in a pocket
or bag, for example.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to
unlock the car.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extinguishes to confirm the car is unlocked open the doors or tailgate as usual.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on My Car
Unlock
3.
Select option:
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 241)
To open the tailgate:
1.
• Single Door
- unlocks selected door.
Press gently on the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle.
> The lock is released.
NOTE
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 243)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 243)
Keyless
• All Doors
Related information
•
•
•
Locking
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car for unlocking to
work.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242)
2.
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 241)
Lift by the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.
}}
* Option/accessory. 243
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear
bumper, see separate section.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the
keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock
system18 and therefore has a number of built-in
antennas positioned at different locations in the
car.
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 241)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 241)
•
Remote control key range (p. 222)
Remote control key range (p. 222)
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 252)
In the storage compartment in the tunnel
console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door19
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door19
In the cargo area19
18
19
244
The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
Alternative unlocking method
Locking using a button in the front door
–
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
Press the
button - both front doors must
be closed.
> All doors and the tailgate are locked.
A long press on the
button closes all side
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Central locking
Locking using a button in the rear door*
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side
door21.
–
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
Unlocking using a button in the front
door
–
Press the
button to unlock all side doors
and the tailgate.
Pull the opening handle on one of the side
doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the remote
control key, either all doors will be
unlocked or only the selected door will be
unlocked and opened.
To change this setting, tap on Settings
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock in the centre display's top
view.
A long press on the
button opens all the
side windows simultaneously20.
20
21
The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their respective rear door.
Unlocking the rear door
–
Pull the opening handle.
> The rear door is unlocked and opened.
}}
* Option/accessory. 245
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Related information
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 220)
•
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the
car (p. 246)
•
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 247)
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside by
pressing a button on the instrument panel.
1.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 248)
Brief press on the
button on the instrument panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubberised pressure plate.
With the power operated tailgate option* 2.
246
Long press on the
button on the instrument panel.
> The tailgate opens.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
2.
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
There is an electric* and a manual lock.
Activating and deactivating electrically*
The electric child safety locks can be activated
and deactivated in all ignition positions higher
than 0. Activation and deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the
engine, provided that no door is opened.
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
Symbol
When the electric child safety lock is active then
the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
Message
Specification
Rear child
lock Activated
Child safety
locks are activated.
Rear child
lock Deactivated
Child safety
locks are deactivated.
Activating and deactivating manually
To deactivate the locks:
–
Button for electric activation and deactivation.
1.
Start the engine or choose an ignition position higher than 0.
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door locks.
–
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
}}
* Option/accessory. 247
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Automatic locking when driving
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
when the car starts to move.
To change this setting:
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
||
Related information
248
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 227)
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to
deactivate or activate this function.
Locking.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
The car's tailgate can be opened and closed
electrically.
Opening the power operated tailgate
Choose one of the following options to open the
tailgate:
–
Long press on the remote control key's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 245)
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
–
Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
–
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
–
Closing the power operated tailgate
–
Light press on the tailgate handle.
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tailgate remains unlocked.
Choose one of the following methods to close22
the tailgate:
NOTE
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch
has been left open. Thereafter, it must be
closed manually.
–
22
A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
Long press on the
button on the remote
control key.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
}}
* Option/accessory. 249
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
–
Long press on the
button on the instrument panel.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
–
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Closing and locking22 the power
operated tailgate
–
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be
closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tailgate and doors are locked, and the alarm*
is armed.
NOTE
22
250
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly.
Cancel opening or closing
Cancel opening or closing in one of the following
ways:
•
•
•
Press the button on the instrument panel.
•
Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath
the outside handle.
•
Using a foot movement*.
and the tailgate returns to the programmed
max. position.
WARNING
Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
as trapping may have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Pre-tensioned springs
Press the remote control key's button.
Press the closing button on the underside of
the tailgate.
The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops.
The boot lid can then be operated manually.
Pinch protection
•
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range for locking and unlocking
to work.
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening or closing then the
pinch protection is activated.
•
When using keyless* locking or closing,
three signals will sound if the key is not
detected sufficiently close to the tailgate.
•
During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
•
During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate.
A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
WARNING
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-tensioned with high pressure and can cause
injury if opened.
Related information
•
Programming maximum opening for power
operated tailgate* (p. 251)
•
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 252)
•
Remote control key range (p. 222)
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate*
NOTE
•
Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof
height.
To adjust max. opening:
1.
Open the tailgate - stop it in the open position.
NOTE
If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
about 2 minutes.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 248)
It is not possible to program an opening position lower than half-open tailgate.
2.
button on the underside of
Press the
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been saved.
To reset max. opening:
–
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position - press the
button on
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its max.
position when opened.
* Option/accessory. 251
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Opening and closing the tailgate
with foot movement*
Opening and closing with foot
movement
To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
your hands are occupied, it can be opened and
closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with
a foot movement.
The function with both opening and closing of
the tailgate is also available when the car is
equipped with power operated tailgate*.
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions:
•
•
Opening and closing with foot movement
Only unlocking with foot movement (lift
up the tailgate manually to open it)
Note that the function for opening and closing with foot movement requires power operated tailgate*.
The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car (approx. 1 metre (3
feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. This
also applies to an already unlocked car in order
to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash.
Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
–
Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then
take a step back. The bumper must not be
touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening or closing is activated - the tailgate is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is in open position then it is
always closed23 on activation via foot
movement.
If several kicking motions take place without an
approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
23
252
Applies to cars with power operated tailgate*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause activation to fail.
Cancelling opening or closing with foot
movement
– Make one slow forward kicking motion when
opening or closing is in progress in order to
stop the movement of the tailgate.
Private locking
The tailgate can be locked, so-called private
locking which prevents it from being opened,
e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a
hotel or similar.
The private locking function
button is located in the centre
display function view. Depending on the current status of the
lock, Private Locking
Unlocked or Private Locking
Locked is shown.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or closing.
NOTE
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 253)
Activating and deactivating private
locking
Private locking is activated with a function button
in the centre display and an optional PIN code.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to be
activated.
Enter the security code before using for
the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the
first time the function is used. It can then be used
to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN
code has been lost or forgotten. The security
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN
codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar
if the remote key is within range.
To create a security code:
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 241)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 248)
•
Remote control key range (p. 222)
> A pop-up window is shown.
}}
* Option/accessory. 253
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
2.
Enter the desired security code.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activation.
Deactivate private locking
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
Related information
•
Private locking (p. 253)
If the system has been reset then the above procedure needs to be repeated.
Activate private locking
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2.
Enter the code to be used in order to unlock
the tailgate after locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of
locking takes place by means of a green
indicator being shown by the button in the
function view.
Enter the code that was used for locking and
tap on Confirm.
> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of
unlocking takes place by means of the
green indicator by the button in the function view extinguishing.
NOTE
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if
the wrong PIN code has been entered more
than three times, the security code can be
used to deactivate the private locking.
NOTE
If private locking is activated and the car is
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
automatically.
254
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Alarm*
Alarm indicator
The alarm provides audible and visual warnings
if anyone enters the car without a valid remote
control key or manipulates the starter battery or
alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
•
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
•
•
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
When the alarm has been triggered, the following
happens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times25.
24
25
To avoid this:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened24
•
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the
event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also registered. For this
reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with
a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the
passenger compartment heater is used.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
•
•
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
•
After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
or until ignition position I has been selected
by turning the start knob clockwise and
releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.
The LED flashes once every other second –
alarm is armed.
Movement and tilt sensors*
Movement and tilt sensors react to movements
inside the car, if the window is broken or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle
away.
•
Close the window and panoramic roof when
leaving the car.
•
If the passenger compartment or parking
heater is to be used – direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they do not point
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors.
Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors
when the car is being transported on a ferry or
train as these movements may affect the car and
trigger the alarm.
In the event of an alarm system fault
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
}}
* Option/accessory. 255
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.
Related information
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 256)
Activating and deactivating alarms*
Deactivate the alarm
The alarm is armed when the car is locked.
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows:
Arming the alarm
•
press the remote control key's unlock button
•
grip one of the door handles or press on the
tailgate's rubberised pressure plate26.
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:
•
press the remote control key's lock button
•
touch the marked surface on the outside of
the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised
pressure plate26.
Reduced alarm level* (p. 258)
Double lock* (p. 258)
If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/
unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the
button on the underside of the tailgate can
also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm.
A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every
two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is
armed.
26
256
Only applies to a car with keyless locking and unlocking* (Passive Entry).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning
remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the
remote control key's battery is dead.
1.
Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
2.
Switching off a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key's unlock button
or set the car in ignition position I by pressing the start button.
3.
Select Passive Arming Deactivation to
deactivate the function temporarily.
Related information
•
Alarm* (p. 255)
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Automatic arming and rearming of the
alarm
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car
being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is
relocked at the same time.
Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's storage compartment.
3.
Press the start button.
> The alarm is deactivated.
In certain markets, the alarm is armed automatically after a certain delay after the driver's door
has been opened and closed without being
locked.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
Locking.
* Option/accessory. 257
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Reduced alarm level*
Double lock*
A reduced alarm level means that the movement
and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry.
Double lock means that all opening handles are
disengaged mechanically, which prevents door
opening from the inside when the car is locked
from the outside.
Double locks are activated with the remote control key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*.
Double locks are activated with a delay of about
10 seconds after the doors have locked.
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display
function view to switch off the
movement and tilt sensors
when subsequently locking the
car.
If a door is opened within the delay time then the
sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
•
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
reduced alarm level must be reactivated.
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
•
•
Alarm* (p. 255)
Double lock* (p. 258)
Related information
•
Temporarily deactivating double locks*
(p. 259)
•
Alarm* (p. 255)
NOTE
At the same time, the double lock function is
deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible.
Related information
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the double lock in order
to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On
Call* app when double locks are activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with
the detachable key blade, the alarm will be triggered.
258
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Temporarily deactivating double
locks*
Detection of unknown car
component*
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then the
double lock function should be deactivated, to
allow unlocking from the inside.
The "Foreign Component Detection" function
can detect whether an unknown car component
has been connected to the car.
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to deactivate the double lock function
temporarily.
This also means that the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors* are switched off.
Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If
an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver
display shows a message Unknown car part.
Service required, unknown car part found.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 560)
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the centre display and double locks are temporarily
deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
deactivated immediately, but when double locks
are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for
a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
double lock function must be deactivated again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
•
•
Double lock* (p. 258)
Alarm* (p. 255)
* Option/accessory. 259
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
The car is equipped with different driver support
systems which can assist the driver in different
situations, either actively or passively.
The systems can, for example, help the driver to
hold a set speed or a certain time interval to the
vehicle in front, prevent a collision by warning the
driver and brake the car or help the driver to park.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while
others are options. This also varies depending on
market.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
262
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262)
Electronic stability control (p. 264)
Stability system Roll Stability Control
(p. 263)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 338)
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
Cruise Control (p. 276)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 355)
Speed-dependent steering force
Lane assistance (p. 357)
Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
Park Assist* (p. 373)
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When
parking and at low speed steering is light and
requires only a slight effort.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance, the driver display shows a
message as well as a STEERING WHEEL
symbol.
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Radar unit (p. 311)
Camera unit (p. 322)
City Safety™ (p. 326)
BLIS* (p. 339)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions
with steering assistance are not available.
In such a situation, the driver display shows
the Power steering failure or Power
Steering Assist Temporarily Reduced
message, combined with a STEERING
WHEEL symbol.
Change the steering force level*
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading
"Selectable drive modes".
For the car models without a drive mode control
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of
steering force is instead made via the centre display's top view and the following search path:
Settings My Car
Steering force
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
Stability system Roll Stability
Control
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
The stability system RSC1 minimises the risk of
overturning, for example during a sudden evasive
manoeuvre or if the car skids.
The RSC system registers if and how much the
car's lateral inclination changes. This information
is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability control system engages, the engine torque is
reduced and one or more wheels are braked until
the car has regained its stability.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this
must not be taken as a reason to increase
speed. Always follow the normal precautions
for safe driving.
Drive Modes
Steering force selection cannot be accessed during a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
Related information
•
•
•
1
Drive modes* (p. 414)
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Lane assistance (p. 357)
Roll Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 263
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic stability control
Electronic Stability Control (ESC2) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
traction.
The driver display shows this
symbol when the ESC system
is engaged.
WARNING
•
The stability system ESC is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Braking from the ESC system
may be heard as a pulsing
sound, and the car may accelerate more slowly than expected when applying
the throttle.
The ESC system consists of the following subfunctions:
•
•
•
•
Stability function3
Spin control and traction control system
Engine Drag Control
Trailer stability assist
264
Engine Drag Control (EDC4) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
braking when driving in low gear on slippery road
surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*5
Trailer stability assist (TSA6) stabilises a car towing a trailer in situations where they begin snaking. Also see section "Trailer stability assist" for
more information.
Stability function3
NOTE
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin control and traction control system
The function is active at low speed and brakes
the drive wheels that spin so that additional traction shall be transferred from the drive wheels
that are not spinning.
The function also prevents the driving wheels
from spinning against the road surface during
acceleration.
2 Electronic Stability Control
3 Also known as Active Yaw Control.
4 Engine Drag Control
5 Trailer stability assist is included when
6 Trailer Stability Assist
Engine Drag Control
The TSA function is deactivated if ESC Sport
Mode is activated.
Related information
•
Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 265)
•
Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Electronic Stability Control (p. 265)
the Volvo genuine towbar is installed.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control (p. 266)
Sport mode for electronic stability
control
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
•
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control (p. 267)
The ESC7 system is always activated — it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can
select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a
more active driving experience.
The ESC9 system is always activated — it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can
select sport mode, which allows for a more
active driving experience.
The Sport mode is activated/
deactivated in the centre display's function view.
With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction
selected, intervention from ESC is reduced and
the car is allowed to skid more and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver.
When ESC Sport Mode is selected, ESC can be
considered as deactivated, despite helping the
driver in many cases.
–
NOTE
With the ESC Sport Mode function
selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA8) is
deactivated.
ESC Sport Mode also provides maximum traction if the car has become bogged down or is
driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or
deep snow.
Related information
•
•
7
8
9
Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in the
function view.
> Sport mode is activated/deactivated - a
green/grey indicator is displayed in the
button.
The driver display indicates activated
ESC Sport Mode by displaying this
symbol with a constant glow until the
function is deactivated or the engine is
switched off. The next time the engine is started,
the ESC system is back in its normal mode again.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (p. 264)
Electronic stability control (p. 264)
Towbar* (p. 444)
Electronic Stability Control
Trailer Stability Assist
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 265
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitation for sport mode in
Electronic Stability Control
There are certain limitations associated with the
ESC10 system's subfunction ESC Sport Mode
being activated.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the following functions is
activated:
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control
Pilot Assist.
Related information
•
10
266
Electronic stability control (p. 264)
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
A number of symbols and messages regarding
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
Symbol
Message
Specification
Constant glow for
approx. 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow.
Sport mode is selected.
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.
ESC
Temporarily off
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
See the message in the driver display.
ESC
ESC system disengaged.
Service required
•
•
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the
ing the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (p. 264)
267
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed Limiter
: Reduces stored maximum speed
A speed limiter (SL11) can be likened to a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the
speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed limiter.
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
WARNING
•
•
Buttons and symbols for functions12.
: Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maximum
speed
: Increases the stored maximum speed
: From standby mode - activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
•
The Speed Limiter function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver must always pay attention to
traffic conditions and take action if the
Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suitable speed.
The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby mode
11
12
268
Speed Limiter
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Related information
•
•
Limitations for Speed Limiter (p. 272)
Activating and starting the Speed Limiter
(p. 269)
•
Managing speed for the Speed Limiter
(p. 269)
•
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in
standby mode (p. 270)
•
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby
mode (p. 271)
•
•
•
Deactivating the Speed Limiter (p. 271)
Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 272)
Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter
(p. 275)
•
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter
(p. 274)
•
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
Speed Limiter (p. 275)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting the Speed
Limiter
mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Managing speed for the Speed
Limiter
The speed limiter function (SL13) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.
–
The speed limiter (SL14) can be set to different
speeds.
When the speed limiter is in standby mode
symbol is shown - press the
and the
steering wheel button
(2).
> The Speed Limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Set the speed limiter in standby mode
Setting/changing the stored speed
Related information
•
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym(4).
bol/function for speed limiter
> Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter
is set in standby mode.
Start the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter cannot be activated until after
the engine has been started. The lowest maxi13
14
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Change the set speed with short or long
(1) or
presses on steering wheel button
(3):
•
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
}}
269
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and
set it in standby mode
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter (SL15) can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
The speed limiter can also be temporarily deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal
without the speed limiter first having to be set in
standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in
standby mode:
–
15
270
Speed Limiter
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver can
exceed the maximum speed setting.
1.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it to interrupt acceleration when the
desired speed has been reached.
> In this mode, the speed limiter is still activated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2.
Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then braked automatically
below the last stored maximum speed.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
standby mode
–
The speed limiter (SL16) can be reactivated after
having been temporarily deactivated and placed
in standby mode.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply
its current speed as the maximum speed.
Deactivating the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter (SL17) can be deactivated.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
1.
To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby
mode:
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
for speed limiter (4) are switched off which deletes the set/stored maximum
speed.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
again.
> Another function is activated.
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The driver display's speed limit markings
change colour from GREY to WHITE - the
car's speed is then limited again by the
last stored maximum speed.
or
16
17
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
(2)
}}
271
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
Limitations for Speed Limiter
Automatic Speed Limiter
On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s
braking effect may be inadequate and hence the
stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this
case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed
limit exceeded in the driver display.
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL18) function
helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum
speed to the speed shown on the road signs.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Related information
•
18
19
20
272
Automatic Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Road Sign Information – RSI
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
The Speed Limiter function (SL19) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information20 function to
automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
•
•
•
•
The ASL function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the driver display show which speed
limiter function is active:
Symbol
See also the heading "Limitations for
Road Sign Information".
ASL
Meaning
Greenish yellow
ASL is active
Grey
✓
Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect – in
such cases the driver must intervene
him/herself and accelerate or brake to a
suitable speed.
ASL is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
SL
Colour of sign
symbol
✓
Amber/Orange
A
✓
Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is activated.
A
B
ASL has been set in
standby mode
ASL is in temporary standby
mode - e.g. due to a traffic
sign not being read.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the meaning of the symbol's colour.
The ASL symbol
The sign symbol (displayed alongside
the stored speed, "70", in the centre of
the speedometer) can be shown in
three colours with the following meanings:
273
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Automatic
Speed Limiter
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL21)
can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (SL22).
Activate ASL
The Speed Sign Assist button is located in the function
view of the centre display.
To activate the automatic speed limiter:
1.
2.
21
22
274
Press the Speed Sign Assist button.
> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indicator appears on the button, and the
driver display shows a sign symbol in the
centre of the speedometer.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
Automatic Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
NOTE
•
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. In this situation, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted
either - to be able to adjust settings as
well as receive warnings, RSI must be
activated.
Deactivate ASL
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
–
Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in
the function view.
> ASL is deactivated and the button's indication becomes GREY - SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
longer follow the signed speed limit but only
the maximum speed stored in memory.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Changing the tolerance for the
Automatic Speed Limiter
–
The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL23)
can be set for different tolerance levels.
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed
speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a
signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the
driver can instead choose to allow the car to
maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).
Press the steering wheel button
(1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the
speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs
passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign
with a lower or higher speed is passed then the car follows the new signed
speed limit instead and the tolerance is
deleted from the memory.
If the Road Sign Information* function is
activated, the signed speed limit will then
be shown with a RED indicator on the
speedometer.
The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the
speed setting is in the speed limiter.
Limitations for Automatic Speed
Limiter
Automatic speed limitation takes place using
speed information from the RSI25 function - not
from the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
If RSI25 cannot interpret and provide speed information to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
speed.
The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI25 function can once again interpret and provide speed
information to the ASL.
See also the section "Limitations for Road Sign
Information".
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
NOTE
Buttons and symbols for
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
functions24.
Related information
•
23
24
25
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
Automatic Speed Limiter
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Road Sign Information - RSI
* Option/accessory. 275
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise Control
The cruise control (CC26) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed
driving on motorways and long, straight roads in
regular traffic flows.
Overview
: Reduces stored speed
WARNING
Marker for stored speed
•
The cruise control function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate
driving – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
•
Cruise control is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Buttons and symbols for functions27.
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
•
Activating and starting Cruise Control
(p. 277)
: From standby mode - activates cruise
control and stores current speed
•
Managing speed for the Cruise Control
(p. 278)
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
•
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in
standby mode (p. 279)
: Increases the stored speed
26
27
276
Related information
Cruise Control
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Reactivating Cruise Control from standby
mode (p. 279)
Activating and starting Cruise
Control
•
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 280)
The cruise control function (CC28) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.
Activating/starting cruise control
In order to start the Cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must be
30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
To start the cruise control:
–
With the symbol/function
displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise Control starts and the current
speed becomes the stored speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Related information
•
Cruise Control (p. 276)
Set cruise control in standby mode
To set cruise control in standby mode:
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the symbol/function
(4).
> The symbol is shown and the cruise control can then be activated.
28
Cruise Control
277
DRIVER SUPPORT
Managing speed for the Cruise
Control
•
Cruise control (CC29) can be set to different
speeds.
If the driver increases the car's speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
(1), the speed stored will be
the car's speed when the button is depressed,
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
pedal at the moment when the button is
depressed.
Setting/changing the stored speed
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
Change the set speed with short or long
(1) or
presses on steering wheel button
(3):
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less
frequent application of the foot brake. On a
downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable
to start moving a little faster and limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this case the driver
can temporarily disable foot brake application by
Cruise Control.
•
To do so, proceed as follows:
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
•
29
30
278
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (4) has moved to the
desired speed
Cruise Control
See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes".
–
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway
down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses engine
braking only.
Cruise control dependence on drive
mode
The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed
may vary depending on the selected drive
mode30.
Cruise control Eco Cruise
In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelerations and decelerations become smoother compared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and
environmental economy. This can cause the car's
speed to be temporarily above or below the set
speed.
See supplementary information in "ECO drive
mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise".
Cruise control Dynamic Cruise
In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accelerations and decelerations are felt more strongly
and seem more direct compared to other modes.
Related information
•
Cruise Control (p. 276)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it
in standby mode
Cruise control (CC31) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
Deactivate Cruise Control and set in
standby mode
Standby mode on driver intervention
The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode if:
•
•
•
the foot brake is used
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the gear selector is moved to N position
the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer
than 1 minute
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
Cruise control (CC32) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
Reactivating cruise control from
standby mode
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To set cruise control in standby mode:
–
31
32
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver
must then manually control the speed.
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
engine speed is too low/high
To start cruise control from standby mode:
brake temperature is too high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
Related information
•
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the most recently stored speed again.
Cruise Control (p. 276)
}}
279
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
or
Deactivating Cruise Control
To start cruise control from standby mode:
Cruise Control — CC can be deactivated.
–
NOTE
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed.
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Related information
•
Cruise Control (p. 276)
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Cruise Control (p. 276)
Buttons and symbols for functions33.
To deactivate cruise control:
1.
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> Cruise control is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol for cruise con(4) is extinguished - which
trol
deletes the set/stored speed.
3.
33
280
Press the steering wheel button
again.
> Another function is activated.
(2)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive Cruise Control*
(ACC34)
The adaptive cruise control
helps the
driver to maintain an even speed combined with
a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead35.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road
34
35
is clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
WARNING
•
The adaptive cruise control function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
•
The adaptive cruise control is not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used to adjust the speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any
vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain
the speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
•
Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gearbox:
•
The Adaptive cruise control can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
}}
* Option/accessory. 281
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
Overview
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
•
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead.
Controls
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset
time interval
•
The adaptive cruise control does not
brake for humans or animals, and not for
small vehicles such as bicycles and
motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
||
•
Do not use the adaptive cruise control in
demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with
a lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Buttons and symbols for functions35.
: Activates the adaptive cruise control
from standby mode and resumes stored
speed
: Increases the stored speed
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
: From standby mode - activates the
adaptive cruise control and stores current
speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the adaptive cruise control to
standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
35
282
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 285)
•
Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 286)
•
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 287)
•
Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 289)
•
Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control (p. 289)
•
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 290)
•
Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control
(p. 290)
Speed of vehicle ahead.
•
Current speed of your car.
Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 291)
•
Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control
(p. 292)
•
Change between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 292)
•
Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 294)
Driver display
Indication of speeds35.
Stored speed
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise
control".
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk
warning (p. 283)
•
Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 284)
35
36
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Adaptive Cruise Control and
Collision risk warning
Audio and symbol for collision warning36.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
control is capable of and the driver does not
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.
}}
283
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected hence a warning may not be given, or it may
be given with a certain delay.
•
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires.
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
Starting/activating the adaptive cruise
control
Adaptive cruise control (ACC37) must first be
activated and then started if it is to control the
speed and distance.
In order to start the ACC the following requirements apply:
Setting the adaptive cruise control in
standby mode
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Immediately after the engine is started the Adaptive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set
it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as
follows:
–
37
284
Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to
scroll to the symbol/function
(4).
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive
Cruise Control is set in standby mode.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
–
With the symbol/function
(4) displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(1).
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the current speed is stored, which is shown in
figures in the centre of the speedometer.
Managing speed with Adaptive
Cruise Control
–
The adaptive cruise control (ACC38) can be set
to different speeds.
•
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
•
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the
desired speed.
Setting/changing the stored speed
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the ACC when the distance
symbol shows two vehicles.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle).
Change the set speed with short or long
(1) or
presses on steering wheel button
(2):
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model and market.
: Increases the stored speed.
: Reduces stored speed.
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Stored speed.
38
Adaptive Cruise Control
}}
* Option/accessory. 285
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) even though it is capable of following another
vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Manual gearbox
The Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive
cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
•
39
40
286
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Setting time interval for Adaptive
Cruise Control
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC39) can be
set to different time intervals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
Control for time interval40.
The same symbol is also shown when the Distance Warning function is activated.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front
at a pre-set time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary significantly in certain situations in
order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when
the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.
Adaptive Cruise Control
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
•
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
If the adaptive cruise control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase
when activated, it may be because the
time window to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time window.
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Select one of the following options:
• Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead.
• Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set
time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
• Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC41) can be
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the
standby mode and can later be reactivated.
Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and
set it in standby mode
time interval to the vehicle ahead more
closely, which in certain cases may mean
heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sections.
Supplementary information can also be found in
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise control" and "Drive mode ECO".
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Select how ACC shall maintain the
distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain
the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.
41
Adaptive Cruise Control
}}
* Option/accessory. 287
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control
and set it in standby mode:
•
–
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY
and the indication for time interval as well
as the symbol for the target vehicle, if on,
are switched off.
WARNING
•
•
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control
ESC42. If any of the other systems stops working,
the adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of
the short distance by the Distance Warning function instead.
•
•
•
•
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC
is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a
stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
the gear selector is moved to N position.
Electronic Stability Control
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
the driver opens the door.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
engine speed is too low/high.
one or more wheels lose traction.
brake temperature is high.
the parking brake is applied.
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
Reactivating adaptive cruise control
from standby mode
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
the foot brake is used.
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
•
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if:
42
288
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene
and regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
To reactivate ACC from standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
Overtaking assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control
Starting overtaking assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive cruise control (ACC43) can assist the
driver when overtaking other vehicles.
Continuation for Overtaking Assistance
How overtaking assistance works
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
When ACC is following another vehicle and the
driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator44, adaptive cruise
control helps by accelerating the vehicle towards
the vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle
reaches the overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated:
•
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
•
your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
•
the stored ACC speed must be high enough
for overtaking to take place safely.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
–
Use the left direction indicator in a car with
the steering wheel on the left, or the right
direction indicator in a car with the steering
wheel on the right.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
Activate the direction indicator.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Related information
•
43
44
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Adaptive Cruise Control
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory. 289
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for overtaking
assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control
The overtaking assistance function may have limited functionality in certain situations.
WARNING
Changing target with Adaptive
Cruise Control
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is
changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate
to the stored speed.
In combination with automatic gearbox, the
adaptive cruise control (ACC46) has functionality
for change of target at certain speeds.
Change of target
When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change.
•
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
such as if:
•
the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
•
the vehicle ahead slows down before the
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane
•
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down
•
a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by temporarily setting ACC45 in the standby mode.
Related information
•
45
46
290
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When adaptive cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down
for the stationary vehicle.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, such as a speed
bump.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adaptive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic braking with Adaptive
Cruise Control
NOTE
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC47) has a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary.
ACC can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes. After this the parking
brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is
disengaged.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
The parking brake must be released before
the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
–
The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
one of the following ways:
•
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within 6 seconds.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is
set in standby mode. This means that the brakes
are released and the car may start to roll - the
driver must therefore intervene and brake the car
himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is
holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
•
ACC has kept the car stationary for more
than approx. 5 minutes
•
•
the brakes have overheated
the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
This may take place in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
the standby mode.
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations the parking brake is applied
to keep the car stationary.
47
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory. 291
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for Adaptive Cruise
Control
Adaptive cruise control (ACC48) may have limitations in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in
which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
•
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
the car.
Miscellaneous
•
Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
48
292
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Change between Cruise Control
and Adaptive Cruise Control
In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC49)
the driver can change between Cruise Control
(CC50) and ACC.
A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise
control is active:
CC
ACC
A
Cruise control
A
A
Adaptive cruise control
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
Changing from ACC to CC
Proceed as follows:
1.
Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode
using steering wheel button
.
2.
Press the Cruise Control button in the centre display's function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
ACC to
CC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now switched off
and Cruise Control is set to standby
mode.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Press the steering wheel button
.
> Cruise control starts and stores the current speed.
3.
2.
WARNING
from
CC to
ACC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now activated and
set to standby mode.
Switching from ACC to CC means that the
car:
•
no longer maintains a preset time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
•
only follows the stored speed, and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
when necessary.
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
ACC will be activated automatically the next time
the engine is started.
Tap on the Cruise Control button in the
function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREEN to GREY.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
3.
.
Press the steering wheel button
> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores
the current speed, together with the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
Changing from CC to ACC
Proceed as follows:
1.
49
50
Set cruise control to standby mode using the
steering wheel button.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Cruise Control
* Option/accessory. 293
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
Adaptive Cruise Control
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the Adaptive cruise control (ACC51) can be
shown in the driver display.
The previous illustration53 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
follow.
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Here are some examples52.
The previous illustration53 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
51
52
53
294
Adaptive Cruise Control
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbol
Message
Specification
The symbol is WHITE.
The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.
Adaptive cruise
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive cruise
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
The symbol is GREY.
Windscreen sensor
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281)
* Option/accessory. 295
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's side markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
How Pilot Assist works
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for
use on motorways and similar major roads where
it can contribute to more comfortable driving and
a more relaxed driving experience.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans
the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's
side markings on the road surface using the
camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
maintained with automatic speed adjustment
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
the car in the lane.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and the
lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again although the speed and distance control functions remain active.
WARNING
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead and detects side markings54.
Camera and radar unit
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without prior
warning.
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
54
296
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
• GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assistance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
•
•
•
•
The Pilot Assist function is supplementary
driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on each side of
the lane. All other use involves increased
risk of contact with surrounding obstacles
that cannot be detected by the function.
Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, positioned correctly in the lane, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used to adjust
the speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed
smoothly. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This
applies in cases of large speed differences or if
the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking may
come unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in
the same lane at a time interval set by the driver.
If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
then the car will instead maintain the speed set
and stored by the driver. This also takes place if
the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and
exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
•
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gearbox:
•
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h
(87 mph).
WARNING
•
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
•
Pilot Assist does not brake for people,
animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g.
cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as
well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions,
on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or
slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip
roads, or with a trailer connected to the
car.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal components must only be performed at a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Round bends and when the road splits
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should
therefore not await the steering assistance from
Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to
increase his/her own steering input, especially on
bends.
}}
297
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane
splits, the driver should steer towards the desired
lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired
direction.
Overview
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
Controls
▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to
Pilot Assist
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to position the car in between the lane markings and
therefore it is recommended to let the car find
the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a
driving experience as possible. The driver checks
that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and
always has the ability to adjust the position by
making his/her own steering corrections.
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an
appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to
turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise
control.
Function symbol
Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
to vehicles ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
Buttons and symbols for functions54.
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the stored speed and
time interval
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
: Reduces stored speed
54
298
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver display
Indication of speeds54.
•
•
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist (p. 304)
•
Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 306)
•
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist (p. 306)
•
•
•
•
Change the target with Pilot Assist (p. 307)
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 306)
Pilot Assist and Collision risk
warning
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist (p. 307)
Limitations of Pilot Assist (p. 308)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 309)
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead
Current speed of your car
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".
Related information
•
Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning
(p. 299)
•
•
•
Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 300)
54
Managing speed for Pilot Assist (p. 301)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist
(p. 302)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 299
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Collision risk warning
WARNING
Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles
detected by its camera and radar unit – therefore a warning may not occur or be delayed.
•
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist must first be activated and then
started to be able to control speed and distance
and to give steering assistance.
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires!
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Audio and symbol for collision warning55.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's
capacity. If the car needs to be braked more
heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver
that immediate intervention is required.
55
300
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
With the Adaptive cruise control in standby
mode:
1.
2.
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6).
> The
symbol changes to Pilot Assist
in standby mode (8).
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is
stored, which is shown with figures in the
centre of the speedometer.
...or...
Hands on the steering wheel
Managing speed for Pilot Assist
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot
Assist detects that the driver is not holding the
steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively
steer the car via a text message and an acoustic
signal.
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds.
If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is
holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to
standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar.
ted with the steering wheel button
With the Adaptive cruise control started:
–
NOTE
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6).
> Pilot Assist is started.
Pilot Assist steering assistance
is only active when the steering
wheel symbol (2) has changed
from GREY to GREEN.
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle
(1) above the steering wheel symbol.
Setting/changing the stored speed
Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
driver has hands on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model and market.
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
Stored speed
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle).
}}
301
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
–
Change the set speed with short or long
(1) or
presses on steering wheel button
(2):
•
•
•
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the
desired speed.
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0
km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
cannot be selected/stored.
302
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Setting the time interval for Pilot
Assist
Manual gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Pilot Assist can be set with different time intervals.
The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown, there
is no vehicle within a reasonable distance
ahead.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
•
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond
with a speed increase when activated, it
may be because the time window to the
vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
window.
Control for time interval56.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth
and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions.
For example, at low speed, when the distances
become short, Pilot Assist increases the time
interval slightly.
56
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Select one of the following options:
• Eco - Pilot Assist focuses on optimal fuel
economy, which means longer time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
• Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
• Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
more closely, which in certain cases may
mean heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sections.
Supplementary information can also be found in
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise control" and "Drive mode ECO".
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain
the distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made
via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 303
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist
...or...
Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so
that it is set in the standby mode and can be
reactivated later.
–
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3).
> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes
to the Adaptive cruise control in active
mode.
Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
standby mode:
–
304
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
symbol (8) in the driver display changes
colour from WHITE to GREY and the
stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
•
WARNING
•
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and
the car comes too close to a vehicle
ahead, the driver is warned of the short
distance by the Distance Warning function instead.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in
standby mode if:
•
•
•
the foot brake is used.
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the gear selector is moved to N position.
the direction indicators are used for longer
than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When this is no longer the case, steering
assistance is automatically reactivated if the
lane's side markings can still be detected.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g.
stability control/anti-skid ESC57. If any of these
other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is
switched off automatically.
•
•
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
•
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot
Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead
is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
To reactivate Pilot Assist:
–
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
Reactivating Pilot Assist from the
standby mode
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Automatic standby mode may occur if, for example:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
57
the driver opens the door.
brake temperature is high.
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
the parking brake is applied.
engine speed is too low/high.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
one or more wheels lose traction.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
Electronic Stability Control
305
DRIVER SUPPORT
Overtaking assistance with Pilot
Assist
Start overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist
Limitations for overtaking
assistance with Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist can help the driver when overtaking
other vehicles.
Continuation for Overtaking Assistance
The overtaking assistance function may have limited functionality in certain situations.
How overtaking assistance works
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
and the driver indicates the intention to overtake
by activating the direction indicator58, Pilot Assist
helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the
vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle reaches the overtaking lane.
The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated:
•
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
•
your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
•
the stored Pilot Assist speed must be high
enough for overtaking to take place safely.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
–
58
306
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
such as if:
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left direction indicator in a car with
the steering wheel on the left, or the right
direction indicator in a car with the steering
wheel on the right.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Related information
•
Related information
•
When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change.
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
WARNING
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
•
the vehicle ahead slows down before the
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane
•
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down
•
a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by temporarily setting Pilot Assist in the standby mode.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Change the target with Pilot Assist
In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot
Assist has functionality for change of target at
certain speeds.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby
mode:
Change of target
•
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Related information
•
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
instead accelerate to the stored speed.
•
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist has a special brake function in slow
traffic and while stationary.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
–
Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following
way:
•
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle
ahead if it starts moving forward within
6 seconds.
NOTE
Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a
maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and the function is disengaged.
Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
parking brake must be released.
}}
307
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in
standby mode. This means that the brakes are
released and the car may start to roll - the driver
must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position
In certain situations, the parking brake is applied
in order to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
stationary with the foot brake and:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
•
Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 5 minutes
•
•
the brakes have overheated
the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
308
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in
certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help
the driver in many situations. But the driver is at
all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and a correct position in the lane.
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the use of
Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of
such situations may be that:
•
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
•
lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in
the event of multiple sets of markings.
•
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges or
strong shadows.
the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
•
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
the lane contains ridges or holes.
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view with
poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet
road surface etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
•
High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane markings, with a subsequent risk of contact
DRIVER SUPPORT
between the car and such obstacles. The
driver must ensure him/herself that the
car is at a suitable distance from such
obstacles.
•
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming
objects and obstacles in traffic environments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
or objects which completely or partially
block the route.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
The recommended steering input is force
limited, which means that it cannot always
help the driver to steer and keep the car
within the lane.
•
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
be extra attentive and ready to brake.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
load or a trailer is connected to the car.
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Miscellaneous
• Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering is working with reduced power e.g. during cooling due to overheating
(see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The driver always has the possibility of correcting
or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by
Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to
the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262)
}}
* Option/accessory. 309
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Here are some examples59.
The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
59
60
310
The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar unit
The radar unit is used by several driver support
systems and has the task of sensing other vehicles.
Related information
•
•
•
Limitations for radar device (p. 312)
Recommended radar device maintenance
(p. 315)
Type approval for radar device (p. 316)
The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Lane assistance
Pilot Assist*
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
60
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 311
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for radar device
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Blocked unit
The radar unit is placed inside the upper section
of the windscreen together with the car's camera
unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions.
If the driver display shows this symbol
and the message "Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in
front of the car and that the car's camera-based
and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
reduced, completely deactivated or give an incorrect function response.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.61.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
61
312
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cause
Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals
or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera
and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
that drives in between your car and the vehicle ahead.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
Vehicle speed
In bends, the radar unit may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles
ahead is reduced significantly if:
•
the speed of the vehicle ahead is significantly different from that of your own car
Low trailers
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
Low trailer in radar shadow.
The radar unit's field of vision.
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting
vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit
to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver
should therefore be particularly careful when driving behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise
control or Pilot Assist is activated.
}}
313
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the windscreen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
314
•
Damaged windscreen
•
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Radar unit (p. 311)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended radar device
maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
Related information
•
Radar unit (p. 311)
315
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radar device
The type approval for the car's radar units in the
ACC62, PA63 and BLIS64 functions can be read
out here.
Market
ACCA &
PAB
Symbol
Type approval
✓
Botswana
Brazil
BLISC
For BLIS64, the information is also on the Internet: www.hella.com/VCC.
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
✓
62
63
64
316
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
PA = Pilot Assist
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
03563-17-05364
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACCA &
PAB
BLISC
Symbol
Type approval
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR is in compliance with
the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU (RED).
The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following link
www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.
✓
Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz
Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
Europe
Hereby, Hella KgaA Hueck & Co., declares that RS4 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
✓
The Declaration of conformity may be consulted at Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker
Straße 75/ 59552 Lippstadt, Germany and on the website www.hella.com/vcc.
Frequency Band: 24050-24250 MHz
Maximum Output Power: 20 dBm EIRP
Registered No: ER37536/15
✓
The United Arab Emirates (UAE)
Dealer No: DA37380/15
✓
Registered No: ER53878/17
Dealer No: DA44932/15
}}
317
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACCA &
PAB
BLISC
4927
Indonesia
✓
PLG ID: 6051
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
TRC/LPD/2017/63
Certification No.
✓
Lebanon
Certificate number: 50459/SDPPI/2017
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
✓
✓
Korea
Type approval
37295/POSTEL/2014
✓
Jordan
Symbol
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
✓
MSIP-CMM-HLA-RS4
✓
Not available at time of publication.
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Morocco
✓
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
318
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACCA &
PAB
BLISC
✓
Symbol
Type approval
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299
Radar de corto alcance
Mexico
✓
RS4
Hella KGaA Hueck & Co
IFETEL: RLVHERS17-0286
Moldova
✓
✓
Russia
✓
✓
И011 14
✓
Serbia
✓
И011 17
}}
319
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACCA &
PAB
BLISC
✓
Singapore
✓
DA 103238
TA-2014/1824
✓
✓
Taiwan
Type approval
DA 105753
✓
South Africa
Symbol
TA-2016/3407
CCAB15LP0560T3
✓
CCAB17LP0470T5
Delphi і
Ukraine
і
(
2009 .) Д
Delphi.
✓
✓
A
B
C
320
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
PA = Pilot Assist
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
є, щ
і
і
ь
)
і і
і
і
RACAM і
і
(П
ь
і
є
П
і
і
КМ № 679 і 24
і Delphi
і
:
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radio equipment
Market
Europe
Symbol
Type approval
Hereby, Volvo cars,
declares that all radio
equipment's are in compliance with the essential
requirements and other
relevant provisions of
Directive 2014/53/EU.
Related information
•
Radar unit (p. 311)
321
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera unit
The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
Related information
•
•
Limitations for camera unit (p. 323)
Recommended camera device maintenance
(p. 326)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The camera unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
322
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance*
Steering assistance at risk of collision
City Safety
Driver Alert Control*
Road Sign Information*
Active main beam*
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for camera unit
Blocked unit
The camera unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Impaired vision
The camera has limitations similar to the human
eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense
snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms
and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the
functions of camera-dependent systems could be
significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings can also significantly reduce camera function when it is used
to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.65.
If the driver display shows this symbol
and the message "Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in
front of the car and that the car's camera-based
and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
reduced, completely deactivated or give an incorrect function response.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along
with the appropriate action:
The camera unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's
radar unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
65
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
323
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or
covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light
No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
324
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the windscreen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
•
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
DRIVER SUPPORT
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Camera unit (p. 322)
325
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended camera device
maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
City Safety™
City Safety can alert the driver using a visual,
acoustic and brake pulse warning to help
him/her detect pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles that suddenly appear - the car
then attempts to brake automatically unless the
driver acts within a reasonable time him/herself.
NOTE
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as
possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
The driver or passengers are not normally aware
of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation
where a collision is immediately imminent.
Related information
Camera unit (p. 322)
Location of the radar unit66.
City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal,
cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with
a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
66
326
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking procedure, normally stopping the car just behind the
vehicle in front.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
•
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent risk
of collision if the driver does not react in time by
braking and/or swerving.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Safety to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links for all subsections).
WARNING
•
The City Safety is supplementary driver
support intended to improve driving safety
– it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The City Safety auto-brake function can
prevent a collision or reduce collision
speed, but to ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the
brake pedal – even when the car autobrakes.
•
•
The warning is only activated if there is a
high risk of collision – you must therefore
never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h
(50 mph).
•
City Safety does not activates any autobrake functions in the event of heavy
acceleration.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City
Related information
•
Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety
(p. 327)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 329)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 330)
•
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 332)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 333)
•
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 334)
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic
(p. 333)
Messages for City Safety (p. 337)
Parameters and subfunctions for
City Safety
City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a
cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by
reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake
function.
If the speed difference is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake
function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates
the consequences of it.
Vehicles
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the
speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
cyclists
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by
up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by
up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by
up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primarily
intended to reduce the force of the impact at
higher speeds and is most effective at speeds
above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at
lower speed.
}}
327
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Subfunctions for City Safety
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
Function overview67.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
City Safety carries out three steps in the following order:
1.
Collision warning
2.
Brake support
3.
Auto Brake
The following text explains what happens during
the three steps:
67
328
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle (including
vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross
traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by
means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning. There is no brake pulse warning at lower
speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration.
The brake pulse frequency varies according to
the car's speed.
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
tensioner may also be activated. For more information see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may
begin with light braking and then progress to full
brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object, the car remains stationary in
anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the
car has been braked to avoid collision with a
slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to
match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to
depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
to the effect that the function is/has been active.
WARNING
City Safety must not be used by the driver to
change his/her driving style - the driver must
not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do
the braking.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 326)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a
warning at a later stage.
City Safety is always activated but the driver can
select the warning distance for the function.
The Late warning distance should therefore only
be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when the
engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/electric
operation is switched off.
WARNING
•
The warning distance determines the sensitivity
of the system and regulates the distance at
which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning
should be deployed.
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, animals or vehicles - this
may cause severe damage and injury and
risk lives.
•
City Safety warns the driver when there is
a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten
the driver’s reaction time.
To select warning distance:
•
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Early warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily.
•
With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in advance.
This may mean that the warnings come
more frequently than at the warning distance Normal, but it is recommended
since it can make City Safety more effective.
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Under City Safety Warning, select Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
If the Early setting produces too many warnings,
which could be perceived as irritating in certain
situations, the Normal or Late warning distance
can be selected.
When warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing, the warning distance can be
reduced, which reduces the total number of
}}
329
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 326)
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detects most vehicles that are either
stationary or moving in the same direction as your
car, as well as vehicles described in the "City
Safety in cross traffic" section.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
Cyclists
bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations
and, for example, cannot see:
•
•
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body and
330
partially obscured cyclists.
cyclists if the background contrast of the
cyclist is poor – warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at
all.
•
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pedestrians
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
Large animals
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).
•
pedestrians if the background contrast of
the pedestrians is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body outlines.
For optimal performance, the system function
that detects pedestrians must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline,
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may
either be detected late or not at all, which may
mean that warnings and braking are late or omitted.
•
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with
clear body outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and
horse) must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the animal directly from the side in
combination with what is a normal pattern of
movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
the animal.
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
}}
331
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
•
•
partially obscured large animals.
•
•
large animals that run or move quickly.
•
small animals such as dogs and cats, for
example.
the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on.
WARNING
large animals if the background contrast
of the animals is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
Related information
City Safety™ (p. 326)
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming
crossing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on
a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first
enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse
the situation.
The following further criteria must also be fulfilled:
332
•
City Safety can help the driver when turning and
crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at
an intersection.
•
The "City Safety in crossing traffic" function is supplementary driver support
intended to improve driving safety – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Warnings and brake interventions due to
a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle
often come very late.
•
Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
larger animals seen from the front or from
behind.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
•
City Safety in cross traffic
•
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
•
your car must turn to the left in markets with
right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand
traffic)
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 326)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due to
oncoming cross traffic.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by
automatically braking the car earlier when it is
not possible to avoid a collision by only steering
away.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 326)
Examples are:
•
stability control ESC intervenes in the event
of slippery driving conditions
•
•
if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late
•
if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off
•
if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpredictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by something
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/herself
}}
333
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a
steering manoeuvre.
Limitations for City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive
manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an
adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
by automatically starting to brake at an earlier
stage.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
WARNING
•
The ability of City Safety to be able to
predict a specific situation is supplementary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 326)
Limitations of City Safety
The City Safety function may have limitations in
certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the
anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC68
will give the best possible braking force with
maintained stability.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being
worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
68
334
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehicles in some situations cannot be detected, or
they are detected later than anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others
and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late
or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City
Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large
animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of
the car. This means that the functionality of City
Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to
keep the area of windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit clear.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system therefore does not intervene in situations where your
car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly,
e.g. when parking.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety does not intervene or postpone
warning/intervention in situations where the
driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore
delay a collision warning and intervention in order
to minimise unnecessary warnings.
Miscellaneous
WARNING
•
Warnings and brake interventions could
be implemented late or not at all if a traffic situation or external influences mean
that the camera and radar unit cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals
or vehicles correctly.
•
For vehicles to be detected at night, their
headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be
switched on and shining clearly.
•
The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions as long as the
relative speed is below 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for
large animals is less than 15 km/h
(9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The
warning and brake intervention for large
animals is less effective at lower speeds.
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles and large animals could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
components must only be performed by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Driver intervention
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
}}
335
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h
(50 mph).
Search path in the top view of the centre display:
•
Do not place, stick or mount anything on
the outside or inside of the windscreen in
front of or around the camera and radar
unit — this can interfere with cameradependent functions.
•
•
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give incorrect function response.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
Safety does not appear in the centre display's
Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
336
•
Settings
My Car
Related information
City Safety™ (p. 326)
IntelliSafe
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message
Specification
City Safety
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated
in connection with a text message being shown.
Automatic intervention
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service
required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 326)
337
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle
approaching from behind.
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle
approaching from behind that a collision is imminent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW
function detects that the car is in danger of being
hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may tension the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash
Protection System safety system.
Immediately before a collision from behind, RCW
may also activate the foot brake in order to
reduce the forward acceleration of the car during
the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the car is stationary. The foot brake releases immediately if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Related information
•
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning
(p. 338)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Limitations of Rear Collision
Warning
In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty
helping the driver in the event of a collision risk.
This can be, for example, if:
•
the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
•
the vehicle approaching from behind
changes lane at the last moment
•
the vehicle approaching from behind has a
speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph)
•
a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected
to the car's electrical system - the RCW
function is then deactivated automatically.
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due to
local traffic regulations - in such cases, this
part of the function is deactivated.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
338
Related information
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 338)
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS*
from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
BLIS69
The
function is intended to help the
driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to
the side of the car so as to provide assistance in
heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the
same direction.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
•
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
right lanes closest to the car.
WARNING
Principle of BLIS
•
The BLIS function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The responsibility for changing lanes
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
•
BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
•
•
Location of BLIS lamp70.
Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's function view.
69
70
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching your
car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side
illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as
the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
Blind Spot Information Systems
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 339
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
•
Activate/deactivate BLIS (p. 340)
•
Messages for BLIS (p. 343)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 341)
Activate/deactivate BLIS
The BLIS71 function can be activated/deactivated.
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
(p. 341)
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator
lights will then be illuminated.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 339)
Location of BLIS lamp72.
Indicator lamp
–
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's function view.
Tap on the BLIS button in the function view.
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/
grey indicator is shown in the button.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
71
72
340
Blind Spot Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of BLIS
WARNING
The BLIS73 function may have limitations in certain situations.
•
•
BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
Related information
•
Recommended maintenance for
BLIS
• To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
BLIS* (p. 339)
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car74.
Examples of limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
•
The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system.
•
For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
73
74
75
Blind Spot Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car75.
The sensors for BLIS are located inside each
corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) and
Rear Collision Warning functions.
}}
* Option/accessory. 341
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
342
BLIS* (p. 339)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 345)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 346)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 348)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 338)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for BLIS
A number of messages regarding BLIS76 can be
shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
76
BLIS* (p. 339)
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 343
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cross Traffic Alert*
with auto-brake is a driver support that
supplements BLIS78 and is designed to help the
driver detect traffic crossing behind the car
when it is reversing. The auto-brake subfunction can stop the car in the event of a risk of collision with an unobserved vehicle.
CTA77
CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if
reverse gear has been selected.
If CTA senses that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
•
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to
the direction from which the object
approaches.
•
an illuminated icon in the PAS79 graphic on
the screen.
•
an icon on the Park assist camera top view.
Principle of CTA.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the
approach of crossing traffic during reversing,
such as when reversing out of a parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
77
78
79
80
344
auto-brake function takes effect to stop the
car, after which the driver display shows an
explanatory text message on why the car was
braked.
Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS79 graphic on the
screen80.
•
If the driver does not observe the warning
from CTA and a collision is unavoidable, the
WARNING
•
The Cross Traffic Alert function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The auto-brake subfunction can only
detect and brake for other vehicles that
are moving - not for stationary obstacles,
a cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
•
The responsibility for reversing the car
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
•
Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Cross Traffic Alert
Blind Spot Information
Park Assist System: Parking assistance system with reversing sensors
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
•
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 345)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 346)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 348)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
Alert
The driver can select to switch off the warning
in the function CTA81 - subfunction auto brake
cannot be switched off and continues to be
active. Proceed as follows:
Press the Cross Traffic Alert
button in the centre display
function view.
•
GREY button indication - warning signal and
indication on display for CTA is deactivated.
•
GREEN button indication - CTA is activated.
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
The CTA82 function with auto-brake may have
limited functionality in certain situations.
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations
but has some limitations. For example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing obstacles.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
CTA is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
81
82
Cross Traffic Alert
Cross Traffic Alert
}}
* Option/accessory. 345
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
•
For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
• To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind”
on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it
makes with the obstructing vehicle/object
changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
Examples of further limitations
• The auto-brake subfunction only detects
moving vehicles and therefore cannot "see"
and brake for stationary obstacles, a cyclist
or a pedestrian, for example.
•
83
346
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car83.
The sensors for CTA are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
See the supplementary information in the
section "Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert".
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
also used by the BLIS84 and Rear Collision
Warning functions.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
84
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)
BLIS* (p. 339)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 338)
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 347
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert
A number of messages regarding CTA85 with
auto-brake can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
85
348
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344)
Cross Traffic Alert
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information*
NOTE
(RSI86)
The Road Sign Information function
helps the driver to observe speed-related road
signs and certain prohibition signs as the car
passes them.
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation.
WARNING
Examples of readable signs87.
RSI provides information about such things as
current speed, when a motorway or road is starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or
when the direction of travel is one-way.
If both a sign for motorway/dual carriageway and
a sign for the speed limit are passed at the same
time, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for
motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit
is shown directly with a line in the driver display's
speed scale.
86
87
•
The Road Sign Information function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 352)
•
Activating/deactivating Speed warning in
Road Sign Information (p. 353)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information (p. 354)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information
(p. 354)
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information (p. 350)
•
Road Sign Information and sign display
(p. 350)
•
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation (p. 352)
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory. 349
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information function is selectable
- the driver can select On or Off.
Press the Road Sign
Information button in the centre display function view.
•
•
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
Road Sign Information and sign
display
The Road Sign Information function (RSI88) registers and shows road signs in different ways
depending on the sign and the situation.
GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.
GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.
NOTE
•
350
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. In this situation, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted
either - to be able to adjust settings as
well as receive warnings, RSI must be
activated.
Example89 of detected speed information.
When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed
speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a
symbol in combination with a RED indication on
the speedometer.
An additional89 sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be shown
together with the speed limit
symbol.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign at
the roadside, the symbol for
this sign89 flashes on and off
on the driver display as a warning.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation
then information from the map is also used to
determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when
driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Road
Sign Audio Warning function is activated - see
the heading "Activating/deactivating the acoustic
warning" in the section "Activating/deactivating
Road Sign Information".
Speed limit or end of motorway
When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign"
stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at
the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with
the corresponding road sign in the driver's display.
End of all restrictions.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
about 5 minutes and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Additional signs
End of motorway.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Changed speed limit
Examples of additional signs89.
When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for
the same road - an additional sign then indicates
the circumstances under which the different
speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog,
for example.
Example of direct speed limit
sign89.
Example of indirect speed limit sign89:
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system and you pass a speed sign with the addi-
88
89
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
}}
351
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
tional sign “trailer”, the indicated speed will
appear on the driver display.
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driver's
attention is drawn to this fact
by means of a symbol for an
additional sign below the speed
symbol. The additional symbol
in the driver display will show either “DIST” or
“TIME”.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for
RSI91 is selectable - the driver can select On or
Off.
Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the
speed limit in force or the set "speed limit" is
exceeded - after the warning has been repeated
one extra time if the driver does not reduce
speed.
•
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriageway and city limit signs.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new
sign has been detected.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's speed
symbol89 means that the RSI
has detected an additional sign
with supplementary information
for the current speed limit.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation.
NOTE
Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
If the warning sign89 for
"School" or "Children at play"
is included in the satellite navigator's map data90, the driver
display shows a sign of this
type.
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for speedrelated information.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
Related information
•
89
90
91
352
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
Only in cars with Sensus Navigation.
Road Sign Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The speed warning is given by
the driver display symbol92
showing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this speed
is exceeded.
A speed warning is always
given if the speed limit is
exceeded in connection with
speed camera information.
Note that the function does not
give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment when
the driver display shows the
speed camera symbol.
Acoustic warning On/Off
It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning
in connection with Speed Warning.
Select limit for speed warning as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
3.
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by pressing the up/down arrows on the screen.
92
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is activated as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning
to activate/switch off the acoustic warning.
Settings
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a
higher speed than the signed speed.
Activating/deactivating Speed
warning in Road Sign Information
With the Road Sign Audio Warning function
activated, the driver is also warned when driving
towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
(see description for "selecting speed
limit" in section "Road Sign Information
with Speed warning and Settings")
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 352)
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example.
* Option/accessory. 353
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information
A car equipped with RSI93 and Sensus
Navigation* can provide information on an
upcoming speed camera in the driver display.
"Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and
Settings" and "Road Sign Information limitations".
NOTE
•
•
Speed camera information in the driver display94.
If the car exceeds a detected
speed limit with the Speed
warning function activated, a
speed warning is given when
the car approaches a speed
camera, provided that the navigation map for the area in
question contains information on speed cameras.
To get an acoustic warning if you exceed
the required speed, the Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and
the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic
warning is then given if the car's speed
exceeds the speed indicated by the RSI
function in the driver display.
Information about speed cameras on the
navigation map is not available for all
markets/areas.
Related information
•
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 352)
Limitations of Road Sign Information
(p. 354)
Limitations of Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information (RSI95) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
Faded signs
•
signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt
•
digital road maps96 are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information97.
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
signs
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types of
bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show incorrect speed information.
For more information about Speed warnings in
connection with speed cameras - see section
93
94
354
Road Sign Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 349)
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to help make the driver aware that he
or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if
the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
the road with the driver’s steering wheel movements.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
When driving behaviour starts
to become inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this symbol
in the driver display, together
with the text message Time
for a break soon?.
If driving behaviour does not improve but
becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is
alerted by the same symbol in the driver display,
combined with an acoustic signal and the text
message Time to take a break.
A camera detects the edge markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the alignment of
95
96
97
Road Sign Information
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
If the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated
in Sensus Navigation*, suggestions for a suitable
}}
* Option/accessory. 355
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
location for a break are also shown with the
Time to take a break warning.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often
not aware of his/her own condition.
The warnings are repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved.
WARNING
•
•
•
356
The Driver Alert Control function is supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
Driver Alert Control should not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should instead plan for breaks at regular
intervals and make sure they are well
rested.
Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert
Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be
activated/deactivated.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
On/Off
•
To change settings in DAC:
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
Related information
•
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
(p. 356)
•
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
warning with Driver Alert Control (p. 357)
•
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 357)
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select My Car
Control.
3.
Select/deselect Alertness Warning to activate/deactivate DAC.
IntelliSafe
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 355)
Driver Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning with Driver Alert
Control
It is possible to set whether the Rest Stop
Guidance function should be activated/deactivated.
With the guide activated, an automatic suggestion for an appropriate rest area is displayed
while DAC issues a warning.
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
Lane assistance
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA98) is
to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car
accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways
and similar major routes.
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
•
•
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
To select Rest Stop Guidance:
1.
WARNING
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select My Car
Control.
IntelliSafe
3.
Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function.
In some cases, driving behaviour is not affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using
the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the
driver not getting a warning from DAC.
Driver Alert
It is therefore important to always stop and
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue,
whether the DAC function ha given a warning
or not.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the
steering wheel.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
in which case it goes into standby mode. The
function becomes available again when the road
is wide enough.
Driver Alert Control (p. 355)
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 355)
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
98
Lane Keeping Aid
}}
357
DRIVER SUPPORT
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
||
• Assist100 activated: When the car is
WARNING
•
The Lane Keeping Aid function is supplementary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
approaching a lane line, LKA will actively
steer the car back into its lane by applying a
slight torque to the steering wheel.
• Warning100 activated: If the car is about to
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by
means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
NOTE
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
When a direction indicator is switched on,
there are no steering corrections or alerts
from Lane assistance.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations99.
99 The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.
100See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
358
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance does not intervene
•
Lane assistance symbols in the driver display
(p. 364)
Steering assistance with lane
assistance
For steering assistance LKA101 to function, the
driver’s hands must be on the steering wheel.
The system monitors this continuously.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, the driver display shows
this symbol combined with a
message, which prompts the
driver to actively steer the car:
• Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with either
steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when
using the direction indicators or cutting bends.
If the driver does not then start to steer, the symbol is shown again, combined with a warning
sound and this message:
• Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering
applied
•
Steering assistance with lane assistance
(p. 359)
If the driver then still does not follow the prompt
to start steering, LKA101 is set in standby mode the function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again.
•
•
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 360)
Related information
•
Select assistance option for lane assistance
(p. 360)
•
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 362)
Related information
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 360)
101Lane
•
Lane assistance (p. 357)
Keeping Aid
359
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping
Aid
Select assistance option for lane
assistance
The lane assistance LKA102 function is selectable - the driver can select On or Off.
The driver can select how LKA103 should react if
the car leaves its lane.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
On/Off
Press the Lane Keeping Aid
button in the centre display
function view.
2.
In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how LKA should react:
• Assist - the driver is given steering assistance without a warning.
•
•
GREEN button indication - LKA is activated.
and steering assistance.
• Warning — warning to driver only.
GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated.
Related information
•
• Both - the driver is given both a warning
Lane assistance (p. 357)
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 357)
Limitations of Lane assistance
In certain demanding conditions Lane assistance may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to
switch off this function.
Examples of such conditions are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
winter road conditions
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side markings
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
102Lane
103Lane
360
Keeping Aid
Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
Lane assistance (p. 357)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262)
361
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Lane assistance LKA104 can be shown on the
driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver support system
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
Lane Keeping Aid
Standby until steering applied
104Lane
362
Keeping Aid
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on
the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
DRIVER SUPPORT
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the
ing the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 357)
363
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance symbols in the
driver display
Unavailable
Lane assistance LKA105 is visualised by symbols
in the driver display depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Available
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines,
the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the symbol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is giving a warning and/or attempting to steer the car
back into the lane.
105Lane
364
Keeping Aid
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 357)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
•
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 366)
The Collision avoidance assistance function
is designed to help the driver reduce the risk of
the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively
steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving.
•
Steering assistance level in the event of a
run-off risk (p. 367)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of run-off risk (p. 367)
•
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of running off the road (p. 368)
The Collision avoidance assistance function
consists of two subfunctions:
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 369)
•
•
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a risk of a head-on collision
(p. 370)
•
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of head-on collision (p. 370)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision
risk
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
• Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how much
the car should steer – the car can never take
command.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a collision risk (p. 365)
•
Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision (p. 372)
}}
365
DRIVER SUPPORT
Shift between On and Off
using this button in the centre
display's function view.
||
During subsequent engine
starting, the function is automatically106 reactivated or it follows settings made in the remote control key, if it
has an activated driver profile106 (see section
"Driver profiles").
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of road departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
106These
366
options are market-dependent.
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" subfunction is supplementary
driver support intended to improve driving
safety – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The function is active within the speed range
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
•
The function cannot detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the
road.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to leave
the side of the road, the car is steered back onto
the road and if the steering intervention is not
enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also activated.
•
"Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
The subfunction's task is to help the driver
reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the
road by actively steering the car back onto the
road.
However, the function does not intervene with
either steering assistance or brake intervention if
the direction indicators are used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the
car, activation of the function will be delayed.
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
• Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance level in the
event of a run-off risk
Steering assistance with brake intervention
The function has two activation levels on intervention:
• Steering assistance only
•
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Shift between On and Off
using this button in the centre
display's function view.
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Steering assistance only
Intervention with steering assistance and braking.
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depending
on the situation at the time of road run-off.
Intervention with steering assistance.
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of run-off
risk
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
During subsequent engine
starting, the function is automatically107 reactivated or it follows settings made in the remote control key, if it
has an activated driver profile107 (see section
"Driver profiles").
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of road departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
107These
options are market-dependent.
}}
367
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of running off the road
In certain demanding conditions the function
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In
such cases it is recommended to switch off this
function.
Examples of such conditions are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side markings
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
368
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is drifting into the
oncoming lane.
However, the function does not intervene with
steering assistance if the direction indicator is
used. And if the function detects that the driver is
actively driving the car, activation of the function
will be delayed.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
• Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
WARNING
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of
oncoming collision" subfunction is supplementary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Your car
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an
oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same
time, the function can help the driver to steer the
car back into its own lane.
369
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a risk of a
head-on collision
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Shift between On and Off
using this button in the centre
display's function view.
During subsequent engine
starting, the function is automatically108 reactivated or it follows settings made in the remote control key, if it
has an activated driver profile108 (see section
"Driver profiles").
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of head-on collision
In certain situations the function may have limited functionality and fail to intervene in the following cases, for example:
• for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
•
on roads where the lane does not have clear
lane markings
•
if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of road departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
108These
370
options are market-dependent.
Other demanding situations can include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function may
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
DRIVER SUPPORT
cases it is recommended to switch off this function.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262)
371
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance upon risk of collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the function can be shown on the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
Collision avoidance assistance
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system
has been activated.
Automatic intervention
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
372
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 365)
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist*
The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the
driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the distance to obstacles through acoustic signals combined with a graphic in the centre
display.
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind is also active when the car is stationary.
WARNING
At a distance within 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant and the active sensor's field closest to the
car symbol is filled.
The volume of the parking assistance signal can
be adjusted while the signal is sounding by
means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top
view's Settings menu option.
NOTE
•
Acoustic warnings are only given for
objects directly on the vehicle's route.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
•
The Park Assist function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
•
The Park Assist system is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
The centre display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacles.
Related information
The highlighted sector indicates the location of
the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance
between the car and detected obstacle.
•
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
sides (p. 374)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
(p. 375)
•
•
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 375)
•
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot
(p. 377)
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance (p. 376)
* Option/accessory. 373
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides
Park Assist Pilot has different parameters
depending on which part of the car is approaching an obstacle.
Backwards
NOTE
Forwards
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The front parking assistance sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started.
The front sensors are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or when
the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres
( 5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking
assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
374
The measuring range starts approx. 80 cm
(2.5 ft) in front of the car.
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm (1 ft)
from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles
on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 373)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
Pilot
The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/
deactivated.
On/Off
The front and side parking assistance sensors
are activated automatically when the engine is
started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls
backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.
The function is activated/deactivated in function view in the
centre display.
–
Tap on the Park Assist button in the function view.
> Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated,
a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in
the button.
Limitations of Parking assistance
The Parking Assistance System cannot detect
everything in all situations and may therefore
have limited functionality in some cases.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obstacles.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera, Park
Assist Pilot can also be activated/deactivated
from the relevant camera view.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 373)
}}
* Option/accessory. 375
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
•
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car.
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
For the Park Assist Pilot function to work optimally, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with
water and car shampoo.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 373)
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
Location of the parking sensors109.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies
that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
noises from motorcycles, etc.
109NOTE:
376
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 373)
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can
be shown in the driver display and/or the centre
display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for
obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 373)
* Option/accessory. 377
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera*
The park assist camera can assist the driver
when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating
obstacles with a camera image and graphics in
the centre display.
The parking assistance camera is a support function which is activated automatically when reverse
gear is selected or manually via the centre display.
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
WARNING
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar
park assist line*112
•
The parking camera function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The parking cameras have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
•
Objects/obstacles on the display screen
may be closer to the car than they appear
to be on the screen.
•
The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic
Alert
Example of camera view110.
Zoom111 - zoom in/out
360° view* - activates/deactivates all cameras
PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking
Assistance System
110The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car
111The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
112Not available on all markets.
378
Related information
•
•
•
Parking cameras' camera views (p. 379)
Park assist lines for parking camera (p. 381)
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera (p. 383)
model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
•
•
Starting the park assist camera (p. 383)
Parking cameras' camera views
Limitations for park assist camera (p. 384)
The function can display a composite 360° view
and separate views for each of the four cameras:
rear, front, left or right camera view.
Recommended parking camera maintenance
(p. 385)
•
Recommended parking camera maintenance
(p. 385)
•
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera (p. 386)
360° view*
A camera symbol on the centre
display's car symbol indicates
which of the cameras is active.
If the car is also equipped with
Park Assist System* then
distance to detected obstacles
is illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see the section "Starting the Park
assist camera".
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approximate coverage area.
The 360° view function activates all parking
cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are
shown simultaneously in the centre display, which
helps the driver to observe what is around the car
when manoeuvring at slow speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can be
activated separately:
•
Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface in
front of/above the front camera.
}}
* Option/accessory. 379
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Backwards
Forwards
The sides
The backwards-facing camera113 is fitted above the registration plate.
The forwards parking camera114 is located in the grille.
The side cameras114 are positioned in each door mirror.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road
with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there
are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front
camera is switched off.
The side cameras can show what is along each
side of the car.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide area
behind the car. For certain models, part of the
bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in
some cases.
Objects shown in the centre display may appear
slightly tilted — this is normal.
113NOTE:
114NOTE:
380
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and
the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
1 minute after the forward-facing camera has
been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist lines for parking camera
The Park assist cameras indicate the position of
the car in relation to its surroundings by displaying lines on the screen.
reversing into tight spaces and when connecting
a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and respond
directly to steering wheel movements, showing
the driver the path the car will take - also when
the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the park
assist lines on the display show the route
the car will take – not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically to
the car's electrical system.
•
Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
IMPORTANT
•
Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only displays
the area behind the car. Be aware of the
sides and front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse.
•
The same applies vice versa - note what
happens to the rear parts of the car when
the front camera view is selected.
•
Note that the park assist lines show the
shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something when
the steering wheel is turned when driving
forward or that the front sweeps against/
over something when the steering wheel
is turned when reversing.
Example115 of park assist lines.
Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
115The
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
381
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Park assist lines in 360° view*
Towbar assist line*
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing the
towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
1.
Press Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar
cannot be shown at the same time.
2.
360° view with park assist lines115.
Related information
With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown
behind, in front of and at the side of the car
(depending on the direction of travel):
•
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
When driving forwards: Front lines
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park
assist lines appear regardless of the car's direction of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing.
115The
382
Press Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
Towbar with park assist line115.
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot
for parking camera
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
The fields for the front and reversing sensors
change colour as the distance to the obstacle
decreases — from yellow through orange to red.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
Colours of front and
reversing fields
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow
0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9)
Orange
0,4-0,6 (1,3-2,0)
Red
0-0,4 (0-1,3)
Sensor field to the sides
The side fields are only shown in orange.
Colour of side fields
Distance in metres
(feet)
Orange
0-0,3 (0-1,0)
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
Starting the park assist camera
The park assist camera starts automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or manually with
one of the centre display's function buttons.
Camera view when reversing
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
the 360° view if it or any of the side views was
the last used camera view, otherwise the rear
view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera start
Start the parking camera with
this button in the centre display's function view.
The screen then initially shows
the last used camera view.
However, after each engine
start, the previously shown side view is replaced
by the 360° view and the previously shown
zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph)
to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates automatically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed
has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car
symbol116.
116The
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and not reactivated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 383
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
Limitations for park assist camera
Blind sectors
The park assist camera cannot detect everything
in all situations and may therefore have limited
functionality.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of the park assist camera's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obstacles.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on
the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view.
384
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
vision.
In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
the gaps between the individual cameras.
WARNING
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, a relatively large sector
could be hidden from view. An obstacle could
thereby go undetected until the car is very
close to it.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black and
contains this symbol then it
means that the camera is out
of order.
The following illustration shows
an example.
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in
reduced image quality.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
Recommended parking camera
maintenance
The parking cameras positioned beside the rear
number plate holder, in the grille and in both
door mirrors need a certain amount of maintenance.
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
Black camera sector
A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for
defective camera:
•
•
•
open door
open tailgate
folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
* Option/accessory. 385
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display.
The following table shows examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and
field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning
needed
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
386
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 378)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot*
NOTE
(PAP117)
Park Assist Pilot
helps the driver to
park in or leave a parking space.
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
PAP first checks if a space is large enough and if
so steers the car into the space.
•
•
The centre display indicates with symbols, graphics and text the various operations to be carried
out and when to do so.
WARNING
•
•
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
117Park
118Park
Assist Pilot
Assist Pilot
keep a close watch around the car
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot
Park Assist Pilot PAP118 can be used for the following different parking situations.
follow the instructions in the centre display
•
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
•
•
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Related information
•
•
•
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 387)
Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 388)
Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 391)
•
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 392)
•
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 394)
Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance (p. 393)
}}
* Option/accessory. 387
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Parallel parking
Perpendicular parking
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
Park Assist Pilot (PAP119) helps the driver park
via three steps. The function can also help the
driver to leave a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
•
•
The principal of parallel parking.
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the following steps:
The PAP function parks the car using the following steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2.
The car is reversed into the space.
2.
3.
The car is positioned in the space by means
of driving forward/backward.
The car is reversed into the space and then
positioned in the space by means of driving
forward/backward.
Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the
parking space - see the heading "Leaving a parking space" in the section "Parking with Park
Assist Pilot".
NOTE
A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assisted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a
parking space - the function must only be
used for a parallel-parked car.
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the centre display
•
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
•
•
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the centre display's screen when the different steps are
to be performed.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
met once the engine has been started:
•
•
No trailer is attached to the car
Speed must be lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Related information
•
119Park
388
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft)
while PAP is searching for a parking space.
2.
Tap on the Park In button in the function
view or in the camera view.
> PAP searches for a parking space and
checks whether it is big enough.
3.
Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre display
state that a suitable parking space has been
found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
Parking
PAP parks the car using the following steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2.
The car is reversed into the space.
3.
The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear.
Principle for parallel parking.
NOTE
Finding and measuring parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's function
view.
PAP searches the area for parking, displays
instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
•
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
Principle for perpendicular parking.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Drive at a maximum of 30 km/h (20 mph)
before parallel or perpendicular parking.
}}
389
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Reversing in to the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Perform the following to reverse the car into the
parking space:
1.
Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2.
Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is activated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
•
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
Positioning the car in the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Proceed as follows:
1.
390
Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward.
DRIVER SUPPORT
2.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
3.
Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards.
4.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
The function is deactivated automatically and the
graphics and message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine
whether the car is properly parked.
Leaving a car park with Park Assist
Pilot
mum steering angle in order to leave the parking
space.
The function Park Out can also help the driver
to leave a parking space.
If PAP considers that the driver can leave the
parking space without any extra manoeuvring
then the function will be stopped, even if the
driver may consider that the car is still in the
parking space.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out
function must only be used for a parallelparked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's
function view or in the camera
view.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
Proceed as follows:
1.
Tap on the Park Out button in the function
view or in the camera view.
2.
Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
3.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display - follow the instructions in the same
way as for the parking procedure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when
the function is completed - the driver may then
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi-
* Option/accessory. 391
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
PAP120
The Park Assist Pilot
function cannot
detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality.
WARNING
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
•
•
if the driver moves the steering wheel
•
if the driver presses Cancel in the centre
display
•
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a
wheel loses grip on a slippery road
if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h
(4 mph)
•
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
•
Objects situated higher than the sensor
detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early – such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
Where applicable, a message in the centre display states the reason for a parking sequence
being discontinued.
•
•
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
120Park
392
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
to find parking spaces - one reason for this
may be the fact that there is interference with
the sensors from external sound sources
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an
aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step.
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
There are also a few details to bear in mind while
parking, e.g.:
•
The driver is always responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is
suitable for parking.
•
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
from the car.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
During the search and check-measurement
of the parking space, PAP may miss objects
positioned deep in the parking space.
•
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for
manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
•
•
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the
potential parking spaces when PAP measures the space.
IMPORTANT
PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles
already parked nearby - if they are inappropriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb.
•
Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed
or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
protruding more than other parked cars.
121"Approved
For the Park Assist Pilot PAP122 function to work
optimally, the parking assistance sensors must
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
Changing to another approved wheel rim
and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
tyre circumference, which means that the
PAP system's parameters may then need to
be updated. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262)
Use approved tyres121 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
park the car.
•
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
Location of the parking sensors123.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory. 393
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot PAP124 can be
shown in the driver display and/or the centre display.
The following table shows examples.
Message
Specification
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387)
122Park Assist Pilot
123NOTE: The illustration
124Park Assist Pilot
394
is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
The car is started using the start button beside
the steering wheel when the remote control key
is in the passenger compartment.
Start button location.
WARNING
Before starting:
1
396
•
•
Fasten the seatbelt.
•
Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since it is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive start).
To start the car:
1.
The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the option for
keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key
can be anywhere in the car.
2.
Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For
cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure
that the gear lever is in neutral position or
that the clutch pedal is depressed.
3.
Press the start button.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers.
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mirrors.
Backup reader's location.
If the Car key not found message is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the remote
control key by the backup reader. Then try to start
the car again.
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned by
the backup reader, make sure that there are
no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile
phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several
car keys close to one another by the backup
reader may cause interference with each
other.
If the car is moving, the engine can be started simply by pressing the button.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
Switching off the car
•
The car is switched off using the start button
beside the steering wheel.
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 443)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 399)
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition position 0 - especially if there are children in the
car.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Switching off the car (p. 397)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 443)
Start button location.
To switch off the car:
–
Press the start button - the car is switched
off.
If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
–
Press the start button and hold it depressed
until the car is switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 396)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 399)
397
STARTING AND DRIVING
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available.
Level
0
Functions
•
•
•
•
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different
levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described
with the denomination "ignition position"
throughout the owner's manual.
•
The following table shows the functions available
in each ignition position/level:
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminatedA.
•
II
Functions
•
•
The power seats* can be adjusted.
•
The power windows can be used.
The centre display is started and
can be usedA.
The infotainment system can be
usedA.
The functions are time-controlled in
this ignition position and are switched
off automatically after a period of time.
I
Level
Panorama roof, power windows,
12V socket in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation,
phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.
•
•
Power seats can be adjusted.
•
The infotainment system is started
automatically if it was running
when the car was left.
12 V sockets in the cargo area
can be used.
The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window can
only be activated after the car has
been started.
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery and
should therefore be avoided!
A
Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 396)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 443)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 399)
Power is taken from the battery in
this ignition position.
398
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Selecting ignition mode
•
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available.
Ignition position I - Depress the start button and release.
•
Ignition position II - Press and hold the
button depressed for approx. 5 seconds.
Then release the button.
•
Back to ignition position0 - To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II press the start button.
Selecting ignition position
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Start button location.
•
Starting the car (p. 396)
Switching off the car (p. 397)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 443)
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The interface facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's
main display. For information about a specific
alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual
from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer.
Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the car.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to
be selected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 400)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 400)
Starting the car (p. 396)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
* Option/accessory. 399
STARTING AND DRIVING
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or the
alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the separate instructions for that specific lock.
Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
NOTE
All bypass activation is logged and saved in
the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit.
It is not possible to undo a bypass.
Alcohol lock* (p. 399)
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 400)
The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
Starting the car (p. 396)
To bear in mind
Ignition positions (p. 398)
In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.
NOTE
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
instead?, is shown in the screen:
•
•
If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by
pressing the right arrow button on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad and then on
the O button.
If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing
the O button.
The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can
be started.
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 400)
Alcohol lock* (p. 399)
Starting the car (p. 396)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
The number of bypasses possible before service
is required is selected during alcohol lock installation.
400
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Brake functions
Foot brake
The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed
or prevent the car from rolling.
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
therefore be needed to produce the normal braking effect.
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car
is equipped with several automatic brake assist
functions. These can assist the driver by not
needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal
when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on
an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill
gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following
auto braking functions are available:
•
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto
Hold)
•
•
•
•
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
Auto braking after a collision
City Safety
Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)*
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
car.
Auto braking after a collision (p. 408)
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes should be relieved by using
engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine
braking is most efficiently used if the same gear
is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road*
for increased engine braking while driving on
steep downhill gradients at low speeds.
Help when starting on a hill (p. 408)
Anti-lock braking system
City Safety™ (p. 326)
The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels
from locking while braking and allows maintained
steering control. Vibration may be felt in the
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
Foot brake (p. 401)
Parking brake (p. 403)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407)
Hill descent control* (p. 426)
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the system may be made at low
speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the engine is started: Automatic
function check.
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS system.
The car's normal brake system is
still working, but without the ABS
function.
}}
* Option/accessory. 401
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault
has occurred in the brake system.
•
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake
system checked - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
•
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid
must be investigated.
Brake assistance
Braking on wet roads
The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist
System), helps to increase brake force during
braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the driver
brakes and increases brake force where necessary. The brake force can be boosted up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
function is suspended when the pressure on the
brake pedal decreases.
When driving for a prolonged period of time in
heavy rain without braking, the braking effect
may be delayed slightly when next using the
brakes.
NOTE
When BAS is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary.
When the brake pedal is released, all braking
ceases.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
402
Brake assistance (p. 402)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 408)
Braking on wet roads (p. 402)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 403)
Brake system maintenance (p. 403)
Brake lights (p. 142)
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 401)
This may also be the case after a car wash. It is
then necessary to depress the brake pedal more
forcefully. You should therefore maintain a
greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs,
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them
against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
situation when braking.
Related information
•
•
Foot brake (p. 401)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 403)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Braking on gritted roads
Brake system maintenance
Parking brake
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings.
Check brake system components regularly for
wear.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet. New and
replaced brake linings and brake discs do not
provide optimal braking effect until they have
been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres
(miles). Compensate for the reduced braking
effect by depressing the brake pedal harder.
Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that
are approved for your Volvo.
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
This may extend braking distance. You should
therefore maintain a greater safety distance to
vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do
the following:
•
Brake now and again to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal after finishing driving and before starting your next trip.
Related information
•
•
IMPORTANT
Foot brake (p. 401)
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Braking on wet roads (p. 402)
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 401)
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
wheels when the car is almost stationary.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 404)
•
Parking on a hill (p. 406)
}}
403
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 406)
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
Automatic activation
The parking brake is activated automatically:
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407)
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
•
if the Auto hold function (automatic braking
when stationary) is activated and the car has
been stationary for a longer time (5-10
minutes).
•
when gear position P is selected on a steep
hill.
•
when the car is switched off and the setting
for automatic activation of the parking brake
is activated in the centre display.
Activating the parking brake
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be activated when the car is in motion by pulling and
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
1.
2.
Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated.
Check that the car is stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
parking brake is activated.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the message in the driver display.
404
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Deactivating the parking brake
NOTE
When the car is first started, the parking
brake can be released automatically without
the seatbelt fastened.
Related information
Deactivate manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2.
Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
•
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 405)
•
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 406)
•
•
Parking brake (p. 403)
Parking on a hill (p. 406)
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
Choose whether the parking brake is to be activated automatically when the car is switched off.
This choice is made in the settings menu in the
centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension to select or deselect the function Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 404)
•
Parking brake (p. 403)
Deactivate automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2.
Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3.
Start the car.
4.
Select gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
405
STARTING AND DRIVING
Parking on a hill
Always use the parking brake when parking on a
hill.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Low battery voltage
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
this by pulling the control upwards while driving
the car away. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 404)
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not
possible to deactivate or activate the parking
brake after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving
with the parking brake applied.
If the car must be parked before a possible fault
is rectified, then the wheels must be turned as for
parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in
position P.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
406
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. See the message in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
Information message in driver display.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 404)
•
•
Starter battery (p. 579)
Volvo service programme (p. 560)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic braking when stationary
Symbols in the driver display
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when the
car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.
When the car has stopped, the brakes are activated automatically. The function can use either
foot brake or parking brake to hold the car stationary and it works on all gradients. When driving
away, the brakes disengage automatically if the
driver is wearing the seatbelt.
Symbol
Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the foot brake to
keep the car stationary.
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
The automatic brake function at a standstill is
activated using the button in the tunnel console.
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the parking brake to
keep the car stationary.
Related information
NOTE
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or
downhill slope, the brake pedal should be
depressed a little harder before being
released to ensure the car does not roll.
The parking brake is activated if:
•
•
•
•
the car is switched off
the driver's door is opened
•
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 407)
Foot brake (p. 401)
Parking brake (p. 403)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 408)
–
Press the button in the tunnel console to
activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated. Activated
function remains even when the car is
started next time.
the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
the car has been stationary for a longer time
(5-10 minutes).
}}
407
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Applicable when switching off
Help when starting on a hill
Auto braking after a collision
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol illuminated) then the brake pedal must be
depressed at the same time as the
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
the car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
In the event of a collision in which the activation
level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large
animal is detected, the car's brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or
reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.
•
The function remains deactivated until it is
reactivated.
•
When the function is deactivated, hill start
assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the
car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient.
Related information
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407)
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver starts to drive
away.
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
deactivated.
Related information
•
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407)
Foot brake (p. 401)
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no
longer possible to control and steer the car. In
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's
path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are activated during braking. When the car has stopped,
the hazard warning lights continue to flash and
the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk
of being hit by following traffic, the system can be
overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
Brake assist is included in the Rear Collision
Warning and Blind Spot Information safety systems.
408
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 338)
BLIS* (p. 339)
Brake functions (p. 401)
Gearbox
Symbol
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
(power transmission) between engine and drive
wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change
the gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
The car has an eight-speed automatic gearbox.
The number of gear changes means that the
engine's torque and power range can be used
effectively. Two of the gears are overdrive gears
that save fuel when driving at constant engine
speed. It is also possible to select gears manually. The driver display shows which gear position is currently in use.
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow
the recommendation given.
Reduced performance/Acceleration performance reduced
In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
driver display and a text message is shown follow the recommendation given.
Specification
Related information
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 410)
•
Gear shift indicator* (p. 413)
Symbols in the driver display
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message.
* Option/accessory. 409
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear positions for automatic
gearbox
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations.
With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses
the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox
also has a manual gearshift mode.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
The driver display shows the gear position
selected:
P, R, N, D or M.
In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is
also shown.
Changing gear
The gear selector is the shift-by-wire-type where
shifting is performed electronically instead of
mechanically. This means simpler shifting and
more distinct gear positions.
Change gear position by pressing the spring-loaded gear selector forwards or backwards, or sideways for manual shifting.
410
Gear positions
Help functions
Park position - P
The park position is activated via the P button
next to the gear selector.
The system will change to P position automatically:
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be stationary when the park position is selected.
•
•
if the car is switched off in position D or R.
if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and opens
the driver's door when the car is running with
the gear selector in a position other than P.
To select another gear position when the park
position is selected, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and
with the door open - exit the P position by selecting R or D again.
To park - first apply the parking bake and then
select park position.
Reverse position - R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be stationary when reverse position is selected.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position.
The steering wheel paddles are a complement
to the gear selector and make it possible to
change gear manually without releasing hands
from the steering wheel.
To be able to change from the neutral position to
another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when changing gear from R position to
D position.
Manual gearshift mode - M
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Select manual gear position by moving the gear
selector backwards from the D position. The
driver display shows which gear is engaged at the
time.
•
Press the gear selector to the right to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release it.
•
Press the gear selector to the left to "–"
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
•
Press the gear selector backwards to return
to the D position.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
–
Manual gearshift mode in the driver display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates current gear.
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 412)
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 411)
Kick-down function (p. 413)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 413)
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles.
In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are
automatically activated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 411
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Switch
Deactivating the function
Gear selector inhibitor
To change gear one step:
Manual deactivation in gear position D.
– Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and holding in place until the
figure in the driver display for the current
gear extinguishes.
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental
changing between different gear positions in an
automatic gearbox.
–
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards
the steering wheel - and release.
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are
deactivated after a short time if they are not used.
This is indicated by means of the figure for the
current gear extinguishing. The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated for as long as engine braking is in progress.
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
In gear position M there is no automatic deactivation.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
Related information
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
provided that the engine speed does not leave
the permitted range.
After each gear change the figure in the driver
display changes to show the current gear.
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 410)
•
Gear shift indicator* (p. 413)
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special
safety systems.
From park position - P
To be able to move the gear selector from the P
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition position must be II.
From neutral position - N
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the N
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must
be II.
Message in the driver display
If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is
shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever
Press brake pedal to activate gear lever.
The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically.
Related information
•
412
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 410)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Kick-down function
Gear shift indicator*
All-wheel drive
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage the
next gear for optimum fuel economy.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
important to drive in the right gear and to change
gear in good time.
All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means
that the car is driving all four wheels at the same
time, which improves traction.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in
the driver display and indicates recommended
shifting to a higher gear by a flashing plus sign.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or more
steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The
car shifts up when the engine has reached is
maximum engine speed in order to prevent
engine damage.
Related information
•
To achieve the best possible traction, the motive
force is distributed automatically to the wheels
with the best grip. The system continuously calculates the need for torque to the rear wheels,
and can immediately redistribute up to half of the
motor's torque to the rear wheels.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions,
the majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is
always engaged in preparation for maximum traction during acceleration.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on
the selected drive mode*.
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
•
Drive modes* (p. 414)
Low speed control* (p. 425)
Gearbox (p. 409)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 410)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 410)
* Option/accessory. 413
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drive modes*
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving
characteristics in order to enhance the driving
experience and facilitate driving in special situations.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions and
settings for different driving needs. The following
systems are adapted to obtain the best possible
driving characteristics in each respective drive
mode:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Steering
Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive
Brakes
Shock absorption
Driver display
Start/Stop function
Climate settings
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes
COMFORT
• This is the car's normal mode.
tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the
steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and
body's movement is smooth.
This drive mode is the certification mode for carbon dioxide emissions.
ECO
• Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and
environmentally-conscious driving with the
Eco mode.
The drive mode means, for example, that the
Start/Stop function is activated and the output of
certain climate settings is reduced.
In the Off road mode the driver display has a
compass between the speedometer and tachometer.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
DYNAMIC
• Dynamic mode means that the car has sportier characteristics and faster response to
accelerating.
The driver display has an ECO gauge that facilitates fuel-efficient driving.
The gear changes become faster and more distinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
greater traction.
OFF ROAD
• Maximise the car's traction when driving in
difficult terrain and on poor roads.
Steering response is faster and shock absorption
is harder2 which means that the body follows the
roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.
The steering is light, the all-wheel drive operation
and low speed function with hill descent control
(Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
The drive mode can only be activated at low
speeds and the speedometer shows the range
for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off
road mode is suspended and another drive mode
is activated.
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set-
2
414
Applies to Four-C.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
3.
INDIVIDUAL
• Adapting a drive mode according to individual preferences.
In Presets, select a drive mode to start from:
Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust
the settings according to the desired driving characteristics. These settings are saved in an individual driver profile.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
Driver Display
Steering force
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
Suspension Control
ECO Climate
Start/Stop.
Related information
Settings view3 for individual drive mode.
3
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and
select Individual Drive Mode.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 416)
Drive mode ECO (p. 416)
Economical driving (p. 428)
Start/Stop function (p. 419)
Low speed control* (p. 425)
Hill descent control* (p. 426)
All-wheel drive (p. 413)
The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on car model or updated software.
* Option/accessory. 415
STARTING AND DRIVING
Changing drive mode*
2.
Change the drive mode using the button in the
centre console.
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
modes are available in all situations.
To change drive mode:
Select the drive mode in one of two ways:
Drive mode ECO
•
Tap the desired drive mode directly on the
touchscreen to select and activate the
drive mode.
•
Press the DRIVE MODE button again to
move the cursor to the desired drive
mode. The selected drive mode is activated after a short delay.
Drive mode Eco optimises the car's driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and environmentally-conscious driving.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environment.
If a drive mode is greyed-out in the pop-up menu
then it cannot be selected.
Related information
•
•
1.
Press the DRIVE MODE button.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display with the active drive mode highlighted.
Drive modes* (p. 414)
The following properties are adapted for Eco driving:
•
•
Gearbox gearshift points.
•
The Eco Coast freewheel function is activated and engine braking is deactivated
when the accelerator pedal is released at
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h
(40 and 87 mph).
•
Some of the climate control system's settings work at reduced power or are deactivated.
•
The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentallyconscious and fuel-efficient driving.
Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 418)
•
Activating and deactivating low-speed driving* using a function button (p. 425)
•
Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button (p. 427)
Engine management and response from the
accelerator pedal.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast
The freewheel function Eco Coast means in practice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn
that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel
for longer distances. When the driver releases
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
disengaged from the engine whose speed is
416
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
reduced to idling speed with reduced consumption.
•
The road's downhill gradient is steeper than
approx. 6%.
The function is best used where it is possible to
freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight
downhill gradient or when there is a predictable
speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a
lower speed limit.
•
Manual gear changing is performed with the
steering wheel paddles*.
Activating the freewheel function
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released, in combination with the
following parameters:
•
•
•
Drive mode Eco is activated.
•
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
The gear selector is in D position.
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
The driver display shows COASTING when the
freewheel function is being used.
Limitations
The freewheel function is not available if:
•
Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature.
•
The gear selector is moved from the D position and the manual position.
•
The speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
Deactivating and switching off the freewheel
function
In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate or switch off the function in order to use
engine braking. Examples of such situations may
be on steep downhill gradients or before an
imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be
able to do it in the safest way possible.
be lower compared to other drive modes, which
enables further fuel savings. This means that the
car's speed can be slightly above or below the
set speed.
•
On a smooth road, the car's speed can deviate from the set speed when the cruise control is active and the car free-rolls.
•
On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made, then
reduced acceleration starts in order to
achieve the set speed.
•
On a downhill slope where the car free-rolls,
the car's speed can be slightly above or
below the set speed. The function uses normal engine braking to maintain the set
speed. The foot brake is also used if necessary.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:
•
•
•
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
Move the gear selector to manual position.
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
Switch off the freewheel function as follows:
Eco gauge in the driver display
•
The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the
driving is:
Change drive mode*, or switch off the Eco
drive mode in the function view.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible
to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn,
reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel
economy it is better to have the freewheel function activated and be able to freewheel for longer
distances.
Cruise control Eco Cruise
When using the cruise control in the Eco drive
mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will
•
With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
•
With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
gauge shows a high value.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
how a reference driver would drive the car under
the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
the short pointer on the gauge.
}}
* Option/accessory. 417
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
||
•
•
•
•
•
ECO climate control
In the Eco drive mode, Eco climate control is activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption.
Changing drive mode* (p. 416)
Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 418)
Drive modes* (p. 414)
Economical driving (p. 428)
Start/Stop function (p. 419)
Activating and deactivating drive
mode ECO with the function button
Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode
button in the centre console has a function button for the Eco drive mode in the centre display's function view.
The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is
switched off, and it must therefore be activated
after each time the engine is started. The driver
display shows ECO when the function is activated.
Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre
display function view
–
Press the Driving Mode ECO button to
activate or deactivate the function.
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
settings are changed, and several electricity
consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by switching off the ECO
function or adapting Individual* drive mode
with full climate functionality.
In the event of difficulties due to misting, press
the button for max. defroster which has normal
functionality.
418
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Related information
•
•
•
Drive mode ECO (p. 416)
Changing drive mode* (p. 416)
Drive modes* (p. 414)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/Stop function
Driving with start/stop function
Autostart
With the Start/Stop function, the engine
switches off temporarily when the car has stopped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and
then starts again automatically when the journey
is resumed.
The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off
the engine when stationary and then restarts it
automatically when the journey is resumed.
The Start/Stop function is available when the
engine is started and can be activated if certain
conditions have been met. The driver display indicates whether the function is available, active or
not available.
The following is required for the engine to autostart:
The start/stop function reduces fuel consumption, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust
emissions.
The system makes it possible to adopt an environmentally-conscious driving style by allowing
the car to engine auto-stop when possible.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving with start/stop function (p. 419)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 421)
Drive modes* (p. 414)
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is
auto-stopped. However, some equipment may
have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely
high volume on the audio system.
•
Release the brake pedal - the engine will
autostart and you can continue driving. On an
uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA)
engages, which prevents the car from rolling
backwards.
•
When the Auto Hold function is activated,
auto-start is delayed until the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
•
When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist
is activated, the engine will auto-start when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, or by
button on the left keypad
pressing the
of the steering wheel.
•
Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the
engine auto-starts.
•
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to autostop:
•
Stop the car with the foot brake and then
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
In drive mode Eco or Comfort4, the engine may
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist activated, the engine will auto-stop after approximately three seconds.
4
Normal start mode.
}}
* Option/accessory. 419
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbols in the driver display
•
The text READY is shown in the tachometer
when the function is available.
•
A pointer in the tachometer points to READY
when the function is active and the engine is
auto-stopped.
•
The text READY is greyed out when the
function is not available.
•
No text is shown when the function is deactivated.
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407)
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
temporarily
In certain situations it may be desirable to temporarily deactivate the start/stop function.
Deactivate using the Start/
Stop function button in the
centre display's function view.
The indication in the button is
switched off when the function
is deactivated.
The function is deactivated until
•
•
•
it is reactivated
the drive mode is changed to Eco or Comfort
the next time the car is started.
Related information
•
•
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
Related information
420
•
Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily (p. 420)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 421)
•
•
Start/Stop function (p. 419)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 408)
Driving with start/stop function (p. 419)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 421)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Conditions for the Start/Stop
function
•
The starter battery's temperature is below or
above the permitted limit values.
The engine auto-starts without the
brake pedal having been released
For the Start/Stop function to work requires that
a number of conditions are met.
•
The driver makes sweeping steering wheel
movements.
In the following cases, the engine auto-starts
even if the driver does not take his/her foot off
the brake pedal:
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in
the driver display.
The engine does not auto-stop
The engine does not auto-stop in the following
cases:
•
The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
•
After a number of repeated auto stops,
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
•
•
•
•
•
The road is very steep.
The bonnet is opened.
•
When driving at high altitudes when the
engine has not reached operating temperature.
High humidity in the passenger compartment
forms misting on the windows.
•
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values.
•
There is a temporarily high current take-off
or starter battery capacity drops below the
lowest permissible level.
•
•
•
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
The ABS system has been activated.
In the event of heavy braking (even without
the ABS system having been activated).
•
Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal
protection.
The bonnet is opened.
The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
completely stationary.
•
•
The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.
The capacity of the starter battery is below
the minimum permissible level.
•
•
The exhaust system's particulate filter is full5.
•
The engine is not at normal operating temperature.
A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
electrical system.
•
•
•
The ambient temperature is under -5 °C (23
°F) or above approx. 37 °C (98 °F).
The gearbox is not at normal operating temperature.
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
•
•
The gear selector is in M (±) position.
The gear selector is moved from D to R or M
(±) position.
•
•
the windscreen's electric heating is activated.
The engine does not auto-start
•
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values.
In the following cases the engine does not autostart after having auto-stopped:
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
text message indicate that the ignition is on.
•
the car is reversed.
•
5
Applies to cars with diesel engines.
The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
P position and the driver's door is open - a
normal start must take place.
}}
421
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
Related information
•
•
•
422
Start/Stop function (p. 419)
Driving with start/stop function (p. 419)
Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily (p. 420)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level control* and shock absorption
Shock absorption(Four-C)*
Level control and shock absorption are regulated automatically in the car.
The shock absorption is adapted according to the
selected drive mode and according to the speed
of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for
the best possible comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the
car's acceleration, braking and cornering.
Symbols and messages in driver display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Suspension
Level control has been switched off manually by the user.
Deactivated by user
Temporarily reduced performence
Level control performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this
message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA.
Suspension
A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.
Suspension
Service required
}}
* Option/accessory. 423
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
Suspension failure
A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car towed to a workshopA.
Stop safely
Suspension
A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshopA.
Slow down Car too high
Suspension
Auto adjusting car level
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
424
Drive modes* (p. 414)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Low speed control*
NOTE
The low speed control function Low Speed
Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction
for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces,
such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer
on a launch ramp.
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
In a car with drive mode button*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
The function is adapted for off-road driving and
driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx.
40 km/h (25 mph).
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel
drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheelspin and provides better traction on all wheels.
The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order
to facilitate traction and speed control at low
speed.
The function is activated together with Hill
Descent Control (HDC) which means that speed
down steep hills can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake
pedal. The system facilitates a low and even
speed while driving on steep downhill gradients.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving* using a function
button
Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode
button in the centre console has a function button for low-speed control with Hill Descent
Control in the centre display's function view.
Select low-speed driving in the centre
display function view
–
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
Activating and deactivating low-speed driving* using a function button (p. 425)
Changing drive mode* (p. 416)
Hill descent control* (p. 426)
All-wheel drive (p. 413)
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 425
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
Low speed control* (p. 425)
Changing drive mode* (p. 416)
Hill descent control*
Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control
(HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced
engine braking. The function makes it possible
to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients using only the accelerator
pedal, without using the foot brake.
In a car with drive mode button*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep
downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The
driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but
can instead focus on steering.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are
switched on when the function is operating.
The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed,
or stop the car at any time by using the foot
brake.
The function is activated together with Low
Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and
improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces. The systems are designed for use
at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Points to remember when driving with
HDC
•
If the function is disabled while driving on a
steep downhill gradient, the braking effect
will gradually decrease.
•
HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and
with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear
changing.
•
It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
higher with manual gear changing.
Function
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at
inching speed both forward and backward, assisted by the brake system. The speed can be
increased by using the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is then released the car
slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of
the gradient of the hill and without the need for
426
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control* with the function
button
Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode
button in the centre console has a function button for hill descent control with Hill Descent
Control in the centre display's function view.
Related information
•
•
Hill descent control* (p. 426)
Changing drive mode* (p. 416)
Selecting hill descent control in the
centre display function view
Hill descent control only works at low speeds.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
–
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button (p. 427)
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 416)
Low speed control* (p. 425)
All-wheel drive (p. 413)
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
* Option/accessory. 427
STARTING AND DRIVING
Economical driving
Drive economically and eco-consciously by driving smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
• For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
drive mode.
•
•
Drive in the highest gear6 possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indicator.
•
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects to minimise braking.
•
High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption seek advice on suitable tyres from a retailer.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption.
6
428
Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in Eco
drive mode - engine braking ceases, meaning that the car's kinetic energy is used to
freewheel for longer distances.
Applies to driving with manual gear changing.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
A roof load and space box increase wind
resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Check that:
•
the engine is working normally and that fuel
consumption is normal
•
•
•
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
•
Related information
•
•
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
Drive mode ECO (p. 416)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 522)
•
•
•
brake force during braking is optimal
all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level
if the car is heavily laden
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driving to areas where there is a risk of snowy or
icy road surfaces.
starter battery charging is good
the wiper blades are in good condition
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
located in the car - legally required in certain
countries.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 522)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 626)
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
Winter driving (p. 429)
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 428)
Winter driving
Slippery driving conditions
Settings for car modem (p. 501)
For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks of the car in order to ensure that it
can be driven safely.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
Pilot Assist (p. 296)
Speed Limiter (p. 268)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537)
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
•
The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol.
This mixture protects the engine against
frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid
health risks, different types of glycol must not
be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter
battery and its capacity is reduced by the
cold.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Winter wheels (p. 536)
Snow chains (p. 536)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 403)
Braking on wet roads (p. 402)
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
Starter battery (p. 579)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 622)
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
429
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving in water
IMPORTANT
Driving in water means that the car is driven in a
deeper amount of water on a road that is under
water. Driving in water must be performed with
great caution.
The car can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 45 cm (17.7 inches) at no more
than walking speed. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
•
•
7
430
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
•
If water enters the transmission, it
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil,
which shortens the service life of related
systems.
•
Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or
its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is
not covered by the warranty.
•
If necessary, clean the contacts for the electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
•
In the event of the engine stalling in
water, do not try restart - tow the car from
the water to a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of
engine breakdown.
Opening and closing the fuel filler
flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap
to be opened7.
In the driver display, the arrow
next to the tank symbol indicates which side of the car the
fuel filler flap is located.
1.
Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2.
After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Related information
•
•
Filling fuel (p. 431)
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438)
Related information
•
•
Recovery (p. 455)
Low speed control* (p. 425)
Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Filling fuel
3.
Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
4.
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
system.
Refuelling the car at a petrol station
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Topping up fuel from a fuel can
Fuel filling is performed in the following way.
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located in the foam block under the floor hatch in
the cargo area.
1.
Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
flap.
1.
Open the fuel filler flap.
2.
2.
Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier8 on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. See information
on approved fuels and the identifier in the
sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respectively.
Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps
before filling can be started.
8
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
(p. 430)
•
•
•
Petrol (p. 432)
Diesel (p. 434)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 435)
Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater*
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is
in a filling station area.
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the
end of 2018 at the latest.
* Option/accessory. 431
STARTING AND DRIVING
Handling of fuel
IMPORTANT
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
engine power and fuel consumption.
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
Petrol
Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
Identifier for petrol
Related information
•
•
•
Petrol (p. 432)
Diesel (p. 434)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 437)
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the latest.
These are the identifiers that apply for current
standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7% oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
432
E10 is a petrol with maximum
3.7% oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
•
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
•
EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by
volume ethanol) is approved for use.
•
Ethanol higher than E10
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is
not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating
•
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption.
•
An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C (100
°F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
•
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
•
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Handling of fuel (p. 432)
Filling fuel (p. 431)
Petrol particle filter (p. 433)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 626)
Petrol particle filter
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more
efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In
normal driving conditions, passive regeneration
takes place, which leads to the particles being
oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in
this way.
If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated
cold starts in low outside temperature, active
regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of
the particulate filter is automatic and normally
takes 10-20 minutes. There may be a smell of
burning during regeneration.
Use the parking heater in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a petrol car
The capacity of the petrol emission control system is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
}}
433
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
larly drive at higher speeds to allow the petrol
emission control system to regenerate.
•
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information
•
Petrol (p. 432)
Diesel
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur and metals.
Identifier
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the latest.
This is the identifier that applies for current
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with diesel
engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum
7 volume % fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME).
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F)) a
paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
9
434
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
which may lead to starting problems. The fuel
qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but for extreme weather
conditions, old fuel or moving between climate
zones, paraffin precipitate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
When refuelling, check that the area around the
fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent
and water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
•
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME9 (B7).
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
Before starting the car after the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
FAME10 and vegetable oil.
1.
The remote control key must be inside the
car.
2.
Set the car in ignition position II - press the
start button without depressing the brake
pedal and hold the button depressed for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the button.
3.
Wait approx. one minute.
4.
Start the engine.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Empty tank and diesel engine
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check.
Handling of fuel (p. 432)
Filling fuel (p. 431)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 435)
Diesel particulate filter (p. 436)
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two opening
caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past
both caps before filling can be started.
Related information
•
•
•
Filling fuel (p. 431)
Diesel (p. 434)
Tool kit (p. 529)
NOTE
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 436)
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 626)
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Points to remember when filling with a
fuel can
When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
10
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
435
STARTING AND DRIVING
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for more
efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the diesel particle filter during normal driving.
When these conditions have been met, regeneration starts to burn off the particles and empty the
filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have
reached normal operating temperature. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes.
The capacity of the diesel emission control system is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
The following may arise during regeneration:
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regularly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel
emission control system to regenerate.
•
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
•
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
NOTE
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
436
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a diesel car
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
AdBlue is an additive used in the SCR12 system
to reduce emissions of noxious substances from
a diesel engine.
In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous
oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to
nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly
reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous oxides.
AdBlue
AdBlue is a colourless fluid that consists of
32.5% urea13 in deionised water and is produced
in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It is
specially developed for SCR cleaning technology
for diesel engines.
Diesel (p. 434)
AdBlue has its own tank in the car and is topped
up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel filler
flap. Consumption depends on driving style, outside temperature and the operating temperature
of the system.
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 436)
Conditions for driving with AdBlue
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 626)
There must always be AdBlue of the correct
quality in the tank before the car can be started.
The SCR system is very sensitive to contaminants.
Related information
•
•
•
Emission control with AdBlue®11
The emission control system continuously monitors the tank level, quality and dosage of AdBlue.
If something is wrong, a message is shown in the
driver display.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
AdBlue is required for the function of the
SCR system and legal emissions compliance.
It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue
supply system in any way so that no AdBlue
reagent is consumed when it is required for
legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any
such tampering may be a criminal offence
which may lead to legal prosecution actions.
It is not permitted to operate the car with an
empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be
compliant with the legal requirements for
exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is
equipped with a warning system to inform
when AdBlue refilling is required. When the
fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low,
warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue
refilling is needed.
Related information
•
•
•
11
12
13
Handling AdBlue® (p. 437)
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 440)
Handling AdBlue®
Storage
AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx.
67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is not
flammable but should be handled with care
since it can irritate the eyes and skin.
AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealed original
packaging at a temperature above -11 °C (12 °F)
and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid must not be
stored in direct sunlight.
Points to remember when handling
AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be
used again when the solution has thawed.
Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with skin
and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irritation to sensitive skin when handling the fluid.
WARNING
Related information
•
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 436)
Action for first aid:
•
•
For inhalation - get fresh air.
•
For contact with the eyes - rinse immediately with a lot of water.
•
For ingestion - rinse the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
For skin contact - wash the skin with
soap and water.
Seek medical attention if the discomfort
remains or if a large quantity has been ingested.
Action in the event of a spill
AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted
surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with water.
Avoid releasing into the drainage system.
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
Selective Catalytic Reduction
CO(NH2)2
437
STARTING AND DRIVING
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
Checking AdBlue level
Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if
the message for low AdBlue level is shown in
the driver display.
The Volvo workshop tops up AdBlue when the
car is serviced, however, it must also be topped
up several times between services depending on
driving style. If the AdBlue tank is allowed to
drain completely then it will no longer be possible
to start the car.
1.
2.
Press Status to show the AdBlue level.
Open the Car status app in the app view.
NOTE
Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in
good time before it is empty.
If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to
start the engine after it is switched off – not
the regular way or using aids.
The only way to restart the car after the tank
has been run dry is to refill with AdBlue of the
specified quality, minimum 3 litres.
Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display.
Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full
tank.
When less than 25 % of the tank remains
available, the colour of the remaining cursor
changes to amber, and at less than 10 % it
turns red.
438
STARTING AND DRIVING
Filling
3.
When the AdBlue level starts to
become low, a symbol illuminates in
the driver display and the AdBlue
level low message is shown.
1.
Fill with AdBlue of the correct quality14.
Do not overfill the tank.
WARNING
When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling
station, it is advisable to use the pump adapted for passenger cars. The AdBlue pump for
heavy vehicles can also be used.
Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2.
IMPORTANT
Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from
coming into contact with the car's paintwork.
If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the
fluid can affect the paintwork.
Related information
Open the blue cover for the smaller filler pipe
intended for AdBlue.
•
•
•
14
Handling AdBlue® (p. 437)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 440)
Tank capacity for AdBlue® (p. 624)
ISO 22241
439
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols and messages for
AdBlue®
The emission control system continuously monitors the level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If
something is wrong, a message is shown in the
driver display.
Symbol
Message
Specification
AdBlue level low
The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up.
AdBlue dosing
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
and
AdBlue quality
440
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbol
Message
Specification
Refill AdBlue
The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately.
Engine start prohibit.
The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount specified in
the driver display, or contact a workshopA.
and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4
litres of AdBlue
Engine start prohibited
Note that:
•
The car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount of AdBlue
filled.
•
It can take up to 20 seconds after filling before the system has been updated with the correct
level indication.
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
Service of AdBlue system
needed to allow restart
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 437)
Book service and repair (p. 562)
441
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or stop
the car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down.
Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load.
•
In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
•
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
•
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver display
shows the message Engine temperature
High temperature Stop safely. Stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run
at idling speed for several minutes and cool
down.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
•
If the message Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant Level low, turn off engine is
shown, stop the car and switch off the
engine.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an
alternative gear shift program will be
selected15. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and the
driver display shows the message
15
442
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the recommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation given.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Specification
Related information
•
•
•
•
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
Preparations for a long trip (p. 428)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 413)
Applies to automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition position II when the car is switched off.
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less
power.
Using jump starting with another
battery
If the starter battery is discharged then the car
can be started with current from another battery.
–
Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
(2).
6.
Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
7.
Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
Attachment points for the jump leads.
8.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's negative jump-starting point
(4).
9.
Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information
•
•
IMPORTANT
5.
ventilation fan
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is
shown in the driver display. The energy-saving
function then shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventilation
fan and/or audio system.
Starter battery (p. 579)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
Examples of such functions are:
•
•
•
•
4.
1.
Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2.
Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3.
If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
}}
443
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
•
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt. There is a
risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's
clamps comes into contact with the car's
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's
positive terminal or the clamp connected to
the red jump lead.
WARNING
Towbar*
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
The car can be equipped with a towbar that
makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the
car.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
There may be different towbar variants available
for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and lubrication with grease in order to prevent wear.
Related information
•
•
•
•
NOTE
Starting the car (p. 396)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175)
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
Selecting ignition mode (p. 399)
Related information
•
•
444
Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 446)
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
•
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 451)
Specifications for towbar*
Specifications for towbar* (p. 445)
Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches)
A
939 (37)
B
72 (2,8)
C
6 (0,24)
D
145 (5,7)
E
88 (3,5)
F
Side beam tilts 8 degrees
G
353 (13,9)
H
1048 (41,3)
I
524 (20,6)
Related information
•
•
Towbar* (p. 444)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 618)
* Option/accessory. 445
STARTING AND DRIVING
Extendable and retractable towbar*
1.
2.
The extendable/retractable towbar is always
easily accessible and simple to extend or retract
as needed. In the retracted position, the towbar
is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towbar carefully.
Extending the towbar
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the righthand side at the rear of the cargo area. An
indicator lamp in the button must illuminate
with a constant orange glow for the extension function to be active.
Press and release the button - extension
might not start if the button is pressed for too
long.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towbar.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension procedure before it can then be moved to locked
position. This procedure may take several
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
446
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
3.
1.
Move the towbar to its end position, where it
is secured and locked in place - the indicator
lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
2.
Open the tailgate. Press and release the button on the right-hand side at the rear of the
cargo area - retraction might not start if the
button is pressed for too long.
> The towbar automatically lowers in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp in
the button flashes orange.
Lock the towbar by moving it back to its
retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with
a constant glow if the towbar is correctly
retracted.
Retracting the towbar
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in
the electrical socket when retracting the towbar.
Related information
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
Towbar* (p. 444)
* Option/accessory. 447
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of
points that are important to think about regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is
positioned in the trailer.
•
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres above
sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the
engine output and the vehicle's climbing ability are reduced due to the reduced air density, and the maximum trailer load must
therefore be reduced. The weight of the car
and trailer must be decreased by 10% for
each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part
thereof).
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment
for towing a trailer.
•
The car's towbar must be of an approved
type.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towbar complies with the
specified maximum towball load. Towball load
is calculated as part of the car's payload.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load.
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km (620 miles).
•
448
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear when shifting manually and
adjust your speed.
Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel quality are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a
13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make
sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
Trailer weights
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours to
maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
to the maximum permissible weight). When the
car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When driving in hilly terrain and hot
climates
Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk
of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine
and drive system overheats, a warning symbol
comes on in the driver display together with a
message.
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear
related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2.
Activate the parking brake.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Trailer stability assist* (p. 449)
Checking trailer lamps (p. 450)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 618)
Overheating in the engine and drive system
(p. 442)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 622)
Trailer stability assist*
The function of trailer stability assist (TSA16) is
to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations
where they begin snaking. The function is
included in the stability system ESC17.
Reasons for snaking
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
3.
Select gear position P.
•
4.
Release the brake pedal.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car
with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2.
Select gear position D.
3.
Releasing the parking brake.
4.
Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
16
17
Trailer Stability Assist
Electronic Stability Control
Trailer stability assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral
}}
* Option/accessory. 449
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and engine
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is
stable once again, the system stops regulating
and the driver once again has full control of the
car.
Related information
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
Electronic stability control (p. 264)
Checking trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the
trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators
or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display
shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on
the trailer must be checked manually by the
driver before setting off.
Symbol
Message
• Trailer turn indicator Right
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre display.
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
• Trailer brake light Malfunction
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the
driver uses severe steering wheel movements to
try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is
the trailer or the driver causing the snaking.
When trailer stability assist is
operating, the ESC symbol
flashes in the driver display.
450
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is
broken, the driver display symbol for direction
indicators will also flash more quickly than normal.
Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
STARTING AND DRIVING
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
2.
Press My Car
Checking trailer lamps*
3.
Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that
Volvo has developed are recommended.
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possible to check that the trailer lamps are working via
an automatic lamp activation. The function helps
the driver check that the trailer lamps are working
before starting off.
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then it is
possible to start the check manually.
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear
fog lamp to travel safely.
The engine must be switched off to perform the
check.
1.
2.
3.
When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display.
Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> The lamp check starts.
Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4.
Visually check that all lamps available on the
trailer are operational.
5.
After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash
again.
> The check is complete.
Lights and Lighting.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Lights and Lighting.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the
bicycle rack.
•
Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
•
The bicycle rack may be designed for a maximum of three bicycles.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause
damage to the towbar and car.
The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if
it:
•
•
is incorrectly fitted on the towball
•
is used for carrying something other than
bicycles.
is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
instructions for maximum load weight
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be switched
off in the centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 451
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
The car's driving characteristics are affected
when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For
example, due to:
•
•
•
•
increased weight
reduced acceleration capacity
reduced ground clearance
changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading bicycles
on the bicycle rack
The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load
on the towbar.
ity and increase fuel consumption. It may also
lead to an increased load on the towbar.
Related information
•
Towbar* (p. 444)
Towing
During towing, the car is towed by another vehicle by means of a towline.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before the towing begins.
Preparations and towing
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Load according to the following recommendations:
•
Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to
the car.
•
Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by
loading the bicycles facing alternately if several bicycles are loaded.
•
Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery,
child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the
towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce
the wind resistance, which affects fuel consumption.
•
452
Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 80 km/h
(50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
km (50 miles).
WARNING
•
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
•
Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deactivated.
•
Always keep the remote control key in the
car when it is being towed.
Do not use protective covers on the bicycles.
This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibil-
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is
considerably heavier than normal.
1.
Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2.
Secure the towline in the towing eye.
3.
Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the
car.
4.
5.
Set the car in ignition position II - press the
start button without depressing the brake
pedal and hold the button depressed for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the button.
Move the gear selector to neutral position N
and release the parking brake.
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a
donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
> The towing vehicle can now start towing.
6.
Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7.
Be prepared to brake to stop.
Jump starting
Fitting and removing the towing eye
Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
and the engine does not start.
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
rear.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 453)
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is
no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
Recovery (p. 455)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 443)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 399)
Take out the towing eye from the foam block
under the floor in the cargo area.
}}
453
STARTING AND DRIVING
4.
||
Front: Remove the cover - press on the
marking with a finger.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
Rear: Remove the cover - press on the marking with a finger and, at the same time, fold
out the opposite side/corner using a coin or
similar.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in until it stops.
Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread
through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as
a lever.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
Removing the towing eye:
–
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return
it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
454
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible.
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is
inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you
try to pull it up using the towing eye.
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery
vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
Recovery
For recovery, the car is taken away with the help
of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
Related information
•
Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 453)
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance
under the car is inadequate, then the car may be
damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should
then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting
device.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
Related information
•
•
•
Towing (p. 452)
Recovery (p. 455)
Tool kit (p. 529)
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
455
STARTING AND DRIVING
HomeLink®*18
HomeLink®19
is a programmable remote control,
integrated in the car's electrical system, which
can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thereby
replace the remote controls for them.
General
HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior
rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of
three programmable buttons and one indicator
lamp in the mirror glass.
For more information about HomeLink®, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)20.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is
deleted when the car is sold.
Related information
•
•
•
Using HomeLink (p. 458)
Programming HomeLink®* (p. 456)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 459)
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Button 1
Programming HomeLink®*21
Follow these instructions to program
HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram
individual buttons.
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
HomeLink® can be programmed or used. If
possible, fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink® for
faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal. The HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programming.
WARNING
While programming HomeLink®, the garage
door or gate being programmed may activate.
For this reason, make sure that nobody is in
the vicinity of the door or gate while programming is in progress. The car should be outside
the garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp
18
19
20
21
456
Applies to certain markets.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
1.
Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink® button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches)
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator
lamp on HomeLink®.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
program HomeLink® is improved at a distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter
problems during programming.
2.
Press and hold depressed both the button
on the remote control and the button to be
reprogrammed on HomeLink®.
3.
Do not release the buttons until the indicator
lamp has switched from flashing slowly
(approx. once per second) to either flashing
quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow.
> If it illuminates with a constant glow:
Indication that the programming has finished. Press the programmed button
twice to activate.
If it flashes quickly: The device to be
programmed to HomeLink® may have a
security function that requires extra steps.
Test by pressing the programmed button
twice to see whether the programming is
working. Otherwise, continue with the following steps.
4.
Locate programming button22 on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
5.
Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming must be
completed within 30 seconds of the button
being depressed.
6.
Press and release the button on HomeLink®
that you want to program. Repeat the
sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a
second time and, depending on the receiver
model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and the
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed button is depressed.
In the event of programming problems, contact
HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com,
22
Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers.
}}
457
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
toll number +49 6838 907 277)23.
Reprogramming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button,
proceed as follows:
1.
Press the desired button and hold it
depressed for approx. 20 seconds.
2.
Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink®
starts to flash slowly, programming can continue as normal.
Related information
•
•
•
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved programming.
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink®
buttons at the same time, not each button individually. Individual buttons can only be reprogrammed.
–
23
458
Press and hold depressed the outer buttons
(1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx. 10 seconds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over
from a constant glow to starting to flash,
the buttons are reset and ready to be
reprogrammed.
Using HomeLink (p. 458)
HomeLink®* (p. 456)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 459)
Using HomeLink
When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). If the button is
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illuminates or flashes when the button has been
depressed. Naturally the original remote controls
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if
required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink® will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
NOTE
HomeLink® cannot be used if the car is
locked and the alarm is armed from the outside.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
•
•
HomeLink®
If
is used to control a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near
the door or gate while it is in motion.
Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Related information
•
•
•
HomeLink®* (p. 456)
Programming HomeLink®* (p. 456)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 459)
Type approval for HomeLink®*24
Type approval for EU
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Wavelength within which the radio equipment
functions:
•
•
•
•
•
433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation,
600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464,
USA
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
HomeLink®* (p. 456)
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown by
their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Related information
24
•
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 460)
•
Calibrating the compass* (p. 460)
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 459
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Activating and deactivating the
compass
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started.
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass should be calibrated if the car is
moved between several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1.
Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2.
Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
–
Depress the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
Related information
•
•
460
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off.
Magnetic zones.
4.
Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.
5.
Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6.
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
Compass* (p. 459)
Calibrating the compass* (p. 460)
3.
Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds
(use a paper clip, for example). The number
for the current magnetic zone is shown.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
7.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform the
calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
8.
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
•
•
Compass* (p. 459)
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 460)
* Option/accessory. 461
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
The audio and media system consists of media
player and radio. You can also connect a phone
via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play
music wirelessly in the car. When the car is connected to the Internet you can also use apps for
media playback.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Overview of audio and media
Control the functions with your voice, steering
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number
of speakers and amplifiers depends on which
audio system the car is equipped with.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible to download system updates for
optimal functionality, see support.volvocars.com.
Media player (p. 474)
Radio (p. 468)
Phone (p. 488)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Apps (p. 465)
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Driver distraction (p. 39)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 507)
Audio settings
The audio system is preset for optimal sound
reproduction but can be adapted according to
needs.
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
control below the centre display or with the righthand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for
example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing
phone calls and active traffic messages.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing. This calibration takes into account
loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of car model and audio system. There is
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Audio settings as required
The following settings can be selected in the top
view under Settings Sound:
• Tone — personal preference for bass, treble,
equaliser for example.
• Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear
loudspeakers.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
464
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound experience*
Apps
Sound Experience is opened from the centre
display's app view and gives access to further
audio settings. The following settings can be
made:
The app view contains applications (apps) that
give access to certain of the car's services.
Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view
from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as FM radio, are found here.
• Surround - surround sound mode with level
settings.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Media player (p. 474)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 131)
Settings for phone (p. 496)
Sound, media and Internet (p. 464)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and
model)
Some basic apps are always available. More apps
such as web radio and music services can be
downloaded when the car is connected to the
Internet.
Certain apps are only available for use if the car
is connected to the Internet.
1
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
}}
* Option/accessory. 465
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre
display's app view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps
NOTE
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Updating apps (p. 467)
Deleting apps (p. 467)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Android Auto* (p. 486)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
1.
2.
466
Tap on the row for an app in order to expand
in the list and get more information about the
app.
4.
Select Install in order to start the download
and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress.
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
Storage space on hard disk (p. 506)
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 504)
3.
New apps can be downloaded when the car is
connected to the Internet.
Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
Select New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
A message is shown if a download cannot
be started for the moment. The app will
remain in the list and it is possible to try to
start a download again.
Cancelling the download
– Tap on Abort to cancel a download in progress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Deleting apps (p. 467)
•
Storage space on hard disk (p. 506)
Apps (p. 465)
Updating apps (p. 467)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Updating apps
The apps can be updated when the car is connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
Update some
1. Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3.
Locate the desired app and select Install.
> Updating is started.
Update all
1. Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
1.
Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3.
Locate the desired app and select Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it disappears from the list.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
it will be restarted in order for the installation to
be completed.
Deleting apps
Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet.
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
Apps (p. 465)
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Deleting apps (p. 467)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
2.
Apps (p. 465)
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Updating apps (p. 467)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Select Install all.
> Updating is started.
* Option/accessory. 467
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Radio
It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands
and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is
online, it is also possible to listen to Internet
radio.
•
•
•
•
RDS radio (p. 472)
Start radio
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
The radio is started from the centre display app
view.
1. Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM)
from the app view.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Media player (p. 474)
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
468
Start radio (p. 468)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 469)
2.
Setting radio favourites (p. 470)
•
•
Settings for radio (p. 471)
Digital radio* (p. 473)
Select a radio station.
Related information
Radio (p. 468)
Searching for radio stations (p. 470)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 469)
Changing radio band and radio
station
2.
Select playback from Stations, Favourites,
Genres or Ensembles2.
•
•
•
Setting radio favourites (p. 470)
There are instructions here for changing the
radio band, the list in the radio band and the
radio station in the selected list.
3.
Tap on the desired station from the list.
Settings for radio (p. 471)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Changing radio band
Swipe to show the app view in the centre display
and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or
open the driver display's app menu using the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and
make your selection from there.
Changing lists within the frequency
band
Favourites - only plays back selected favourite
channels.
Genres — only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop
or classical.
Changing stations within the selected
list
–
Press on
or
under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change radio station in the selected
list via the centre display.
Related information
1.
2
Press Library.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 468)
Searching for radio stations (p. 470)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Setting radio favourites (p. 470)
Settings for radio (p. 471)
Application menu in driver display (p. 90)
Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).
* Option/accessory. 469
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Searching for radio stations
Manual tuning
The radio automatically compiles a station list of
the radio stations within the area that are transmitting the strongest signals.
Setting radio favourites
It is possible to add a radio channel to the
Radio favourites app and the favourites list for
the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to
add and remove favourites can be found below.
Radio Favourites
Radio Favourites shows saved
favourites from all frequency
bands.
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no
longer changes frequency automatically when
reception is poor.
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
470
•
•
•
FM — station, genre and frequency.
1.
Press Library.
2.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
3.
Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input of
a character and the search results are
shown by category.
–
AM — station and frequency.
DAB* - ensembles and stations.
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
or
. With a long press, the
press
search jumps to the next available station in
the frequency band. It is also possible to use
the right keypad on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 468)
Start radio (p. 468)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 469)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Settings for radio (p. 471)
1.
Open the app Radio favourites from the
app view.
2.
Tap on the desired station in the list to start
listening.
Adding and removing radio favourites
–
Tap on
to add or remove a channel to or
from frequency band favourites and Radio
Favourites.
When a favourite is saved from a station list, the
radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual
station search, the radio does not automatically
change to a stronger frequency.
When you remove a favourite, it will also be
removed from frequency band favourites.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 468)
Settings for radio
Start radio (p. 468)
There are various radio functions to activate and
deactivate.
Searching for radio stations (p. 470)
Cancelling traffic messages
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 469)
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
in the
right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping
on Cancel in the centre display.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Settings for radio (p. 471)
Application menu in driver display (p. 90)
Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band to view available functions.
AM/FM Radio
• Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on programme content, artists,
etc.
Announcements function must be activated at the same time.
- News : interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts news. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the
news broadcast is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is finished.
- Traffic Announcements: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the
message is finished.
• Freeze Program Name: select to stop the
programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.
• Select Announcements:
- Local Interruptions: interrupts the current
media playback and broadcasts information
about traffic disruptions in the neighbourhood. Playback of previous media source is
resumed when the message is finished. The
Local Interruptions function is a geographically restricted version of the Traffic
Announcements function. The Traffic
}}
471
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
source is resumed when the message is finished.
DAB* (digital radio)
• Sort Services: option for how channels will
be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service
number.
- Traffic Flash: receives information about
traffic disruptions.
• DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function
- News Flash: receives news.
for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio
channel is lost, another channel is found
automatically in another channel group
(ensemble).
- Transport Flash: receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
- Warning/Services: receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
• DAB To FM Handover: starts the function
for linking between DAB and FM. If reception
of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM
frequency is searched for automatically.
• Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
• Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen.
• Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is
playing. Selected messages will interrupt the
current media playback to play back the
message. Playback of previous media source
is resumed when the message is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
472
Related information
•
•
•
Radio (p. 468)
Digital radio* (p. 473)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 110)
RDS radio
RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio
automatically changes to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic
information and to search for certain programme
types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM
transmitter in such a network sends information
that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
•
Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter
if reception in the area is poor.
•
Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information.
•
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the
radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio
source currently in use. The radio returns to the
previous audio source and volume when the set
programme type is no longer broadcast. To go
back earlier, press
on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the centre
display.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Related information
•
•
Radio (p. 468)
Settings for radio (p. 471)
Digital radio*
(DAB3)
Digital radio
is a digital broadcasting
system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB
+ and DMB4.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in the
centre display.
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain
e.g. translations of the main programme into
other languages. Subchannels are indicated with
an arrow symbol in the channel list.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 474)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 469)
Searching for radio stations (p. 470)
Setting radio favourites (p. 470)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Settings for radio (p. 471)
Digital radio is played back in the same way as
other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the
option to select playback from Stations,
Favourites and Genres, there is also the option
to select playback from subchannels and
Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same
frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside
the station name (download time varies).
3
4
Digital Audio Broadcasting
Digital Multimedia Broadcasting
* Option/accessory. 473
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Link between FM and digital radio*
Media player
The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to
switch from a channel with poor or no reception
to the same channel in another channel group
(ensemble) with better reception, within DAB
and/or between DAB and FM.
The media player can play back audio from
external audio sources connected via the USB
port or Bluetooth. It can also play back video format via the USB port.
When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio books
and music services via apps.
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Media
3.
Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or
DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/
deactivate the respective functions.
Related information
DAB.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 475)
Controlling and changing media (p. 476)
Searching media (p. 477)
Apps (p. 465)
Radio (p. 468)
Video (p. 478)
Media via Bluetooth® (p. 480)
Media via USB port (p. 480)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Related information
•
•
•
Digital radio* (p. 473)
Radio (p. 468)
Settings for radio (p. 471)
The media player is operated
from the centre display, but
several functions can be operated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad or voice control.
The radio is operated in the media player and is
described in a separate section.
474
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the centre
display. Several functions can also be operated
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or
voice control.
The media player also operates the radio, which
is described in a separate section.
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
4.
2.
Open the app USB from the app view.
3.
Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Media with Internet connection
Play back media from Internet-connected apps:
Mp3 player and iPod®
Starting the media source
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app
(not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1.
Connect media source.
2.
Start playback from the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and
model.)
2.
Connect media source.
3.
Start playback from the connected media
source.
Open the app Bluetooth from the app view.
> Playback begins.
1.
Connect the car to the Internet.
2.
Open the current app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Read the separate section on how apps are
downloaded.
Video
1. Connect media source.
2.
Open the app USB from the app view.
3.
Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate section.
Related information
•
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 90)
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 468)
Controlling and changing media (p. 476)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 480)
}}
475
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Controlling and changing media
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
The playback of media can be controlled with
voice control, steering wheel keypad or the centre display.
The media player can be operated by voice recognition, from
the steering wheel keypad or
the centre display.
Video (p. 478)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Android Auto* (p. 486)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
Compatible media formats (p. 505)
Change track/song - tap on the desired track in
or
under
the centre display, press on
the centre display or on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis
in the centre display and drag sideways, or press
and hold
or
under the centre display or
on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Changing media - select from previous sources
in the app, in the app view, press on the desired
app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad via the app menu
.
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
shuffle the playback order.
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre
on the steering wheel's
display or press
right-hand keypad in order to increase or
decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the
song being played back, the physical button
on the steering
under the centre display or
wheel's right-hand keypad.
476
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Similar - tap on the button in
order to use Gracenote to
search for similar music on the
USB device and to create a
playlist from it. The playlist can
contain a maximum of 50
songs.
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer, song
titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and,
when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet).
•
•
Media playback (p. 475)
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115)
Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
between USB devices when
several are connected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media player (p. 474)
Searching media (p. 477)
Audio settings (p. 464)
Apps (p. 465)
Gracenote® (p. 478)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
1.
.
Press
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
2.
Enter the search terms.
3.
Press Search.
> Connected devices are searched and the
search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show each
category separately.
Related information
•
•
Media player (p. 474)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
* Option/accessory. 477
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Gracenote®
Related information
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown during
playback.
Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Media
3.
Select settings for Gracenote data:
Gracenote®.
• Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
• Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
• None - no results are shown.
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is updated continuously. Download the latest update for
optimal functionality. For information and download, see support.volvocars.com.
478
•
•
Media playback (p. 475)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 507)
Video
Videos on USB-connected devices can be
played back using the media player.
No picture is shown when the car starts to move,
but only the audio is played back. The picture is
shown again when the car is stationary.
Information on compatible formats for media can
be found in a separate section.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Playing a video (p. 479)
Playing back DivX® (p. 479)
Settings for video (p. 479)
Compatible media formats (p. 505)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Playing a video
Playing back DivX®
Videos are played using the USB app in the app
view.
1. Connecting a media source (USB device).
This DivX
device must be registered in
order to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films.
2.
Open the app USB from the app view.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
3.
Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
2.
Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
3.
Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration.
Certified®
Related information
•
•
•
•
Video (p. 478)
Playing back DivX® (p. 479)
Settings for video (p. 479)
Compatible media formats (p. 505)
Settings for video
It is possible to change certain video playback
settings, e.g. language.
With the video player in full screen mode, or by
opening the top view and pressing Settings
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language.
Related information
•
Video (p. 478)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Video (p. 478)
Playing a video (p. 479)
Settings for video (p. 479)
Compatible media formats (p. 505)
479
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Media via Bluetooth®
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files
from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile
phones and tablets.
For the media player to be able to play back
audio files wirelessly from an external device, the
device must first be connected to the car via
Bluetooth.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 480)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Media playback (p. 475)
Compatible media formats (p. 505)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
Bluetooth®
Media via USB port
Connect a
device to the car for wireless playback of media and to provide the car
with an Internet connection where possible.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
the car's USB port.
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are
fully compatible with the car. For compatibility,
see support.volvocars.com.
Devices with rechargeable batteries are
recharged when connected via USB and the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a phone to the car
via Bluetooth®.
The content of the external source can be loaded
more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played back via the
USB port.
Related information
Certain MP3 players have their own file system
that the car does not support.
•
•
•
Media via Bluetooth® (p. 480)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Media playback (p. 475)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
480
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481)
Media playback (p. 475)
Video (p. 478)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 506)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Android Auto* (p. 486)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a device via USB port
TV*6
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
one of the car's USB ports.
No images are shown once the car reaches a
certain speed but the sound will be heard the
whole time. The picture returns once more when
the car is almost or completely stationary.
The TV is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be controlled from the
right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice
recognition.
The phone must be connected to the USB port
with white frame (when there are two USB ports)
when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
USB input* (type C) on rear of tunnel console for charging telephones and tablets for example5.
Related information
USB inputs (type A) under the centre display.
5
6
•
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 475)
Media via USB port (p. 480)
Media player (p. 474)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 506)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 506)
•
•
Apple®
CarPlay®*
(p. 483)
Android Auto* (p. 486)
Related information
•
•
Using the TV* (p. 482)
Settings for TV* (p. 482)
It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via this input.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 481
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Using the TV*7
NOTE
The TV is started from the app view. Tap on the
TV app and select a channel.
The TV automatically searches for the channels
with best reception.
If the car is moved within the country, e.g.
from city to city, it is not certain that
Favourites are available since the frequency
may have changed.
Change the list of visible channels
1. Press Library
2.
Select playback from TV-channels or
Favourites.
3.
Select the desired channel.
Change channel from selected list
– Press on
or
under the centre display or on the steering wheel keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
A TV channel can be saved as a favourite:
–
Tap on
in order to add/remove a channel to/from the favourites list.
TV guide
A programme guide is available with information
about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.
–
7
482
NOTE
The system only supports TV broadcasts in
the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or
MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2
standard. The system does not support analogue broadcasts.
Related information
•
•
•
•
TV* (p. 481)
Settings for TV* (p. 482)
Settings for TV*8
The option to make certain settings is available,
both in the top view or when the TV is in full
screen mode.
With the TV in full screen mode, or by opening
the top view and pressing Settings Media
TV, the following can be adjusted:
• Subtitle Language
• Audio Language
Pict. format
Tapping on Picture format enables you to
choose which format the TV picture should be
shown in.
1.
Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image
format being transmitted.
2.
Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised without cropping.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 131)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 507)
Related information
•
•
•
•
TV* (p. 481)
Using the TV* (p. 482)
Compatible media formats (p. 505)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
Tap on Guide to show information about TV
programmes.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Apple® CarPlay®*
CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music,
make phone calls, get directions, send/receive
messages and use Siri, all while you stay
focused on your driving.
CarPlay works with selected
Apple devices. If the car does
not already support CarPlay
there is the option to install it
retroactively. Contact a Volvo
retailer to install CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.
Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay
may sometimes mean that the connection
between an iPhone and the car is broken. Please
note that Volvo is not responsible for the content
in CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay no guidance is shown in the driver display, but only in the
centre display.
The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the centre display, phone or using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions).
The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri.
A long press on the steering wheel button
8
9
Applies to certain markets.
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
starts voice control using Siri and a short press
activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks
9
off too early, hold the steering wheel button
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 485)
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be activated in your phone. The phone must also have
an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile
network.
Connect an iPhone and start CarPlay
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore
not be available when CarPlay is active. An
alternative Internet source must be used to
connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use
Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
1.
Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2.
Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on OK.
3.
Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
}}
* Option/accessory. 483
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
4.
5.
Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on Accept to connect.
> The tile with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Starting CarPlay
CarPlay is started according to the following after
an iPhone has been connected.
1.
2.
Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the phone is
shown.
Tap on the phone name - the tile with
CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are
shown.
3.
If the tile with CarPlay is not opened, tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
> The tile with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.
4.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app is
started in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the
10
484
tile again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app
view.
•
•
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 485)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500)
Switch the connection between CarPlay
and iPod
•
CarPlay to iPod
1. Press Settings in the top view.
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 500)
•
Voice recognition (p. 128)
2.
Continue to Communication
CarPlay.
Apple
3.
Untick the box for the Apple device that shall
no longer start CarPlay automatically when
the USB cable is connected.
4.
Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
5.
Open the app iPod from the app view.
iPod to CarPlay
1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2.
Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on OK.
3.
Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
> The tile with Apple CarPlay is opened and
compatible apps are shown10.
Related information
•
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
Settings for Apple device connected with
CarPlay11.
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Continue to Communication
CarPlay and select setting:
Related information
•
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®.
• Update your iPhone with the latest version of
iOS operating system and ensure that the
apps have been updated.
•
In the event of a problem with CarPlay, disconnect the telephone from the USB port
and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the
app on the telephone that is not working and
then restart the app, or try closing all apps
and restart your phone.
Apple
•
Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
•
Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is connected.
•
If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
•
Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the phone and the car is
broken. Information about supported apps
and compatible telephone models can be
found on Apple's website. You can also
search for CarPlay in the App Store to find
information about apps that are compatible
with CarPlay on your market.
•
CarPlay only works with iPhone12.
To delete the list, the settings must be reset in
the centre display (factory reset).
System volumes
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
11
12
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary depending on market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 485
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Related information
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
Android Auto*
NOTE
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and use
car-adapted apps from an Android device.
Android Auto works with selected Android devices.
When a phone is connected to Android Auto
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to
another media player. Bluetooth is active
while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display, but only
in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre
display using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. A long press on the steering
starts voice recognition control
wheel button
and a short press deactivates.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on the
website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party
apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is
not responsible for the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view. After
Android Auto has been started once, the app will
be started automatically the next time the device
is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated
under settings.
486
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for
Android Auto or its features or applications.
When you use Android Auto, your car
transfers certain information (including its
location) to your connected Android phone.
You are fully responsible for your and any
other person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
•
•
Using Android Auto* (p. 487)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 487)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Using Android Auto*
3.
To use the app Android Auto, the telephone
must be connected to the car's USB port.
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port.
In the cases where there are two USB ports,
the one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2.
Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on OK.
3.
Tap on Android Auto in the app view.
4.
Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on Accept to connect.
> The tile with Android Auto is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
5.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Previously connected Android
1. Connect the phone to the USB port.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the phone is
shown.
2.
Tap on the phone name - the tile with
Android Auto is opened and compatible apps
are shown.
4.
If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the Android Auto app from
the app view.
> The tile with Android Auto is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for a phone that has been connected
the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication
and select setting:
Android Auto runs in the background if another
app is started in the same tile. To show
Android Auto in the tile again - tap on the
Android Auto icon in the app view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 486)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 487)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481)
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Android Auto
•
Tick the box - Android Auto starts automatically when the USB cable is connected.
•
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset has to be executed in order to
clear the list.
System volumes
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
}}
* Option/accessory. 487
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Related information
•
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 486)
Using Android Auto* (p. 487)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
Tips for using Android Auto*
Phone
Here are some useful tips for using Android
Auto.
• Ensure that your apps are updated.
A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system.
•
When starting the car, wait until the centre
display has started, connect the telephone
and then open Android Auto from the app
view.
•
The audio and media system acts as hands-free,
with the facility to remotely control a selection of
the phone's functions. The phone can still be
operated with its own keys even if it is connected
to the car.
In the event of problems with Android Auto,
disconnect your Android phone from the
USB port and then reconnect via USB. Otherwise, try closing the app on the phone and
then restarting the app.
When a phone has been connected online and
connected with the car, it can be used make
calls, send/receive messages, play back media
wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection.
•
When a telephone is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to playback media via
Bluetooth to another media player. The
Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto
is used.
Related information
•
488
The phone is operated from the
centre display, but some operations are also available via voice
recognition and the app menu,
which are accessed from the
right-hand steering wheel keypad.
Android Auto* (p. 486)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Overview
Microphone.
Phone.
Wireless phone charger.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice recognition.
Driver display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Managing phone calls (p. 493)
Managing the phone book (p. 496)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 491)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 492)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 492)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 493)
•
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 493)
•
•
•
•
Wireless phone charger* (p. 497)
Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to
then be able to make calls from the car, send/
receive messages, play back media wirelessly
and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected at once, in which case one of them can
only play back wirelessly. The most recently connected phone will automatically be connected to
make calls, send/receive messages, play back
media and provide an Internet connection. It is
possible to change the use of the phone in the
settings for Bluetooth Devices.
•
•
Settings for phone (p. 496)
Voice recognition (p. 128)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 90)
Audio settings (p. 464)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499)
After the device has been connected/registered
a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be
visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to the Internet via a
phone, tethering must also be activated on the
phone. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth
devices can be stored in the car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the car
from the phone.
Option 1 - search phone from car
1.
Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
Managing text messages (p. 494)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
}}
* Option/accessory. 489
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
2.
3.
To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (portable/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
Option 2 - search car from phone
1.
•
Open the tile for the phone.
•
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on Add phone.
•
•
If there is a phone connected to the car,
. In the pop-up wintap on Change
dow, tap on Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The
list is updated as new devices are
detected.
4.
5.
6.
Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the phone. In which case,
choose to accept in both places.
On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
•
•
490
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
NOTE
Open the tile for the phone.
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on Change
. In the pop-up window, tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
2.
Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3.
To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (portable/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
4.
Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
5.
Select the name of the car on the phone.
6.
A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
7.
Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the external device. In
which case, choose to accept in both places.
8.
On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
•
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
•
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In which
case, delete the phone from the car and then
connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 491)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 492)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 492)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 493)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
•
•
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 493)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
•
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
It is possible to connect a phone to the car automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have
been connected to the car for the first time.
It is only the two last connected phones that can
be connected automatically.
•
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499)
1.
Activate Bluetooth in the phone before setting the car in ignition position I.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hotspot) in the phone must be activated.
2.
Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 492)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 492)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 493)
•
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 493)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
491
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
It is possible to connect a phone to the car manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been
connected to the car for the first time.
1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hotspot) in the phone must be activated.
2.
Open the tile for the phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3.
Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
•
•
492
Phone (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 491)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 492)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 493)
•
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 493)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
•
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499)
Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone
Disconnect a Bluetooth-connected phone from
the car by deactivating Bluetooth on your phone.
When the phone is out of range of the car it is
automatically disconnected. If disconnection
occurs during an active call then the call can be
continued on the phone.
Related information
•
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Settings for phone (p. 496)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 493)
•
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 493)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones
Removing a Bluetooth-connected
phone
It is possible to switch between a number of
Bluetooth-connected phones.
1. Open the tile for the phone.
It is possible to remove phones from the list of
registered Bluetooth devices.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2.
3.
Tap on Change
or drag down the top
view and tap on Settings
Communication Bluetooth Devices
Add device.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
Tap on the phone to be connected.
2.
Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices.
> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
3.
Tap on the phone to be removed.
4.
Tap on Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The phone is no longer registered to the
car.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Related information
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
•
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 492)
•
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 493)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 492)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 493)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
Phone (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone.
Generic illustration.
Making phone calls
1.
Open the tile for the phone.
2.
Select call from: call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is
possible to search or browse in the contact
list. Tap on
in the contact list in order to
add a contact under Favourites.
3.
Press
4.
Tap on
.
to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via the
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad
.
}}
493
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Press Add call.
2.
Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3.
Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4.
Tap on Swap call to switch between the
parties.
to end the active call.
5. Tap on
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
1.
Tap on Join calls to merge the active multiparty call.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver display and the centre display. Manage the call on
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
centre display.
1.
Tap on Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
2.
494
Tap on
to end the call.
Private call
Managing text messages
–
Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone.
In some phones, the message function must be
activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such
cases, they cannot display contacts and messages in the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
• Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function is disconnected and the call
continues on your mobile phone.
• Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched off
and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
•
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130)
•
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 90)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115)
•
•
•
Managing the phone book (p. 496)
Managing text messages (p. 494)
Audio settings (p. 464)
Managing text messages in the centre
display
Text messages are only shown in the centre display if the setting is selected.
Press Messages in the app
view to manage text messages
in the centre display.
Reading text messages in the centre display
Press the icon to get the message
read aloud.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sending text messages in the centre
display13
1. You can reply to a message or create a new
message.
•
•
Reply to message — tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to, then
tap on Answer.
Create new message - tap on Create
new. Select a contact or enter a number.
2.
Compose the message.
3.
Press Send.
Managing text messages in the driver
display
Text messages are only shown in the driver display if the setting is selected.
Message notification
Settings for text messages
It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings.
Settings for text messages on connected phone.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
Related information
2.
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Settings for text messages (p. 495)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message has been read out, it is
possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is
connected to the Internet.
13
• Notification in driver display - displays
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130)
Reading a new text message in the driver
display
– To have the message read aloud – select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
–
message notifications in the centre display's status bar.
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115)
Text Messages
• Notification in centre display - shows
Settings for phone (p. 496)
•
Press Communication
and select settings:
notifications in the driver's display and
incoming messages can be managed
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
• Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Managing text messages (p. 494)
Settings for phone (p. 496)
Press Answer with the steering wheel keypad. A dictation dialogue starts.
Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
* Option/accessory. 495
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Managing the phone book
Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone.
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are sorted
. It is possible to sort by first name or
under
surname, and this setting is adjusted in the telephone setup.
Related information
•
•
•
Browse between the letters and
to find
a matching contact. Depending on existing
contacts in the phone book, only matching
letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on
to search for
a phone number of name in the contact list.
Favourites - tap on
to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
NOTE
Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-connected phone are shown in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.
496
Settings for phone
When the telephone is connected to the car, the
following settings can be made:
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication
select settings:
Phone (p. 488)
• Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible
Settings for phone (p. 496)
to use a ringtone from the phone or the
car. Some phones are not fully compatible
and their ringtones may therefore not be
available for use in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Phone and
• Sort order - select sort order of contact
list.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Settings for text messages (p. 495)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Audio settings (p. 464)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Wireless phone charger*
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
There is a charging plate for wireless phone
charging located under the centre display.
A condition for being able to charge
the phone is that it supports wireless
charging (Qi). Phones not equipped
with wireless charging receivers can
often be supplemented with a shell that makes
wireless charging possible.
2.
Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices and select settings:
• Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
• Previously paired devices - lists connected devices.
• Remove device - removes the connected
device.
• Allowed services for this device - sets
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and as
Internet connection.
• Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth connection.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Settings for phone (p. 496)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
Using the wireless telephone
charger*
The rubber plate under the centre display makes
it possible to charge phones without the need to
use the phone's cable.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Using the wireless telephone charger*
(p. 497)
Wireless phone charger in front of gear lever.
–
Position the phone in the centre of the
charging plate.
> Phone charging is started.
If phone charging does not start, check
that the phone supports wireless
charging (Qi).
If the phone is positioned incorrectly, or if objects
prevent charging on the charging plate, a message is shown in the centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 497
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
WARNING
Keep the phone and charging plate free of
other objects while charging to avoid overheating.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 488)
Wireless phone charger* (p. 497)
Internet-connected car*
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
possible – for example – to use web radio and
music services via apps, download software and
contact your retailer from the car.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with
the car's built-in modem*.
When the car is online, its Internet connection
(Wi-Fi hotspot) can be shared to allow other devices to use the Internet connection14.
Connection status is indicated by a symbol in the
centre display's status bar.
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in further charges.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or the car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and
Customer Privacy Policy at
support.volvocars.com before connecting the car
to the Internet.
14
498
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Related information
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 110)
•
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499)
•
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 500)
•
•
•
Apps (p. 465)
•
•
•
•
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Bluetooth)
Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by
sharing your phone's Internet access and
access several online services in the car.
The phone and network operator must support
tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and
the subscription plan must include data.
1.
No or poor Internet connection (p. 503)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 502)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 503)
2.
If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the centre display top view.
3.
In the centre display: Press Communication
Bluetooth Devices.
4.
Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection.
> Your car is now connected to the Internet
via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 504)
Volvo ID (p. 26)
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 504)
To be able to connect the car to the Internet
via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone
has to have already been connected to the
car via Bluetooth for a first time. Ensure that
the personal hotspot (portable/personal hotspot) is activated in your phone.
Related information
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 500)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 489)
•
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500)
•
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 503)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497)
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or the car modem*.
* Option/accessory. 499
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Wi-Fi)
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by sharing your phone's Internet access and access
several online services in the car.
The phone and network operator must support
tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and
the subscription plan must include data.
500
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it
is used.
When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved
for future use. When the maximum number of
saved phones (50) is reached, the first connected phones are deleted. To show a list of
saved networks or manually delete saved networks, go to Settings Communication
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
For cars equipped with Volvo On Call*, it is possible to establish an Internet connection via the
car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM).
When the car is connected to the Internet via the
car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this
connection.
1.
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi connection, are described in a separate section.
1.
Activate tethering (portable/personal hotspot) on the phone.
2.
Press Settings in the top view.
3.
Continue to Communication
4.
Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Wi-Fi.
5.
Tap on the network name of the network to
be connected.
6.
Enter the network password.
2.
Press Settings in the top view.
7.
If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
> The car connects to the network.
3.
Press Communication
Internet.
4.
Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car modem Internet.
Wi-Fi.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 503)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 503)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 504)
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under
the cargo area floor.
Car Modem
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
5.
6.
If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 503)
Settings for car modem (p. 501)
Settings for car modem15
The car is equipped with a modem that can be
used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also
possible to share the Internet connection via
Wi-Fi.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication Car Modem
Internet and select settings:
• Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
Related information
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 500)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 503)
• Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
• Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
• Network
Select network operator - automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
modem will attempt to connect to the Internet when the car is abroad and outside its
home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
for data traffic abroad with your network provider in your home country.
• SIM card PIN
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be
entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code
shall be required for access to the SIM card.
15
Only cars with Volvo On Call.
* Option/accessory. 501
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
2.
Press Communication
Hotspot.
When the car is online, its Internet connection
can be shared to allow other devices to use the
Internet connection16.
3.
Tap on Network name and name the
shared connection.
Car Wi-Fi
4.
Tap on Password and select a password to
be entered on connecting devices.
5.
Tap on Frequency band and select the frequency on which the hotspot is to transmit
data. Note that selection of frequency band
is not available in all markets.
6.
Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7.
If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a connection source, confirm the option to change
connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hotspot).
Press Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
•
•
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 110)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 503)
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in further charges from your network operator.
The network operator (SIM card) must support
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
502
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
16
Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
No or poor Internet connection
Factors that affect the Internet connection.
The amount of data transferred is dependent on
the services or apps in use in the car. For example, streaming audio can require large amounts of
data which requires a good connection and good
signal strength.
Phone to car
The speed of the Internet connection may vary
depending on the location of the phone in the
car. Move the phone closer to the centre display
in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure
that there is no source of interference in
between.
Phone to network operator
The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the present location. Poor
network coverage may occur, for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or
indoors. The speed also depends on the agreement you have with your network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, contact your network operator.
Related information
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 504)
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Continue to Communication
Saved networks.
3.
Tap on Forget alongside the network to be
removed.
4.
Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the network in future.
Wi-Fi
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously by
restoring factory settings. Please note that all
user data and system settings are reset to original factory settings.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 503)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 121)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500)
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the Internet connection
then it may help to restart the phone.
* Option/accessory. 503
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
•
•
•
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz17.
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at the
same time then it may result in reduced performance.
Related information
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
User terms and conditions and data
sharing
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
The first time certain services and apps are
started, a pop-up window with the headings
Terms and conditions and Data sharing may
be shown.
The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user
terms and conditions and policy for data sharing.
By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that
certain information is sent from the car. This is
required so that certain services and apps can
have full functionality.
Data sharing for services and apps required can
be set in the centre display's settings menu.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
Data sharing can be set from the centre display's
settings menu.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 504)
2.
Press System
3.
Select Data sharing to activate or deactivate data sharing.
4.
When data sharing is activated, settings for
individual services and apps can be changed
in the list below.
When data sharing is deactivated, the earlier settings for individual services and apps remain
available when data sharing is reactivated.
Related information
•
17
504
Privacy and data.
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 504)
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Compatible media formats
Format
File extension
Max file size
4 GB
The following file formats must be used for
media playback.
AVI
.avi
Audio codec
MP3, AC3
Audio files
AVI (DivX)
.avi, divx
Subtitles
XSUB
ASF
.asf, .wmv
MKV
.mkv
Special functions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference
Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more
information and software
tools to convert your files
into DivX Home Theater
video.
Format
File extension
Codec
MP3
.mp3
MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC
.m4a, .m4b, .aac
AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)
WMA
.wma
WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV
.wav
LPCM
FLAC
.flac
FLAC
Video files
Subtitles
Format
File extension
SubViewer
.sub
SubRip
.srt
SSA
.ssa
DivX®
DivX certified devices have been tested for highquality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
DivX films.
Profile
DivX Home Theater
Video codec
DivX, MPEG-4
Format
File extension
Resolution
720x576
MP4
.mp4, m4v
Bit rate
4.8Mbps
MPEG-PS
.mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
Frame rate
30 fps
File extension
.divx, .avi
Related information
•
•
•
Media player (p. 474)
Video (p. 478)
Playing back DivX® (p. 479)
505
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Technical specifications for USB
devices
Voltage supply 5 V
Storage space on hard disk
Current supply max. 3.0 A
Max number
It is possible to view how much free space there
is on the car's hard disk.
Storage information for the car's hard disk,
including total capacity, available capacity and
how much space is used for installed apps can
be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Files
15 000
Related information
Folders
1 000
Folder levels
8
Playlists
100
Items in a playlist
1 000
Subfolders
No limit
The following specifications must be met to
allow the contents of the USB devices to be
read.
No folder structure will be shown in the centre
display during playback.
Technical specification for USB A
connector
•
•
•
•
Type A socket
Version 2.0
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 2.1 A
Technical specification for USB C
connector
•
•
506
•
•
Type C socket
Version 3.1
Related information
•
Media via USB port (p. 480)
•
Apps (p. 465)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
License agreement for audio and
media
DivX®
Gracenote®
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following texts
are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/
developers.
Dirac Unison®
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes
are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
used under licence.
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of
specific performance venues. Using advanced
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high-precision
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra,
it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in
perfect unison.
This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX®
Home Theater video files up to 576p (including .avi, .divx). Download free software on
www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
digital video.
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other countries.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to
play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
how to complete the registration.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
}}
507
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program to
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including name, artist,
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online
servers or embedded databases (together called
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data
in accordance with the intended end-user functions for this program or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote
software and Gracenote servers for your own
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote
software or any Gracenote data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers will be terminated if you violate
these restrictions. If your license is terminated
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers.
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
will under no circumstances have any obligation
508
to pay you for any information you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything about who you are.
Additional information is available on the web
page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote software and everything included
in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is".
Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the
Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote servers or to change data
categories for any reason that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers are fault-free
or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote
servers will operate without interruption. Gracenote has no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
company reserves the right to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
}}
509
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
510
Unicode: 5.1.0
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Declaration of Conformity
}}
511
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU.
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
The United Arab
Emirates:
512
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Kazakhstan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
}}
513
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射
■ 最大
率(EIRP)
率谱密度
天线增益
天线增益
≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限
20 ppm
■ 帯外发射
率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)
•
•
•
•
•
率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率
大发射
率(包括额外
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业
使用
4.使用微
率无线电设备,必须忍
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
514
10dBi 时
10dBi 时
装射频
产生有害干扰
各种无线电业
率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采
的干扰或工业
科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
措施消除干扰后方可继续
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을
적으로 하며,
든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
}}
515
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司
變更頻率
商號或使用者均不得擅自
加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
電通信
前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業
科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
516
Sound, media and Internet (p. 464)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Media player (p. 474)
Gracenote® (p. 478)
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
New tyres
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
Tyre economy
•
•
The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre
information sticker found on the driver's side door
pillar (between the front door and the rear door).
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is therefore important that the new tyres also have this
marking in order for the car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel consumption to be maintained.
1
518
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discolouration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is
then manufactured in week 07, year 2017.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squealing tyres.
•
•
•
Tyre wear increases with speed.
•
The tyres must have the same direction of
rotation during their entire service life.
•
When you change tyres, the tyres with the
best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels
to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy
braking.
•
If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims
permanently.
Correct wheel alignment is very important.
Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
and travelling comfort.
Tyre rotation
The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving
style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition
affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
WHEELS AND TYRES
and rear wheels should be switched with each
other. A suitable distance for the first change is
approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then
at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between
tyres have already occurred, then the least worn
tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
and leads to the car continuing forwards in a
straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete
loss of control over the car. This is why it is
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
before the front wheels.
Storing wheels and tyres
When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on
wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned
lying on their sides on the floor.
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on
their sides or standing upright, but not hung up.
IMPORTANT
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark
place, and should never be stored close to
solvents, petrol, oils, etc.
•
•
WARNING
Dimension designation for tyre
Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
Volvo are specified to meet stringent
requirements for stability and driving characteristics. Unapproved combinations of
wheel rim size and tyre size may have a
negative effect on the car's stability and
driving characteristics.
Designations for tyre dimension, load index and
speed rating.
Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim
size and tyre size is not covered by the
new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any costs
caused by such installations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 522)
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 521)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 521)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628)
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, for example: 235/55 R18 100V.
235
Tyre width (mm)
55
Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
R
Radial ply
18
Rim diameter in inches
100
Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
V
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h (149 mph).)
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres.
}}
* Option/accessory. 519
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Speed rating
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum permitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The
only exception to these regulations is winter
tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used.
If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be
driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which
the car can be driven depends on road conditions, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
2
520
Q
160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h (118 mph)
H
210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph)
W
270 km/h (168 mph)
Y
300 km/h (186 mph)
Both those with metal studs and those without.
WARNING
The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
specifications, which can be found in the printed owner's manual. If a tyre with too low a
load index or speed rating is used, it may
overheat and be damaged.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres (p. 518)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 520)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628)
Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed
rating for tyres (p. 629)
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
7,5
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
18
Rim diameter in inches
50,5
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Related information
•
•
•
Tyres (p. 518)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres' rotation direction
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
Related information
•
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
•
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan.
•
Tyres should only be switched between front
and rear positions, never between left and
right-hand sides, or vice versa.
•
If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely
affected.
•
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
Tyres (p. 518)
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread
will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 518)
521
WHEELS AND TYRES
Checking tyre pressure
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving
stability, saves fuel and extends the service life of
the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Driving on
tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could
result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort,
road noise and driving characteristics.
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the tyre
pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to
achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal
wear. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high
may cause uneven wear on the tyres.
WARNING
•
•
Tyre pressure that is too low is the most
common cause of tyre failure and may
result in serious cracks in the tyre, the
tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with
unexpected loss of control of the car and
increased risk of personal injury.
Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce
the load capacity of the car.
Cold tyres
The tyre pressure must be checked when the
tyres are cold.
522
Tyres are considered cold when they have the
same temperature as the surrounding air.
This temperature is normally reached when the
car has been parked for at least three hours.
After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile)
these tyres are considered as warm. If you have
to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first
check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to
a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the
pump.
When the outside temperature changes, the tyre
pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to
decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure
regularly and adjust to the correct pressure,
which is specified on the car's tyre information
plate or certification label.
If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are
warm then you must never release any air. The
tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for
the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with
tyre pressure equal to or below the recommendation for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far
too low.
Adjusting tyre pressure
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain
the recommended tyre pressure.
Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold
tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance
and optimal wear.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
1.
Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre
and then press the tyre pressure gauge
firmly down onto the valve.
2.
Inflate to the recommended pressure.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 522)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524)
Tyres (p. 518)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
3.
Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4.
Check the tyres visually for any implanted
nails or other objects that could puncture the
tyre and cause leakage.
5.
Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts,
bumps or other irregularities.
6.
Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare
tyre*.
NOTE
If you have over-inflated, release air by pressing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve.
Then check the pressure again using the tyre
pressure gauge.
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pressure table or on the tyre pressure plate.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 522)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 542)
Recommended tyre pressure
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows
which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions.
Approved tyre pressures (p. 630)
The plate displays the designation for the factoryfitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and
tyre pressure.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if optimum noise and travelling
comfort are desired.
Related information
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 522)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 630)
* Option/accessory. 523
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
The tyre pressure monitoring system, Indirect
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives
a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of the
car's tyres is too low.
Symbol
Explanation
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tyre pressure.
If there is a fault in the system the
tyre pressure warning symbol
flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains illuminated.
System description
The tyre pressure monitoring system measures
differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be
able to determine whether they have the correct
tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the
tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is
its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with
each other the system can determine whether
one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring system is referred to generically as TPMS.
524
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the tyre
should be cold and have the air pressure recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the
tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If
the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what
the correct air pressure level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which shows when the air pressure in one or
more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol
for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres
as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air
pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is
too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which
can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also
reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life,
and can affect car handling and stopping ability.
Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre
maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for
low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
the indicator symbol illuminates.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the system
is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system
fault indicator is combined with the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When the system
detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display
will flash for about one minute and then remain
illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when
the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
When the symbol is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
affected.
A TPMS system fault can occur for several reasons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or
changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
functioning correctly.
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly
with TPMS.
Messages on the instrument panel
When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
driver display and a message is shown.
• Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
after fill
• Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable
• Tyre pressure system Service required
To bear in mind
•
Always calibrate the system after a wheel
change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pressures.
•
If you change to tyres of a different size to
the ones fitted at the factory, the system
must be calibrated for these tyres to avoid
false warnings.
•
If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that
the tyre pressure monitoring system does not
work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
•
The system does not replace the need for
regular tyre inspection and maintenance.
•
It is not possible to switch off the tyre pressure monitoring system.
WARNING
•
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
•
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 525)
Calibrate the system for tyre
pressure monitoring*
In order for the system for tyre pressure monitoring, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference value for
the tyre pressure must be determined. This must
be performed each time the tyres are changed
or the tyre pressure is changed.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre
pressure should be adjusted in accordance with
Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Following which, the system must be recalibrated.
1.
Switch off the car.
2.
Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the door pillar on the driver's side.
3.
Start the car.
4.
Open the Car status app in the app view.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 527)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 528)
}}
* Option/accessory. 525
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
5.
Press TPMS.
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is
started.
6.
Press Calibrate.
7.
Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure
in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
8.
Run the car until calibration is complete.
NOTE
Calibration is performed when the car is
driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).
> When sufficient data has been collected
to enable the system to detect low tyre
pressure, the tyres in the centre display
change colour from grey to green. The
system provides no additional confirmation that the calibration is complete.
Remember to always calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system when you have
changed a wheel or if the tyre pressure has
been changed according to the tyre pressure
label or tyre pressure table.
If correct reference values have not been set,
the system may not warn correctly about low
tyre pressure.
If the car's ignition is switched off before
calibration is complete, the tyres in the
centre display change colour from grey to
green upon next start-up, even if calibration is not complete. Perform calibration
again and allow it to complete within the
same operating cycle to ensure that the
calibration is carried out correctly.
The car must be stationary with the engine
running for you to have access to the calibration button and start the calibration process.
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is invisible and odourless, but highly
toxic. For this reason, calibration must always
be performed outside or in a workshop with
exhaust extraction.
If start-up of calibration fails, the following
message appears: Calibration
unsuccessful. Try again..
Related information
•
•
•
526
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 522)
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 527)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 528)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
See tyre pressure statue in the
centre display*
All tyres grey:
•
•
With the system for tyre pressure monitoring,
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(ITPMS), tyre pressure status can be viewed in
the centre display.
Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph)
may be required for the system to become active.
All tyres grey and a message:
Checking status
1.
• Tyre pressure system Temporarily
Open the Car status app in the app view.
Green tyre:
•
2.
Tap on TPMS to show the status of the
tyres.
The tyre pressure is above the limit value for
a warning.
•
•
3
4
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
• Tyre pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working correctly, contact a
workshop4.
Yellow tyre:
The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure by inflating as
soon as possible. Calibrate the system after
the tyre pressure has been adjusted.
All tyres yellow:
Status indication
The graphics in the centre display show the status for each tyre3.
Calibration in progress.
Unknown status.
The pressure is too low in two or more tyres.
Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures by
inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the
system after the tyre pressures have been
adjusted.
Related information
•
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 525)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 528)
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524)
Car status (p. 562)
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory. 527
WHEELS AND TYRES
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
When the tyre pressure monitoring system,
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(ITPMS) gives a warning, the tyre pressure in
one or more of the car's tyres is too low and
action is required.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for the system is illuminated and the Tyre
pressure low message is shown.
1.
Switch off the car.
2.
Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with
a tyre pressure gauge.
3.
Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as
indicated on the tyre pressure label on the
door pillar on the driver's side.
4.
Perform calibration of the system via the
centre display after tyre pressure adjustment.
•
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 525)
•
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 527)
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 542)
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WARNING
Note that the indicator symbol does not
extinguish until the low tyre pressure has
been rectified and new calibration has been
performed.
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
•
•
528
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 522)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
When changing wheels
Tool kit
Jack*
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant
instructions for removing and fitting wheels.
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are found in the car's cargo
area.
The jack can be used to raise the car, for example, to change to the spare wheel.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updating the software at each change of tyre dimension. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimensions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Removing a wheel (p. 531)
Fitting the wheels (p. 533)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628)
Tool kit (p. 529)
Winter wheels (p. 536)
Spare wheel* (p. 534)
Wheel bolts (p. 530)
The foam block under the cargo area floor contains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool
for removing the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a
jack and wheel wrench are included, as well as a
package with disposable gloves and a bag for the
damaged wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553)
When changing wheels (p. 529)
Jack* (p. 529)
}}
* Option/accessory. 529
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
IMPORTANT
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use,
such as when changing a wheel after a
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the
specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage
jack is recommended. In this instance,
follow the instructions for use that come
with the equipment.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
Related information
•
•
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553)
Tool kit (p. 529)
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the
hubs.
Related information
•
•
Removing a wheel (p. 531)
Fitting the wheels (p. 533)
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
tightening may damage the nuts and the
bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
several days after the change. Temperature
differences and vibration may mean that they
are not attached equally as tightly.
Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
530
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Removing a wheel
Instructions for removing a wheel when changing wheels. Wheel changes must always be performed correctly.
IMPORTANT
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and set the gear
selector in Park position (P).
•
Chock the wheels standing on the ground
using solid wood blocks or large stones.
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
•
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use,
such as when changing a wheel after a
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the
specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage
jack is recommended. In this instance,
follow the instructions for use that come
with the equipment.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
•
Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised
on a jack.
1.
Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
2.
Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car has
a manual gearbox.
3.
Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools
for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted
in the foam block.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
4.
Chock in front of and behind the wheels that
remain on the ground. Use, for example,
heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
}}
* Option/accessory. 531
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
5.
Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position as per
the instructions.
8.
When raising the car, it is important that the
jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody. The triangle
markings in the plastic cover indicate the
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There
are two jacking points on each side of the
car. There is a recess for the jack at each
point.
11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away
from the side of the car as possible, at which
point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the
direction of the car.
12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel
to be removed to move freely. Remove the
wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into the
wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible.
532
6.
Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
7.
With the car still on the ground, use the
wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards
(anticlockwise).
9.
When changing wheels (p. 529)
Raise the car (p. 565)
Jack* (p. 529)
Tool kit (p. 529)
Fitting the wheels (p. 533)
Position the jack on level, firm and non-slippery ground under the jacking point that will
be used.
10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so
that it makes contact with the car's jacking
point. Check that the head of the jack (or the
lift arms at a workshop) is correctly positioned in the jacking point so that the bump
in the centre of the head fits into the jacking
point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Fitting the wheels
Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing
wheels.
NOTE
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use, such
as when changing a wheel after a puncture.
Only the jack belonging to the specific model
is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to
be jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
WARNING
1.
•
Apply the parking brake and set the gear
selector in Park position (P).
Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2.
•
Chock the wheels standing on the ground
using solid wood blocks or large stones.
Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
•
Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised
on a jack.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3.
Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4.
Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check
the tightening torque with a torque wrench.
5.
Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
}}
533
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
several days after the change. Temperature
differences and vibration may mean that they
are not attached equally as tightly.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
534
When changing wheels (p. 529)
Raise the car (p. 565)
Jack* (p. 529)
Tool kit (p. 529)
Removing a wheel (p. 531)
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can
be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel.
The spare tyre is only designed for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as
possible.
The car's driving characteristics can be changed
when the spare wheel is used and the ground
clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an
automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is
being used.
Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained
regardless of the position of the temporary spare
wheel on the car.
If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can
be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
WARNING
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the
car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one spare wheel of the type
"Temporary Spare" at the same time.
•
The car may have different driving characteristics while driving with the spare
wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced
with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
•
The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel, which affects the car's ground
clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do
not machine-wash the car.
•
Follow the manufacturer's recommended
tyre pressure for the spare wheel.
•
On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the
rear axle can be disengaged.
•
If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
axle then it is not possible to use snow
chains at the same time.
•
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
IMPORTANT
The car must not be driven with tyres of different sizes or with a spare tyre other than
the one supplied with the car. Using differentsized wheels can cause serious damage to
the car's transmission.
Taking out the spare wheel
Follow these instructions for handling the spare
wheel.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2.
Lift out the foam block with its tools.
3.
Undo the retaining screw.
4.
Lift out the spare wheel.
Related information
•
•
Spare wheel* (p. 534)
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553)
Storing the punctured tyre
1.
Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam
block and put the wheel in the bag.
2.
Put the tools back in their right place in the
foam block and lift it back into the car.
3.
Screw in the foam block using the mounting
screws and then fold down the cargo area
floor.
4.
Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The foam block contains all the tools for changing a wheel.
Storing the punctured tyre
1.
Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam
block and put the wheel in the bag.
Related information
2.
Screw back the mounting screw that held the
tyre in place.
3.
Put the tools back in their right place in the
foam block and lift it back into the car.
4.
Then fold down the cargo area floor and
place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 529)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
* Option/accessory. 535
WHEELS AND TYRES
Winter wheels
Tread depth
Snow chains
Winter wheels are adapted for winter road conditions.
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches).
Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help
to improve the traction in winter conditions.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
mark which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs
settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre,
and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
536
Related information
•
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 529)
Winter driving (p. 429)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 521)
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow
chains are permitted.
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to the car and lead to an accident.
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
IMPORTANT
Snow chains can be used on the car with the
following restrictions:
•
Volvo does not recommend the use of
show chains on wheel dimensions
greater than 18 inches.
•
Always follow the mounting instructions
from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the
chains as tensioned as possible and tension them at regular intervals.
•
Snow chains must only be used on the
front wheels (also applies to all-wheel
drive cars).
•
In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels are fitted that have a different size to the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance
must be maintained between the chains
and brakes, suspension and body components.
•
Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must
never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under
any circumstances.
•
•
•
Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and
tyres.
Driving with snow chains may have a
negative effect on the car's driving characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as
well as braking with locked wheels.
Some types of chain that are firmly tensioned affect brake components and
must therefore NOT be used.
You can obtain more information on snow chains
from a Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 429)
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit5, is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the air pressure in the tyre.
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the
puncture repair kit.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works
as a temporary repair.
NOTE
The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres
with tread punctures but has limited ability to
seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use
the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres
displaying larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary
emergency puncture repair and is approved
by Volvo.
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when
driving with snow chains.
}}
* Option/accessory. 537
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Using a puncture repair kit
Sealing fluid bottle
Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Switch
Overview
Connecting
Sealing fluid bottle
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the
bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on
the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally
hazardous waste.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
•
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 538)
•
Tyres (p. 518)
5
538
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 542)
Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)
Electrical cable
Air hose
Pressure reducing valve
Protective cap
Label, maximum permitted speed
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Pressure gauge
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tyre sealing system:
•
The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber
latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These
substances are harmful if swallowed.
•
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:
•
•
•
•
Store out of the reach of children.
Harmful if ingested.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
the skin. If sealing fluid has come into
contact with your clothes, remove them.
•
Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical
attention.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
and locate the electrical cable and the air
hose.
•
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention.
4.
Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
sealing fluid bottle.
•
Disposal: Dispose of this material and its
container at a hazardous or special waste
collection point.
5.
Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder.
WARNING
•
Do not remove the bottle when the puncture repair kit is being used.
•
Do not remove the air hose when the
puncture repair kit is being used.
1.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant
leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it
cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder
again. Bottle removal must be performed at a
workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
2.
Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a
reminder to observe the speed limit. You
should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
}}
539
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
7.
Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
8.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
pressure drops after approximately
30 seconds.
9.
Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
540
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is
3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.
WARNING
If the bottle is removed in the wrong order,
sealing fluid could spill out.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and
refit the dust cap on the tyre.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area.
WHEELS AND TYRES
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre
is insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Call roadside assistance
for recovery.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
(19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi).
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
15. Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bottom
of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor
must be switched off.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Maximum mileage with tyres containing sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow
local regulations related to waste management.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 542)
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
541
WHEELS AND TYRES
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair
kit.
1.
The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
2.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
3.
Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4.
542
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
run for more than 10 minutes.
5.
Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side
door pillar. Release air using the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6.
Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
7.
Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow
local regulations related to waste management.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523)
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 538)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
WARNING
Overview of the passenger compartment's interior and storage locations.
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
Front seat
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
items on sensitive surfaces.
Storage compartment for legroom, electrical socket and
USB port above the wireless phone charger*, cup holder
and storage under armrest in tunnel console.
Rear seat
Storage compartment in door panel, card holder on left
of steering wheel, storage under driver's seat1, glovebox
with extensible hook and sun visor.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Emptying the ashtray* (p. 546)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 545)
Electrical sockets (p. 546)
Using the glovebox (p. 548)
Sun visors (p. 549)
Tunnel console (p. 545)
Wireless phone charger* (p. 497)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481)
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in
the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front
seat backrest and also USB ports* in the tunnel console.
1
544
A maximum of 1 kg (2.2 lbs) can be stored here.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Tunnel console
WARNING
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
Using the cigarette lighter*
The cigarette lighter can be a complement to the
12 V socket in the front section of the tunnel
console.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is located
under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid
leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in
the cup holder, since this may trigger the
alarm.
Storage compartment with cup holder for
driver and passenger.
IMPORTANT
Waste bin*2 that can be removed and emptied.
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
items on sensitive surfaces.
Storage compartment under the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment. There is
also a USB port underneath*.
2
Only in cars with automatic gearbox.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Emptying the ashtray* (p. 546)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 545)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
Electrical sockets (p. 546)
Climate controls (p. 190)
Cigarette lighter in tunnel console, front seat.
1.
Press the button on the lighter.
> The button jumps up when the lighter
starts to glow.
2.
Pull the lighter out from the socket and use
the glow to give a light.
3.
Refit the lighter in the socket.
WARNING
Take care when the lighter is activated so that
the glowing part does not, for example, damage the interior or injure passengers.
}}
* Option/accessory. 545
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
Emptying the ashtray* (p. 546)
Emptying the ashtray*
Electrical sockets
When there is a cigarette lighter fitted in the car
there is a detachable ashtray in the tunnel console.
There is one 12 V electrical socket in the tunnel
console and one 12 V electrical socket* in the
cargo area.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
12 V electrical socket
1.
Detach the ashtray by pulling it straight up
and empty the contents.
2.
Refit the ashtray in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Exercise caution with smouldering glow and
ash so that they do not damage the interior or
injure passengers, for example. Only extinguish cigarettes on the intended surface.
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players,
cooler boxes and mobile phones.
Related information
•
•
546
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 545)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Using electrical sockets
12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players,
cooler boxes and mobile phones.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's electrical system must be set in the lowest ignition
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
the starter battery level does not become too low.
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
Using electrical sockets (p. 547)
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked,
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is
switched off and the car is not locked, or is
locked with double lock temporarily deactivated,
then the sockets continue to be active for a further seven minutes.
NOTE
WARNING
•
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage the
socket or come loose when driving.
•
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver or
electrical system for example.
•
Position the accessory so that it is not at
risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
the event of heavy braking or collision.
•
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can burn
passengers or the interior.
Using 12 V sockets
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk of
discharging the starter battery, which can limit
functionality.
1.
Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front
of the socket and plug in the accessory's
connector.
Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when the
car's electrical system is disconnected or if
preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they are not in
use in order to avoid the starter battery being
discharged.
2.
Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
not in use or if the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
socket.
}}
* Option/accessory. 547
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Related information
•
•
Electrical sockets (p. 546)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
The printed owner's manual and maps can be
kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also
space for a pen and card holder.
The key's designated storage space. The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Glovebox with extensible hook.
The hook on the glovebox can be extended when
the glovebox is open so that it can be used after
the glovebox has been closed.
Locking and unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the
accompanying key.
548
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Sun visors
There are sun visors in the roof in front of the
driver and the front seat passenger which can
be folded down and angled out to the side when
necessary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Activating cooling
Deactivating cooling
–
Pull out the key.
–
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).
Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving
the control to the end position toward the
passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
Private locking (p. 253)
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically
when the lid is lifted.
The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g.
cards or tickets.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 544)
* Option/accessory. 549
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Cargo area
Recommendations for loading
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it
possible to transport and secure large objects.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat,
the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use
the load retaining eyelets or bag holders available
for holding the load securely in place. The parcel
shelf can be both easily removed and stored
under the cargo area floor to make space for
bulky loads.
There are a number of things to remember when
loading the car.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
Bag hooks (p. 551)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 552)
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.
Loading in the cargo area
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
•
•
Centre the load.
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553)
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
550
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of the
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the
rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch* in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Related information
•
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 552)
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 171)
•
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
(p. 552)
•
Roof load and loading on load carriers
(p. 551)
•
•
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423)
Weights (p. 617)
Roof load and loading on load
carriers
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers.
Bag hooks
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their
contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
There is a bag hook in the side panel on each
side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Follow the car's specifications with regard to
weights and maximum permitted load.
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
Weights (p. 617)
}}
* Option/accessory. 551
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Under the floor hatch*
1.
Lift the handle in the centre of the cargo
area floor and fold up the floor.
2.
Move the cargo area floor forward to upright
position and fit it in the adjustment groove on
each side.
> It is now possible to hang bags with handles at a suitable height on the hooks.
Load retaining eyelets
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.
552
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
Fitting and removing the safety net*
(p. 553)
In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and
fold down the hatch.
2.
Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
3.
Adjust the centre seat's head restraint
upwards so that the steel tubes do not block
the hatch opening.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
•
1.
WARNING
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
Weights (p. 617)
If the private locking* function is used then the
hatch must be closed.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
Private locking (p. 253)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 552)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Folding up the cargo area floor
Fitting and removing the safety net*
The cargo area floor can be secured in raised
position using the support arm.
The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
1.
Grip the handle to fold up the cargo area
floor.
2.
Fold up the support arm and secure the end
in the socket on the underside of the cargo
area floor.
Fitting the safety net
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly
and that the puller-straps are hooked in properly.
Damaged safety nets must not be used.
NOTE
With forward mounting, the safety net is most
easily mounted via one of the rear doors.
1.
Unfolding the safety net.
For reasons of safety, the safety net must always
be fastened and anchored as described below.
> The cargo area floor remains in raised
position.
Related information
•
Cargo area (p. 550)
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can
be secured two different locations in the car:
•
•
Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
Front fitting - behind the front seats.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.
}}
* Option/accessory. 553
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
2.
Hook one retaining hook of the net into the
front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you.
Remove any clothing hooks from the roof
bracket by turning it a quarter turn clockwise
on the left-hand side and a quarter turn anticlockwise on the right-hand side respectively.
4.
Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear
roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in the
cargo area.
Front fitting.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat and backrest hard against the
net when they are moved back again - only
adjust until the seat or backrest makes contact with the net.
Rear fitting.
3.
Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
roof mounting on the opposite side - the
telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks
facilitate alignment.
Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.
Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front
roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps
into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat
slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are
straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly.
IMPORTANT
If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards
hard into the safety net, the net and roof
mounts may be damaged.
5.
554
Tension the safety net with the anchoring
straps.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Removing the safety net
The safety net can be easily removed and folded
up.
1.
Reduce safety net tension by pressing the
button in the anchoring strap lock and feeding out a little of the anchoring strap on each
side.
2.
Press in the catches and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
3.
Undo the upper attachments and release the
net from the roof mountings.
4.
Fold up the net and store it in its case.
Removing and storing the parcel
shelf in the car
The parcel shelf can be removed to increase the
size of the cargo area.
Removing parcel shelf
The removed parcel shelf can be stored under
the cargo area floor.
Refit any clothing hook if required.
Related information
•
•
Fold up the cargo area floor and secure it in
raised position with the support arm.
Recommendations for loading (p. 550)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 552)
Storing the parcel shelf
Detach the parcel shelf's lifting eyes on both
sides.
Unhook the parcel shelf at the front edge
and remove it.
Turn the upper side of the parcel shelf downwards and lower it into the space with the
rear part facing forwards.
}}
555
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
With folding cargo area floor:
First aid kit
Warning triangle
1.
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap on
the right-hand side of the cargo area.
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Related information
Storage spaces
•
Cargo area (p. 550)
The warning triangle is located in the compartment on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
Fold up the folding cargo area floor forwards
to be able to lower the parcel shelf downwards with the upper side turned down and
the rear part facing forwards.
2.
Fold the cargo area floor back to level position.
Related information
•
556
Cargo area (p. 550)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Open the hatch by first turning the knob a
quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from
its brackets in the top and bottom edges.
Press the latch that secures the warning triangle slightly to the right and remove the
case.
Remove the warning triangle from the case,
unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are
properly secured in their storage space and that
the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
•
•
Cargo area (p. 550)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
557
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
•
•
560
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network
for secure data transfer between your car and
the workshop. Your workshop visit will be simpler and more efficient when the transfer of diagnostic information and software can take place
via the workshop's network.
When you reach the workshop for your visit, your
technician may want to connect your car to the
workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform faulttracing and software download. For this type of
communication, the car only connects to the
workshop's network. It is therefore not possible
to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such
as at home, but only the workshop's specific network.
Car status (p. 562)
Manual connection to the workshop
Book service and repair (p. 562)
Manual connection is normally handled by the
service technician. The technician uses your
remote control key's buttons to connect the car,
which is why it is important to bring a key with
buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press
three times on the lock button on the remote
control key to connect the car to the workshop's
network via Wi-Fi.
Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38)
•
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 568)
•
•
Brake system maintenance (p. 403)
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network,
symbol appears in the centre display.
the
WARNING
The car must not be driven when connected
to the workshop's networks and systems.
Related information
•
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
•
Book service and repair (p. 562)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Download Center
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car1.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
•
•
•
searching for and updating system software
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
downloading, updating and uninstalling apps.
Related information
•
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 561)
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 466)
Updating apps (p. 467)
Deleting apps (p. 467)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
System updates are intended for the online and
infotainment components in the car. If system
software updates are available, the updates can
be made all at once or one at a time.
Searching for update
For system updates to be possible, the car must be connected to the Internet2.
System updates are handled
via the Download Centre app
in the centre display's application view. If no search for available updates has
been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search is performed.
No search is performed if a software installation
is in progress. A number on the System
updates button shows how many updates are
available. A tap on the button shows a list of the
updates that can be installed in the car. If an
update is available, the New software updates
available message is also shown in the centre
display's status bar.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the ignition is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next time
the car is used.
Update all system software
–
Update individual system software
programs
–
1
2
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then the Install all option can
be selected at the System updates button
instead.
Select Install for the software required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 561
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Cancelling software download
Car status
–
Book service and repair4
The car's general status can be shown in the
centre display along with the opportunity to book
service3.
This service provides a convenient way to book
a service and workshop visit directly in the car.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message will
appear in the driver display and at the top of the
centre display. The service date is determined by
how much time has passed, hours that the
engine has been running, or distance driven
since the last service.
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced the button Install at the start of the
download.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled.
The Car status app is started
from app view in the centre display and has four tabs:
Deactivating the background search for
software update
Automatic background search for software
updates is activated when the car is delivered
from the factory, but this function can be deactivated.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press System
3.
Deselect Auto Software Update.
Download Centre.
Related information
•
•
•
3
4
562
•
•
•
•
Download Center (p. 561)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
Messages - status messages
Status - checking the oil level
TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
Appointments - appointment information
and car information3.
Related information
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 94)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 571)
•
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
Book service and repair (p. 562)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 564)
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Before the service can be used
•
Create a Volvo ID and register the Volvo ID
to the car.
•
Select the Volvo retailer you would like to
contact by going to www.volvocars.com and
logging in.
•
To send and receive booking information, the
car must be connected to the Internet5.
3.
Press the Request appointment button.
4.
Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled
in.
5.
Make sure that the desired Workshop is
filled in.
6.
Fill in the field Tap to write information to
the workshop if there is anything you would
like done during the workshop visit or any
other important information to your workshop.
Book a service
When you decide to book a service from your car,
the information will be sent via you Internet connection5.
7.
Fill in the appointment request when desired or
when a message stating that service or repairs
are needed is shown in the driver display and at
the top of the centre display.
Press the Send appointment request button.
> You will receive an appointment suggestion to your car within a couple of days6.
You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and log in.
In certain markets, once you have sent the
appointment request, the message that
the car needs service is extinguished in
the driver display.
8.
1.
Open the Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the Appointments button.
5
6
7
Press the Cancel request button to cancel
your request.
The booking enquiry sent from the car includes
car information that facilitates workshop planning.
The retailer comes back with a digital booking
proposal. You also have information on your
retailer available in the car and can contact your
workshop at any time.
Accept the appointment suggestion
When the car has received an appointment suggestion, a message will be shown at the top of
the centre display.
1.
Tap the message.
2.
If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap
on the Accept button. Otherwise press
either of the Send new proposal or
Decline buttons.
For certain markets, the system reminds you of a
scheduled appointment time as it approaches
and the navigation system7 can also guide you to
the workshop when the time comes.
Related information
•
•
Car status (p. 562)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 564)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
•
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
This time frame may vary depending on market.
Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
* Option/accessory. 563
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Sending car information to a
workshop8
It is possible to send information for the car at
any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appointment and want to help your workshop by providing them with better data so that your visit can
be planned. Sending car information is not the
same as booking a service appointment.
1.
Open the Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the Appointments button.
3.
Press the Send car data button.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre display. You can cancel data transmission by
tapping the X in the activity indicator.
Car information content
The data sent is the last information saved (the
last time the car was running) and includes information in the following areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
service requirement
•
•
the car's software version
time since last service
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN10)
the car's diagnostics data.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Book service and repair (p. 562)
Car status (p. 562)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 101)
Internet-connected car* (p. 498)
The information is sent via the car's Internet connection9.
This car information can be accessed by any
retailer if they have the car's identification number (VIN10).
8 Applies to certain markets.
9 Data is transferred (data traffic) when
10 Vehicle Identification Number.
564
using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Raise the car
When raising the car it is important that the car
jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the
intended points on the car’s underbody.
WARNING
If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this
must be placed beneath one of the four jacking points. Take care to position the workshop
jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure
that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard
so that the car remains stable and is not damaged. Always use axle stands or similar.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
}}
565
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
Related information
•
•
566
Removing a wheel (p. 531)
Jack* (p. 529)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Opening and closing the bonnet
Warning - bonnet not closed
The bonnet can be opened using the handle in
the passenger compartment and a handle under
the bonnet.
When the bonnet is released, the warning symbol and the graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the car
starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will
repeat.
Open the bonnet
NOTE
Move the handle under the bonnet upwards
to release the bonnet from the lock catch
and lift the bonnet.
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning signal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
properly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Close the bonnet
1.
Detach the support pin and secure it in its
place.
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed position.
Use the support pin to hold the bonnet
raised and attach it securely.
}}
567
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
2.
Lower the bonnet manually.
Servicing the climate control system
3.
When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection.
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path
under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise
there is a risk of personal injury.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Bonnet completely closed. The figure is schematic parts may vary depending on car model.
WARNING
Never drive with an open bonnet!
If there are any signs that the bonnet is not
properly closed whilst driving, stop immediately and close it.
Related information
•
•
Bonnet not completely closed. The figure is schematic parts may vary depending on car model.
568
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47)
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 560)
Engine compartment overview
WARNING
The overview shows some service-related components.
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start or continue to operate
automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after
the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
WARNING
The ignition system works at a very high and
hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system
must always be in ignition position 0 when
work is being performed in the engine compartment.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the engine is hot.
Coolant expansion tank
Washer fluid filler pipe11
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driver's side)
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
11
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 567)
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 586)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 571)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
569
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals and warranty can be applied.
If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular
basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk
that this will cause serious damage to the engine.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Volvo recommends:
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems to warn about the
oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low
oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil
pressure sensor, and then the driver display's
570
is
warning symbol for low oil pressure
used. Other variants have an oil level sensor,
when the driver is informed via the driver display's
warning symbol
and display texts. Certain
variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo
retailer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than
specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in
adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an
oil of a higher grade than the one specified.
Related information
•
•
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 571)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 621)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 622)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
IMPORTANT
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil level,
such as Engine oil level low
Refill 1 litre for example, then only
fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
See oil level in the centre display
Filler pipe12.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil
level gauge in the centre display when the car
has been started. The oil level should be checked
regularly.
No action with regard to engine oil level needs to
be taken until a message is shown in the driver
display.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
5 minutes with the engine switched off and
on level ground before the oil level indication
is correct.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message Engine oil level
Service required, visit a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
12
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
1.
Open the Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press Status to show the oil level.
}}
571
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
met, then the message No value available
will be shown in the centre display. This does
not mean that there is something wrong in
the car's systems.
Related information
•
•
Engine oil (p. 570)
•
•
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 621)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 622)
Ignition positions (p. 398)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx.
2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery
to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a
defective cooling system when attempting to
start the car.
Car status (p. 562)
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open the
cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is
required, unscrew the expansion tank cap
slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear.
572
Coolant expansion tank.
–
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if
necessary. The coolant level must not exceed
the MAX mark inside the expansion tank.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
Bulb replacement
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
The bulbs for the rear direction indicator, brake
light bulb and rear fog lamp can be replaced
without assistance from a workshop.
•
Make sure that the coolant mixture is
50% water and 50% coolant.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Only new coolant should be used when
replacing major cooling system components to ensure the system has sufficient
corrosion protection.
•
•
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
Related information
•
•
13
14
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
Coolant — specifications (p. 623)
LED (Ligth Emitting Diode)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Halogen headlamps are not available for all
models and markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for
more information.
NOTE
An LED13 type lamp must be replaced by a
workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
NOTE
For information about bulbs not covered in
this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certified Volvo service technician.
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Contact a workshop14 if faults other than bulbs
occur in lamps. If a fault occurs in LED13 lamps,
the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in ignition
position 0 when replacing bulbs.
Related information
•
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
(p. 575)
Changing brake light bulb (p. 576)
}}
573
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
•
•
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 577)
Exterior lamp positions
Bulb specifications (p. 578)
The exterior lighting of the car uses a number of
different lamps. An LED15 type lamp must be
replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Lamps, rear
Lamps, front
Brake light - central, high-level (LED15)
Fog lamp
Position lamps (LED)
Direction indicators
Daytime running lights/position lamps/direction indicators (LED)15
Brake lights
Main beam (LED)
Dipped beam (LED)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED)
15
574
Reversing lamps (LED)
Related information
•
•
•
Bulb replacement (p. 573)
Bulb specifications (p. 578)
Lighting control (p. 134)
LED (Light Emmitting Diod)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing the rear direction
indicator bulb
Bulbs for rear direction indicators are located
behind the panel in the side of the cargo area.
3.
Unscrew the spring bolt anticlockwise and
remove the supporting bridge. It is easiest to
allow the screw to remain in the supporting
bridge.
4.
Undo the grey bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
5.
Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
1.
Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge
to detach it.
6.
Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
2.
Move the insulation aside to access the supporting bridge.
7.
Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
8.
Fit the supporting bridge with associated
spring bolt and make sure that the clips align
in the correct position. Tighten the spring
bolt until it stops (max. 2 Nm).
9.
Move back the insulation and then hook in
the panel and press it back into place.
}}
575
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Changing brake light bulb
Bulbs for brake lights are located behind the
panel in the side of the cargo area.
Related information
•
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Bulb specifications (p. 578)
Bulb replacement (p. 573)
3.
Undo the black bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
4.
Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise
1.
Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge
to detach it.
5.
2.
Move the insulation aside to access the
brake light bulb.
Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
6.
Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
7.
Move back the insulation and then hook in
the panel and press it back into place.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
576
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Bulb specifications (p. 578)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
7.
Plug in the connector.
The rear foglight is fitted in the rear bumper on
the driver's side.
8.
Insert the hook on the wide part of the foglight unit in the rear bumper and rotate the
unit inwards so that the clips engage.
Related information
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Bulb specifications (p. 578)
The rear fog light is only fitted on the driver's side.
1.
Loosen the foglight unit on the driver's side
by inserting a flat object, such as a table
knife or a screwdriver, on the bulb kit's narrower short side of the keypad and then prize
the foglight unit out.
2.
Unplug the connector.
3.
Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
4.
Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
5.
Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
6.
Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
577
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Bulb specifications
The specifications apply to the bulbs for the rear
direction indicator bulbs brake light bulb and
rear fog light bulb.
Contact a workshop16 if faults occur in other
lamps.
Function
WA
Type
Rear direction indicators
24
PY24W
Brake lights
21
H21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
A
Watt
Related information
•
•
16
578
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Bulb replacement (p. 573)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Starter battery
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
The starter battery should be replaced by a
workshop17.
•
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
The starter battery is used to start up the electrical system and drive the starter motor as well as
other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed for
the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop
and regenerative charging, and to support the
functionality of the car's different systems.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the starter battery
are correctly connected and properly tightened.
17
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
Charging points
When connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger, use the car's charging points in
the engine compartment.
Negative charging point
Positive charging point
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery and the
support battery, only use a modern battery
charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
charging function must not be used since it
may damage the battery.
During charging, both the starter battery and the
support battery are charged.
}}
579
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
the message in the driver display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external starter battery or battery
charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
NOTE
Location
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
The starter battery is located in the engine compartment.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
IMPORTANT
On certain models, the battery is attached
with a retaining strap. Make sure the retaining
strap is properly tightened.
580
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Specifications
Battery
H6 AGM
Voltage (V)
H7 AGM
12
12
12
760
720
800
Size, L×B×H
278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5
inches)
278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5
inches)
315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5
inches)
Capacity (Ah)
70
70
80
Cold start
A
B
H6 EFB
capacityA
-
CCAB
(A)
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
The starter battery's container size must be
consistent with the dimensions for the original battery.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of the same type must be
fitted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
Related information
•
•
•
Symbols on the batteries (p. 583)
Support battery (p. 582)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 443)
581
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Support battery
NOTE
Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the
starter battery, are equipped with a support battery.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
starter battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's
starting sequence.
•
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
cease to work after the connection of an
external starter battery or battery charger:
•
When the capacity of the starter battery
has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.
•
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to
high current take-off means:
•
The engine auto-starts without the driver lifting his/her foot from the foot brake pedal.
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
The support battery is located down in the engine compartment. The starter battery is also shown here (top).
582
IMPORTANT
The higher the current take-off in the car,
the more the alternator must be working
and the batteries charging = Increased
fuel consumption.
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged so
much that the car has no normal electrical
functions and the engine is then jump-started
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function may continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the
battery has not had the opportunity to
recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is
insufficient time to charge the battery with a
battery charger, the recommendation is to
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function
until the battery has been recharged by the
car. In an outside temperature of approx.
+15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to
be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a
lower outside temperature, the charging time
may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external
battery charger.
Size, L×B×H
150×90×130 mm
(5.9×3.5×5.1
inches)
Capacity (Ah)
10
A
B
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Symbols on the batteries
There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries.
Use protective goggles.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of the same type must be
fitted.
Related information
•
•
•
Further information in the
owner's manual for the car.
Starter battery (p. 579)
Start/Stop function (p. 419)
Symbols on the batteries (p. 583)
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
The battery contains corrosive acid.
Specifications
Voltage (V)
12
Cold start capacityA CCAB (A)
170
}}
583
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses and central electrical units
||
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Risk of explosion.
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Must be taken for recycling.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support battery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
•
•
584
Starter battery (p. 579)
Support battery (p. 582)
Location of central electrical units
Engine compartment
Under the left-hand front seat
Related information
•
•
•
Replacing a fuse (p. 585)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 586)
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
(p. 590)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
1.
Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2.
Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3.
If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
•
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
(p. 590)
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
WARNING
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about
the fuses not mentioned in the owner's manual. If this is not performed correctly, it can
cause serious damage to the electrical systems.
Related information
•
•
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 584)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 586)
585
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
586
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
}}
587
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
•
Fuses 1-30, 46-50 and 54-56 are of the
"Micro" type.
•
Fuses 31-45, 51-53 are of the "MCase"
type and should be replaced by a workshop18.
Function
AA
USB port, tunnel console, rear*
5
12 V socket in tunnel console, front
15
–
–
12 V socket in cargo area*
15
Engine Control Module (ECM)
20
Ignition coils; Spark plugs
15
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); EGR cooling pump (diesel);
Glow control module (diesel)
15
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); Cooling pump for EGR (diesel);
Glow control module (diesel); Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for
output pulse (diesel)
18
588
10
Function
AA
Function
AA
Lambda probe, centre (petrol);
Lambda probe, rear (diesel)
15
–
–
Sensor for nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Sensor for brake pedal
5
–
–
Brake pedal
–
–
5
20
Control module for actuator for
engagement/change of automatic
gearbox gear positions
Airbags
5
Transmission control module
15
Accelerator pedal sensor
5
Engine Control Module (ECM)
5
Supplied when the ignition is
switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components;
Electric steering servo; Central
electronic module; Control module
for brake system
5
–
–
–
–
Electric additional heater*; OBD II
firewall
5
Alcohol lock
5
–
–
Internal relay coils
5
Right-hand headlamp
20
Left-hand headlamp
Horn
20
Siren*
5
Windscreen wipers
30
Control module for brake system
(valves, parking brake)
40
Control unit for brake system (ABS
pump)
40
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
AA
Function
AA
–
–
Fuel filter heater (diesel)
30
25
Heated windscreen*, left
40
–
Heated windscreen*, right
40
Control function for support battery
5
Left-hand headlamp
20
Right-hand headlamp
20
Actuator for transmission
–
Right-hand headlamp; Left-hand
headlamp
30
–
–
–
–
A
Towbar control module*
25
Towbar control module*
40
–
Power driver seat*
–
Ampere
Related information
•
•
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 584)
Replacing a fuse (p. 585)
20
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
* Option/accessory. 589
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
Fuses under the left-hand front seat protect,
amongst other things, electrical sockets, displays and door modules.
590
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
The fuse box in the engine compartment provides space for several spare fuses. On the inside
of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the
procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
•
AA
Function
AA
Control module for reduction of
nitrous oxides (diesel)
30
Driver display
5
Keypad in centre console
5
Sun sensor
Positions
•
Function
Fuses 1-8, 40-42 and 55-58 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop19.
Fuses 9-34, 50-54 and 60-91 are of the
"Micro" type.
Function
AA
Audio control module (amplifier)
(certain variants)
40
Central Electric Module A: Sensors,
radar units, power seats*.
40
Central Electric Module B: Sensors,
radar units, power seats*.
40
Fan module for climate control system, front
40
Power operated tailgate*
25
Power seat*, right
20
Parking heater*
25
Door module in right-hand rear
door
20
Steering wheel module
5
20
Module for start knob and for parking brake control
5
Door module in left-hand rear door
Door module in left-hand front door
20
Centre display
5
Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call
5
–
Door module in right-hand front
door
20
Module for multi-band antenna
5
Seat heating, rear*
15
Relay coils
5
Module for detecting foot movement* (for opening the power operated tailgate)
5
Sensus control module
15
–
–
–
–
Control module for reduction of
nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Steering lock
7,5
Diagnostic socket OBDII
10
Control module for climate control
system
7,5
Alcohol lock
5
Lock motor for backrest on rear
left-hand side
15
Movement detector*
19
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
–
TV* (certain markets)
5
}}
* Option/accessory. 591
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
AA
Function
AA
Function
AA
Lock motor for backrest on rear
right-hand side
15
–
–
7,5
Rear window defroster
30
–
–
Seatbelt pretensioner module, lefthand side
40
Seatbelt pretensioner module
5
Interior lighting; Dimming of interior
rearview mirror*; Rain and light
sensor*; Control panels in rear
doors and cargo area
5
Seatbelt pretensioner module,
right-hand side
40
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*:
control module, exterior reversing
sound
Humidity sensor
5
–
Control module for fuel pump
20
Coolant pump
Steering wheel module for heated
steering wheel*
–
592
–
–
Control module for driver support
functions
5
–
Alcohol lock
5
Sun sensor
5
Wireless mobile charger*; USB port
5
10
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control
module*
15
–
–
15
Coolant pump
10
–
–
Parking camera*
5
–
–
Control module for airbags and
seatbelt tensioners
5
A
–
Headlamp washers*
25
Rear window washer
25
–
–
Rear window wiper
15
–
–
Panorama roof with sun blind*
20
–
–
–
–
–
Ampere
Related information
•
•
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 584)
Replacing a fuse (p. 585)
–
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
•
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or
concentrated alcohol to clean the interior,
since this may damage the upholstery as
well as other interior materials.
•
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead
using a moistened cloth containing the
cleaning agent.
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595)
Cleaning the centre display
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596)
Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
the centre display's performance and readability.
Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre
cloth.
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 596)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 597)
To clean the centre display:
1.
Turn off the centre display with a long press
on the home button.
2.
Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of
equivalent quality. The screen should be
wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth
with small circular movements. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3.
Activate the display with a short press on the
home button.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 594)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595)
}}
593
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre
display must be free from sand and dirt.
IMPORTANT
When cleaning the centre display, only use
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pressure can damage the screen.
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the centre display. Do not use window cleaning agent, other cleaning agents,
aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tissue paper, these can scratch the centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
594
Cleaning the interior (p. 593)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 594)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 596)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
headlining
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 597)
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks
destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain
removers since this risks destroying the colour of
the upholstery.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 593)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 596)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 597)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the seatbelts
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Seatbelts
Inlay mats and floor mat
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo
retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
mat is secured with pins.
Related information
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 593)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 594)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 594)
•
•
•
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 596)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 597)
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
pin.
WARNING
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595)
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 596)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 597)
•
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by Volvo retailers.
Related information
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 593)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
595
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning leather upholstery
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Leather upholstery*
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a
comprehensive product – Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes – for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance with
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective cream
one to four times per year (or more if required).
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from
Volvo retailers.
Cleaning the leather upholstery
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge
and squeeze until a foam is created.
2.
596
Use the sponge on the stain in a circular
motion.
3.
4.
Thoroughly dampen the stain using the
sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain
without scrubbing.
Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the
leather to dry thoroughly
Protecting the leather upholstery
1. Apply a small amount of leather protective
agent to a cloth and then apply it to the
leather in light circular motions.
2.
Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.
Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more
resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radiation.
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We
recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for
cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove
dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the
leather on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 593)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 594)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 596)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 597)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 593)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 594)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 597)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
•
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results.
•
•
•
•
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo retailers, is
recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers.
IMPORTANT
Do not use solvent that contains alcohol
when cleaning the glass for the driver display.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are
easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a
clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular
motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre
cloth with a little clean water.
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 594)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596)
Cleaning the exterior
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
Handwashing (p. 598)
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
Related information
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 593)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 593)
597
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Polishing and waxing
IMPORTANT
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
to give the paintwork extra protection. The car
does not need to be polished until it is at least
one year old. However, the car can be waxed
during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in
direct sunlight, the surface being polished
should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F).
•
•
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car
paintwork.
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
The following steps are good to remember when
washing the car:
Handwashing (p. 598)
•
Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This
can cause the detergent or wax to dry and
have an abrasive effect.
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. For example, use soft paper or
sponge soaked in plenty of water. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discolouration.
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
•
Wash the underbody, including wheel housings and bumpers.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
•
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the
surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
the packaging carefully. Many preparations
contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
598
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is
not covered by Volvo warranty.
Handwashing
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of
water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce
the risk of water drying stains which may
need to be polished out.
•
After the car has been washed, tar from
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get
rid of the last spots after the car has been
washed.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
IMPORTANT
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
•
Make sure that the panoramic roof and
sun visor are closed before washing the
car.
•
Never use polishing agent with abrasive
properties on the panoramic roof.
•
Never use wax on the rubber mouldings
around the panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
holes in the doors and in the sills after washing the car.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but
use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
599
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Automatic car wash
IMPORTANT
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh.
For car washes where the car is pulled forward with rolling wheels, the following applies:
1.
Automatic car wash
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Washing the car by hand is recommended
to achieve a good result, or to supplement automatic car washes with washing by hand.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the car is not washed
in an automatic car wash during the first few
months (this is because the paintwork has
not fully hardened).
IMPORTANT
Before driving the car into an automatic car
wash, deactivate the functions for automatic
braking when stationary and automatic parking brake application. If these functions are
not deactivated, the brake system will jam
when the car is stationary and the car will not
be able to move.
2.
Make sure that the door mirrors are
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured,
antennas retracted or removed, otherwise
they risk being damaged by the automatic car wash.
3.
Drive into the car wash.
4.
Switch off the "Automatic braking at
standstill" function using the switch on
the tunnel console.
5.
Switch off the "Automatic parking brake
application" function via the top view of
the centre display.
6.
Switch off the engine by pressing the
start button next to the steering wheel.
Hold the button depressed for at least
2 seconds.
The car is ready for the car wash.
Related information
•
•
600
Before washing the car, make sure that
the automatic rain sensor is deactivated,
otherwise there is the risk of it starting
and damaging the wiper arms.
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handwashing (p. 598)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
High-pressure washing
Cleaning the wiper blades
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
High-pressure washing
Wiper blades
When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle
does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the
surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
the service life of wiper blades.
•
•
NOTE
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Handwashing (p. 598)
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
position.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
Handwashing (p. 598)
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
601
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
trim components
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of anodised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
around the side windows.
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised
aluminium parts, this can result in discolouration and destroy the surface treatment.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
retailers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When
using such a cleaning agent the instructions
must be followed carefully.
Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH
value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause
discolouration of anodised aluminium components*, as illustrated. We advise against use of
abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
Handwashing (p. 598)
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
602
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning wheel rims
Rustproofing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
The car has effective protection against corrosion.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
Handwashing (p. 598)
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Rustproofing (p. 603)
•
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603)
Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of
metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a
high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected
and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plastic components, abrasion protection and supplemental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the
chassis, exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast aluminium.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally
requires no maintenance, but a good way to further reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the
car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must always be avoided on glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as
soon as they are discovered.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 597)
Polishing and waxing (p. 598)
Handwashing (p. 598)
Automatic car wash (p. 600)
High-pressure washing (p. 601)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 602)
603
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Car paintwork
The paintwork consists of several layers and is
an important part of the car's rustproofing, and
should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the
onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.
Related information
•
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 604)
•
Colour codes (p. 605)
Touching up minor paintwork
damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
When repairing paint damage, the car must be
clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
NOTE
When repairing the paintwork, it must be
clean and dry and at a temperature of at least
15°C.
Materials that may be needed
• Primer20 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated
bumpers.
20
21
604
•
Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks21.
•
•
Masking tape.
fine sand paper20.
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
If the damage has not reached down to the
metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly
after the surface has been cleaned.
NOTE
When paint is repaired the surface must be
clean and dry. The temperature of the surface
should be at least 15 °C (60 °F).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
1.
Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a
primer is appropriate. In the event of damage
to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used to give better results - spray
into the lid of the spray can and brush on
thinly.
2.
Before painting, gentle polishing using a very
fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly
and left to dry.
3.
Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with
a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer
has dried.
For scratches, proceed as described above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints are available
from Volvo retailers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
•
•
Car paintwork (p. 604)
Colour codes (p. 605)
Colour codes
Colour code
The colour code label is located on the car's
right-hand rear door pillar and becomes visible
when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used.
Related information
•
•
Car paintwork (p. 604)
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 604)
605
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing the wiper blade, rear
window
1.
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
wiper blades can be replaced.
Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it
from the windscreen to lock position.
NOTE
There is a lock position at half extension
angle that may feel like resistance, this lock
prevents the arm from falling back against the
windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled
past the lock for wiper blade replacement.
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
2.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull
to the right until the blade loosens from the
arm.
3.
Press the new wiper blade into place. You
should hear a click. Check that it is firmly
installed.
4.
Lower the wiper arm.
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 607)
IMPORTANT
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower
section of the blade to the right.
Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper
blades.
Related information
•
•
•
606
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Service position is activated/deactivated via the function view in the centre display when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not on. Press the button
located on the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
wiper blades can be replaced.
Replacing a windscreen wiper blade
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is
heard.
3.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4.
Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
The wiper blades are different lengths.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
* Option/accessory. 607
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Wiper blades in service position
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service
position (vertical position) when, for example,
they are being replaced.
are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated
via the function view in the centre display:
Press the Wiper Service
Position button. The light indicator in the button illuminates
when the service position is
activated. Upon activation, the
wipers move to standing
straight up. To deactivate the
service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extinguishes when the service position is deactivated.
The wiper blades also exit service position if:
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen)
they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
position, make sure that they are not frozen
down.
Activating/deactivating service mode
•
•
•
•
Windscreen wiping is activated.
Windscreen washing is activated.
Rain sensor activated.
The car is driven away.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the activation of wiping, washing or the rain sensor, as well as before driving. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the
bonnet.
Service mode can be activated/deactivated when
the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers
608
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
as well as the windscreen and rear window.
Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when
the temperature is under the freezing point.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 161)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 163)
•
•
•
Wiper blades in service position (p. 608)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 159)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 606)
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir
with a blue cap. The reservoir is used for windscreen washer, rear window washer and headlamp washers*
NOTE
When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in
the driver display, together with the
symbol.
•
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres (5.8
qts).
•
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres
(3.7 qts).
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 160)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 162)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 164)
•
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160)
* Option/accessory. 609
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information such
as chassis number, type designation, colour
code, etc.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all
contact with an authorised Volvo retailer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
612
SPECIFICATIONS
Decal for type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights and
code designation for exterior colour and type
approval number. The decal is positioned on the
door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R134a.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's serial
number.
Label for engine oil.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R1234yf.
}}
613
SPECIFICATIONS
||
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial
number.
Decal for the car's identification number - VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
614
Related information
•
Air conditioning — specifications (p. 624)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions
mm
inches
Dimensions
mm
inches
A
Ground clearanceA
205
8.1
E
Load length,
floor
887
34.9
B
Wheelbase
2702
106.4
F
Height
1658
65,3
C
Length
4425
174.2
G
Load height
733
28.9
D
Load length,
floor, folded
seat
1670
65.7
H
Front track
1601
63.0
I
Rear track
1626
64.0
J
Load width,
floor
1059
41.7
A
B
Dimensions
mm
inches
K
Width
1873
(1863B)
73,7
(73,3B)
L
Width including
door mirrors
2034
80,1
M
Width including
folded-in door
mirrors
1910
75.2
For kerb weight + 1 person. Varies slightly depending on tyre
dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).
Body width.
}}
615
SPECIFICATIONS
||
616
Related information
•
Weights (p. 617)
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and
towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence
the load capacity and are not included in the kerb
weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
extra equipment or accessories. This means
that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
as other accessories such as towbar, load
carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille,
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular
car.
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information
•
•
Type designations (p. 612)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 618)
617
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and towball load
Max. weight braked trailer
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables.
NOTE
Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is
recommended for trailers heavier than 1800
kg.
A
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
T5 AWD
B4204T14
Automatic
2100
110
T5 AWD
B4204T18
Automatic
2100
110
T5 AWD
B4204T36
Automatic
2100
110
D4 AWD
D4204T12
Automatic
2100
110
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to
exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight
(including towball load) by a maximum of
100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal
requirements for the vehicle combination,
such as speed, etc. must be observed.
618
SPECIFICATIONS
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
750
50
Related information
•
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 612)
Weights (p. 617)
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 449)
* Option/accessory. 619
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine specifications
NOTE
Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be found in the
table below.
Engine
Engine codeA
Output
Output
Max. rated power
Max. rated power
Torque
(kW/rpm)
(hp/rpm)
(kW/rpm)
(hp/rpm)
(Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
T5 AWD
B4204T14
182/5500
247/5500
–
–
350/1800-4800
4
T5 AWD
B4204T18
185/5500
252/5500
206/5500
280/5500
350/1500–4800
4
T5 AWD
B4204T36
183/5500
249/5500
–
–
350/1800-4500
4
D4 AWD
D4204T12
140/4000
190/4000
–
–
400/1750-2500
4
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
•
•
•
620
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Type designations (p. 612)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 621)
Coolant — specifications (p. 623)
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil — specifications
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
A
T5 AWD
B4204T14
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
T5 AWD
B4204T18
approx. 5.6
T5 AWD
B4204T36
approx. 5.6
D4 AWD
D4204T12
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
approx. 5.6
approx. 5.2
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 612)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 622)
Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 571)
Engine oil (p. 570)
621
SPECIFICATIONS
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:
•
•
•
•
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C (-22 °F)
or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F).
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
the engine.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo recommends:
Related information
•
•
622
Engine oil — specifications (p. 621)
Engine oil (p. 570)
SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant — specifications
Transmission fluid — specifications
Brake fluid — specifications
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging. Consult a Volvo retailer if unsure.
Under normal driving conditions, the transmission fluid does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, it may be necessary in
adverse driving conditions.
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake
cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in
turn act on a mechanical brake.
To avoid health risks, different types of glycol
must not be mixed.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid:
AW1
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is changed
or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
1
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
623
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel tank - volume
The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the
table below.
All models
Litres (approx.)
US gallons (approx.)
54
Tank capacity for AdBlue®2
Air conditioning — specifications
The refillable tank capacity for the additive
AdBlue is approx. 14.5 litres.
The car's climate control system uses a freonfree refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a
depending on market. Information about which
refrigerant the car's climate control system uses
is printed on a decal located on the inside of the
bonnet.
Related information
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438)
14.2
Related information
•
Filling fuel (p. 431)
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
2
624
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
SPECIFICATIONS
Decal for R1234yf
Symbol
WARNING
Meaning
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
A trained and certified technician is
required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol
Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
Compressor oil
Refrigerant
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Weight
Prescribed grade
540 g (1.19 lbs)
R134a
Volume
Prescribed grade
130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.)
VC100yf
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
WARNING
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
Weight
Prescribed grade
480 g
R1234yf
Related information
•
Servicing the climate control system (p. 568)
625
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured
in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions are
measured in gram CO2 per km.
litres/100 km
The fuel consumption and emission values in the
above table are based on special EU driving
cycles (see below), which apply for cars with kerb
weight in basic version and without extra equip-
626
motorway driving
automatic gearbox
NOTE
Tyre rating for rolling resistance
according to EU directive no.
1222/2009
gram CO2/km
D4 AWD (D4204T12)
manual gearbox
mixed driving
Explanation
T5 AWD (B4204T14)
urban driving
N/A
If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement.
Not applicable
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
B
–
–
–
–
–
–
C
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
B
–
–
–
–
–
–
C
–
–
–
–
–
–
ment. The car's weight may increase depending
on its equipment level. This, along with how heavily the car is loaded, increases its fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
There are several reasons for fuel consumption
that is higher than the values in the table. Examples of these include:
SPECIFICATIONS
•
If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects its weight.
•
•
Driving style.
•
•
High speed causes increased air resistance.
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic version of the model, as this could increase rolling resistance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the examples above could
increase consumption considerably.
There may be huge deviations in fuel consumption if comparing to the EU driving cycles (see
below), which are used in the certification of the
car and on which consumption figures in the
table are based. For further information, please
refer to the referenced regulations.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel quality are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption.
EU driving cycles
The official fuel consumption figures are based
on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory
environment ("EU driving cycles"), all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and
715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6), 2017/1151 and
2017/1153. Since the driving cycles are also
used for quality control, there are stringent
requirements for test repeatability. Testing is
therefore conducted in a controlled manner and
only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). The results of the
official figures are therefore not naturally representative of what the customer sees in actual
use.
Related information
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 612)
Weights (p. 617)
Economical driving (p. 428)
The regulations cover the driving cycles "Urban
driving" and "Motorway driving":
•
Urban driving – the measurement starts
with a cold start of the engine. The driving is
simulated.
•
Motorway driving – the car is accelerated
and braked at speed of 0-120 km/h
(0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.
The official value for mixed driving, which is
shown in the table, is a combination of the results
from the "Urban driving" and "Motorway driving"
driving cycles in accordance with legal requirements.
To determine the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2
emissions) during the two driving cycles, the
exhaust gases were collected. These were then
analysed to determine the value for CO2 emissions.
627
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
In certain countries not all approved sizes are
indicated by the registration document or other
Engine
✓ = Approved
man/
235/60R17
235/55R18
235/50R19
245/45R20
245/40R21
aut
7,5x17x50,5
7,5x18x50,5
7,5x19x50,5
8x20x50.5
8x21x50.5
T5 AWD (B4204T14)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T5 AWD (B4204T18)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T5 AWD (B4204T36)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
D4 AWD (D4204T12)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Related information
628
documents. The following table shows all
approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
•
Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed
rating for tyres (p. 629)
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 612)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519)
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 520)
SPECIFICATIONS
Lowest permitted tyre load index
and speed rating for tyres
The table below shows the minimum permitted
load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine
man/
Minimum permitted load index (LI)A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
aut
T5 AWD
B4204T14
aut
96
V
T5 AWD
B4204T18
aut
96
V
T5 AWD
B4204T36
aut
96
V
D4 AWD
D4204T12
aut
96
V
A
B
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 630)
Type designations (p. 612)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519)
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 520)
629
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved tyre pressures
NOTE
Approved tyre pressures for each engine alternative can be found in the table.
Engine
Tyre size
235/60 R17
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Speed
Load, 1-3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
0-160 km/h (0-100 mph)
230
230
260
260
260
160+ km/h (100+ mph)
240
240
260
260
–
max 80 km/h (max 50 mph)
420
420
420
420
–
235/55 R18
All engines
235/50 R19
245/45 R20
245/40 R21
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
Economical driving.
In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
•
•
•
630
Type designations (p. 612)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 522)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
413
function
managing speed
overtaking
radar sensor
setting the time interval
281
284, 285
289, 290
311
286, 287
A/C (Air conditioning)
202
ABS
anti-lock brakes
401
AdBlue
filling
operation
Symbols and messages
tank volume
436
438
437
440
624
ACC – Adaptive cruise control
281, 283,
284, 285, 286, 287, 289, 290, 291, 292, 294
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater)
213
Adjusting the steering wheel
175
Accessories and extra equipment
installation
Aerial
location
244
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD
A
37
37
Active bending lights
140
Active main beam
138
Active Park Assist
387, 388, 391, 392,
393, 394
function
387, 388, 392, 393, 394
Limitations
392
operation
388, 391
Symbols and messages
394
Active Yaw Control
Adapting driving characteristics
264
262, 414
Adaptive Cruise Control
281, 283, 284,
285, 286, 287, 289, 290, 291, 292, 294
change cruise control functionality
292
fault tracing
292
Airbag
Activating/deactivating
driver's side
passenger side
Airbag, see Airbag
49
52
49
50, 52
49
Recirculation
table of options
Air quality
allergies and asthma
passenger compartment filter
195
187
181, 182
182
183
Air recirculation
195
Alarm
deactivation
motion and tilt sensors
reduced alarm level
255
256
255
258
Alcohol lock
399, 400
Allergy and asthma inducing substances.
182
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
413
Ambience lights
146
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
486, 487, 488
483, 485
Approach lighting
144
Apps
465
Air conditioning
202
Ashtray
546
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade
624
Assistance at risk of collision
365, 366,
367, 368, 369, 370, 372
Air conditioning system
repair
178, 190
568
Air distribution
Air vents
change
defrosting
184
184, 185
185
196
Audio and media
464
Audio settings
phone
play media
Text message
464, 495
496
475, 476
495
631
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Auto climate control
195
Auto hold
407
Automatic brake
activate and deactivate
after collision
407
407
408
Automatic car wash
600
Automatic car washes
600
Battery
jump starting
maintenance
overload
start
support
symbols on the battery
warning symbols
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop
419
Bicycle rack
towbar mounted
Automatic gearbox
kickdown
oil
trailer
410
413
623
448
Automatic locking
248
Automatic relocking
Automatic speed limiter
Auxiliary heater
AWD, All Wheel Drive
Bag holder
632
brake light
brake system
emergency brake lights
handbrake
maintenance
on gritted roads
on wet roads
142
401
142
403
403
403
402
Brake system
fluid
623
451
bulbs, specifications
578
339, 340, 341
bypass alcohol lock
400
Bluetooth
connect
connect car to Internet
phone
settings
480
499
488
497
Camera sensor
334
Bonnet, opening
567
Camera unit
322
213
Book service and repair
562
413
Brake assist
after collision
Car care
597, 598, 600, 601, 602, 603
Leather upholstery
596
408
Brake fluid
grade
Car functions
in centre display
108
623
Brake functions
401
Brake light
142
Brakes
Anti-lock braking system, ABS
automatic when stationary
brake assist system, BAS
401
401
407
402
Cargo area
electrical socket
lighting
mounting points
parcel shelf
protective net
550
546, 547
145
552
555
553
219, 242
272, 274, 275
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting
rear seat, lowering
BLIS
443, 579
443
579
443
579
582
583
583
166, 167, 169, 170
171
551
C
Cargo area floor
553
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Car holiday
428
Child safety
Car key battery low
222
Child safety locks
Car modem
connect car to Internet
settings
500
501
Car status
Tyre pressure
562
527
Car upholstery
Car washing
593, 594, 595, 596, 597
597, 598, 600, 601, 602, 603
57
Clean Zone Interior Package
182
247
Climate control
auto-regulation
centre display
experienced temperature
fan control
Parking
rear seat
sensors
temperature control
voice control
zones
178, 190
195
190
179
200
203
190
179
201, 202
180
178
Child seat
57, 58, 60, 62
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points
60
lower mounting points
59
overview table
63
positioning/fitting
60, 62
table for location
64
table of i-Size
66
table of ISOFIX
67
Upper mounting points
58
Catalytic converter
Recovery
453
Cigarette lighter
central locking
245
City Safety in crossing traffic
545
332, 333
Centre display
change appearance
117
cleaning
593
climate control
190
function view
108
Keyboard
112
messages
126, 127, 128
operation
98, 101, 105, 110
overview
95
settings
118, 119, 120
switch off and change volume
117
symbols in status bar
110
views
101
City Safety with obstructed evasive
manoeuvre
Cleaning wheel rims
603
Change of owner
120
Cleaning wiper blades
601
Checking the engine oil level
571
Clean Zone
181
City Safety™
333
326, 327, 329, 330, 334, 337
Cleaning
595, 596, 597
automatic car wash
600
car washing 597, 598, 600, 601, 602, 603
centre display
593
Fabric upholstery
593, 594, 596
rims
603
Seatbelts
595
upholstery
593, 594, 595, 596, 597
Climate control system
Refrigerant
Clock, adjustment
CO2 emissions
Coat hanger
Collision
Collision warning
Collision warning system
Pedestrian detection
Radar sensor
624
82
626
553
42, 44, 49, 55
326, 338
330
311
Colour code, paint
605
Colour codes
605
Combined instrument panel
settings
75
77
633
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Compass
calibration
459, 460
460
Condensation in headlamps
598, 600,
601, 602
Connect car to Internet
no or poor connection
via a mobile device (WiFi)
via car modem
via mobile device (Bluetooth)
503
500
500
499
Connect phone
Data
recording
transfer between car and workshop
Data link connector
35
560
38
Drive-E
Environmental philosophy
Driver Alert Control
operation
151, 153
152
153
28
355
356, 357
Data sharing
504
Daytime running lights
136
489
Deadlock
deactivation
258
259
Driver display
application menu
messages
Controls lighting
146
Defrosting
196
Driver performance
Coolant
623
Coolant, filling
572
Diesel
run out of fuel
434
435
Cooling system
overheating
Diesel particle filter
436
Driver profile
edit
select
123
125
124
442
Digital radio (DAB)
473
driver support system
262
Cornering lights
141
Corner Traction Control
264
Dimensions
Towbar
615
445
Drivetrain
Gearbox
409
42
dipped beam
137
344, 345, 346, 348
Dipstick, electronic
571
Driving
cooling system
with a tailer
442
448
276, 277
280
277, 278
279
Direction indicator
139
Driving economy
428
Direction indicators
139
Driving in water
430
direction of rotation
521
Display lighting
146
Driving mode
change
414
416
DivX®
479
Driving with a trailer
towball load
towing capacity
618
618
Crash, see Collision
Cross Traffic Alert – CTA
Cruise control
deactivate
managing speed
temporary deactivation
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert
634
Door mirrors
Dipping
resetting
D
344, 345, 346, 348
Cyclist detection
330
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package)
182
90
91
80, 81
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
E
ECO climate
416
ECO mode
activate with function button
416
418
Engine braking, automatic
426
F
Engine compartment
coolant
Engine oil
overview
572
570
569
Fan
Air distribution
Air vents
Control
185
185
200
Fault tracing for the camera sensor
323
Ferry transport
423
First aid
556
First aid kit
556
Economical driving
416, 428
Engine drag control
ECO pressure
523, 630
Engine oil
adverse driving conditions
filling
filter
grade and volume
Electrical socket
using
546
547
Electrical system
579
Electric parking brake
403
emergency brake lights
142
Emergency equipment
first aid kit
warning triangle
556
556
Emergency puncture repair kit
implementation, follow-up inspection
location
overview
Pump up tyre
sealing fluid
538
538
537
537
542
537
Emissions of carbon dioxide
626
Engine
deactivate
overheating
start
Start/Stop
397
442
396
419
264
570, 622
622
571
570
621
Engine specifications
620
Engine temperature
high
442
Environment
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control
see Messages and symbols
28
294
294, 309
Error messages in BLIS
343
Ethanol content
maximum 10 percent by volume
432
Exhaust system
436
External dimensions
615
Flooded road
430
Fluids, capacities
609, 624
Fluids and oils
623, 624
Fog lamp
front
rear
141
141
Foot brake
401
Four-C
423
Front seat
Climate control
Fan
heating
Temperature
Ventilation
190
200
191, 192
201
193
Front seat, manual
166
Front seat, power
adjusting seat
167
167
635
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Lumbar support
massage
memory function
multi-function control
FSC, ecolabelling
Fuel
fuel consumption
identifier
fuel gauge
170
169
168, 169
169, 170
23
432, 434
626
432, 434
77
Fuelling
filling
fuel filler flap
431
430
Fuel tank
volume
624
Fuel vapour
432
Fuse box
584
Fuses
changing
General
in engine compartment
under glovebox
585
584
586
590
G
Heated washer nozzles
160
Gearbox
automatic
409
410
Heater
auxiliary heater
parking heater
211
213
212
Gear positions
automatic gearbox
410
Gear selector inhibitor
412
Gear shift indicator
413
Heating
seats
steering wheel
Windows
191, 192
194
198, 199
Glass
laminated/reinforced
High engine temperature
442
148
High-pressure washing
601
Glovebox
548
Gracenote®
478
Hill descent control
activate with function button
426
427
Gross vehicle weight
617
Hill Descent Control
413
Hill start assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
408
Hill Start Assist
408
HomeLink®
program
using
456
456
458
Home safe light duration
143
Horn
174
GSI - Gear selector assistance
H
Handbrake
403, 404
Handwash
598
Hard disk
space
506
Hazard warning flashers
143
HDC
Headlamp control
head restraint
636
426
134, 146
173
425, 426, 427
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System)
IC (Inflatable Curtain)
182
55
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ID, Volvo
26
Identification number
39
Ignition position
398, 399
Immobiliser
230
Immobilizer
Immobiliser
230
Indicator symbols
83
Individual drive mode
55
Inflatable Curtain
55
Information display
75, 77
Infotainment system (Audio and media)
464
Instrument lighting
146
Instruments and controls
IntelliSafe
Driver support
Interior Air Quality System
Interior lighting
562
564
561
iPod®, connection
72
73
72, 73
612
480
Laminated glass
148
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System
524
Lamps
change
location
specifications
trailer
573
574
578
450
Lane assistance
operation
360
J
Jack
Journey statistics
Jump starting
182
144, 146
Interior rearview mirror
Dipping
151
152
Intermittent wiping
159
Internet, see Internet-connected car
498
529
80
443
Lane assistance – Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA)
357, 359, 360, 362, 364
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)
K
Kerb weight
Key
31
L
Labels
location of
414
Inflatable curtain
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car
right-hand drive car
Internet-connected car
book service and repair
send car information
system updates
Keyboard
change language
Keyless
Locking/unlocking
settings
touch-sensitive surfaces
617
217
112, 115
115
242
243
241
Keypad in the steering wheel
174
Key tag
217
357, 359, 360,
362, 364
Language
118
Leather upholstery, washing instructions
596
Level control
damping
423
License agreement
Lifting tool
86, 507
529
Lighting
active bending lights
140
approach lighting
144
automatic lighting, passenger compartment
144
637
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Automatic main beam
138
brake light
142
bulbs, specifications
578
controls
134, 144, 146
controls lighting
146
cornering lights
141
daytime running lights
136
dipped beam
137
direction indicators
139
display lighting
146
emergency brake lights
142
fog lamp
141
Hazard warning flashers
143
home safe lighting
143
instrument lighting
146
in the passenger compartment
144, 146
lamp positions
574
main beam
137, 138
position lamps
135
rear fog lamp
141
settings
135
Lighting, bulb replacement
brake light
direction indicator, rear
rear fog lamp
638
573
576
575
577
Loading
General
load retaining eyelets
long load
550
552
550
Max. roof load
Media player
compatible file formats
voice control
Loading hooks
551
Load retaining eyelets
cargo area
552
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control
Collision Warning with Auto Brake
Lock
locking
unlocking
219
219
Messages in BLIS
617
474, 475, 476
505, 506
131
294
337
343
Lockable wheel bolts
530
Messages in displays
manage
saved
Lock confirmation
setting
216
217
Meters
fuel gauge
77
Mileage
78
Locking/unlocking
tailgate
221, 243
Misting
condensation in headlamps
91, 126
93, 127
94, 128
Low battery voltage
Battery
443
Mobile phone, see Phone
489
Low speed control
activate with function button
425
425
Mood lighting
145
Motion sensor
255
M
597, 600
N
Limitations for Driver Alert Control
357
Main beam
137, 138
Limp home
409
Load carriers
551
Maintained climate comfort
start/shut-off
208
208
maintenance
Rustproofing
603
Net
cargo area
553
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
O
octane rating
Oil, see also Engine oil
432
621, 622
Oil level low
571
Online car
no or poor connection
498
503
Option/accessory
Output
outside temperature gauge
Overheating
Overtaking Assistance
Owner's manual
ecolabelling
in centre display
in mobile
Owner information
21
620
82
442, 448
289, 290, 306
21
23
17, 18
20
16
P
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 52
Paddle on the steering wheel
Paintwork
colour code
damage and touch-up
174
605
604, 605
Panorama roof
opening and closing
pinch protection
sun blind
ventilation position
PAP - Active Park Assist
156
148
154, 158
157
387, 388, 391,
392, 393, 394
Parcel shelf
555
Park Assist
function
373, 374, 375, 376, 377
373, 374, 375
Park assist camera
378, 379, 381, 383,
384, 385, 386
383
settings
Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater)
212
Passenger compartment interior
ashtray
cigarette lighter
electrical socket
glovebox
Sun visor
tunnel console
544
546
545
546
548
549
545
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic
144
Personal information (Privacy policy)
432
433
Park assist camera's limitations
384
Petrol particle filter
Park assist lines for Park assist camera
381
Parking
on hill
406
Parking brake
activate and deactivate
automatic activation
low battery voltage
403
404
405
406
Parking climate
Symbols and messages
203
210
Phone
Calls
change to another
connect
connect automatically
connect manually
disconnect
remove
text message
voice control
Parking heater
212
Phone charger
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch
Passenger compartment filter
52
36
petrol
Pilot Assist
183
overtaking
488
493, 496
493
489
491
492
492
493
494
130
497
296, 299, 300, 301, 302,
304, 306, 307, 308, 309
306
639
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Pinch protection
resetting
148
149
R
PIN code
501
Radar sensor
Limitations
Pocket park assist - PAP
387, 388, 391,
392, 393, 394
Polishing
598
Position lamp
135
Power operated tailgate
248
Power panorama roof
154
Power save mode
443
Power seat
Power windows
pinch protection
Preconditioning
start/shut-off
Timer
Privacy policy
167
149, 150
148
204
204
205
36
Private locking
Activating/deactivating
253
253
Protective net
553
Pump up tyre
542
Puncture
537
heating
interior
283, 311
312
Radar unit
311
Radio
change radio frequency and radio station
DAB
search for radio station
settings
start
voice control
468
469
473
470
471
468
131
Radio favourites
470
Rain sensor
160, 161
Rain sensor memory function
161
Raising the car
565
Rear seat
Climate control
head restraint
heating
lowering the backrest
190
173
192
171
Rearview and door mirrors
compass
Dipping
door
electrically retractable
459, 460
152
151, 153
153
rear window
heating
Washers
Wiper
199
163, 164
163, 164
Recommendations during driving
428
Recommendations for loading
550
Recovery
455
Red Key
settings
226
227
Refrigerant
climate control system
568
624
Refuelling
AdBlue
431, 438
438
Regeneration
433, 436
Remote control, HomeLink®
programmable
456
Remote control immobiliser
230
Remote control key
battery replacement
connect to driver profile
detachable key blade
loss
range
217
222
125
227
226
222
Remote control key system, type approval 232
Remote updates
640
199
151
561
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Resetting, trip meter
80
Sealing fluid
537
Resetting the door mirrors
153
Seat, see Seats
166
Restore settings
change of owner
Driver profile
121
120
125
Retractable power door mirrors
153
Seatbelt
buckle/unbuckle
pregnancy
seatbelt reminder
seatbelt tensioner
44
45
42
47
46
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts
44
SIM card
Seatbelt reminder
47
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System)
seatbelt tensioner
Resetting
Skidding
429
47
Ski hatch
552
Seatbelt tensioner
46
slippery driving conditions
429
Reversing camera
Reversing sensors
378, 379, 381, 383,
384, 385, 386
373, 374, 375, 376, 377
Road run-off protection
Road sign information
Limitations
operation
366, 367, 368
349, 350, 352
354
350, 352, 353, 354
Roll Stability Control
263
Roof load, max. weight
617
RSC (Roll Stability Control)
263
Run out of fuel
diesel
435
Rustproofing
603
Safety mode
start/movement
sensors
Air quality
Climate control
Sensus
connection and entertainment
S
Safety
pregnancy
Seats
heating
manual front seat
memory function front seat
power front seat
Ventilation
whiplash protection
42
42
55
56
191, 192
166
168, 169
167
193
43
183
179
32
Sensus Navigation
352
Service position
608
Service programme
560
Settings
Categories
contextual
Resetting
settings menu
Side airbag
Side Impact Protection System
Software updates
Soot filter
spare wheel
Speed camera
121
122
119
121
121
54
54, 55
501
54, 55
35
436
534, 535
354
Speed limiter
268, 271, 272, 275
deactivation
271
getting started
269
temporary deactivation
270
Speed ratings, tyres
519
Spin control
264
Stabiliser
trailer
Stability and traction control system
operation
449
264, 267
265, 266
641
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Stability system
Stains
264
593, 594, 595, 596, 597
Start/Stop
deactivate
Driving
Limitations
419
420
419
421
Starting the engine
after collision
396
56
Start the car
396
Steering assistance at risk of collision
365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 372
Steering assistance at risk of head-on collision
369, 370
154, 158
148
Sunroof
pinch protection
148
Sun visor
mirror lighting
549
145
Support battery
582
Switching off the engine
397
397
262
Switch off engine
Steering force level, see Steering force
262
Steering lock
175
Symbols
indicator symbols
Steering wheel paddles
Stickers
location of
Stone chips and scratches
Stop/start function
174, 175
194
174
174
175
411
612
604, 605
419
544
548
549
545
Sun blind
panorama roof
pinch protection
Steering force, speed related
Steering wheel
heating
keypad
paddle
steering wheel adjustment
642
Storage spaces
glovebox
Sun visor
tunnel console
83
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking
221, 243
opening/closing with foot movement 252
power
248
unlock from inside
246
Temperature
Control
experienced
201, 202
179
Temporary spare
spare wheel
534
Terms and conditions
services
user
36
504
Through-load hatch
552
Tilt detector
255
Tools
529
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control
centre display status field
Collision Warning with Auto Brake
parking climate
294
110
337
210
Symbols and messages for Assistance at
risk of collision
372
Towing
system updates
561
Towing capacity and towball load
618
Towing eye
453
Traction control
264
Traffic information
471
Total airing function
Towbar
foldable
specifications
217, 245
444
446
445
452, 455
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Trailer
cable
driving with a trailer
Lamps
snaking
Trailer stability assist
Transmission
449
448
448
450
449
264, 449
409
Transmission oil
grade
623
Tread
521
Tread depth
Tread wear indicators
Trip computer
521, 536
521
78, 79
Trip meter
78
Trip meter, resetting
80
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control
292
TSA - trailer stability assist
449
TSA - Trailer stability assist
264
Tunnel console
545
Tunnel detection
137
TV
481
482
482
settings
watch
Type approval
radar system
remote control key system
Type designations
524
630
536
612
Tyre dimension
519, 529
Tyre load index
519
Tyre pressure
Adjust
Check
recommended
522
522
523
Tyre pressure label
523
Tyre pressure monitoring
action
Calibrate
Status
Tyre pressure table
Tyres
dimensions
direction of rotation
installation
pressure
puncture repair
removal
rotation
specifications
storage
tread depth
tread wear indicators
tyre pressure monitoring
tyre pressure table
winter tyres
316
232
U
Units
118
Unknown car part
259
Unlocking
settings
with key blade
220
229
524
528
525
527
USB
jack for connecting media
481
630
V
518
628
521
533
630
537
531
518
628, 629, 630
518
536
521
Ventilation
seats
Vibration damper
Video
settings
Voice control
Climate control
phone
radio and media
settings
184, 185
193
444
478, 480
479
180
130
131
131
643
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Voice recognition
128
VOL marking
518
Volvo ID
create and register
26
26
Washers
Headlamps
rear window
washer fluid, filling
windscreen
Waxing
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control
stability and traction control system
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS
alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Low oil pressure
Parking brake applied
seatbelt reminder
starter battery not charging
Warning
644
283
264
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
162
163, 164
609
162
598
Weights
kerb weight
617
Wheel bolts
lockable
530
530
Wheel change
529
Wheel rim, dimensions
520
Wheel rims
cleaning
603
Wheels
installation
removal
snow chains
533
531
536
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions
tyre load index and speed rating
Warning sound
Parking brake
406
Warning symbols
Safety
85
42
Warning triangle
556
Washer fluid
609
Washer nozzles, heated
160
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet
delete network
628
519, 629
whiplash protection
43
Whiplash Protection System
43
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System)
43
500
503
share internet connection, hotspot
technology and security
502
504
Windows and glass
148
Windscreen
heating
198
Windscreen washing
162
Windscreen wiper
rain sensor
159
160, 161
Winter driving
429
Winter tyres
536
Winter wheels
536
Wiper blades
changing
Service position
WPC
606, 607
608
497
TP 24558 (English), AT 1746, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement